The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutAs-Built documents Project Manual for: I CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY CAPE CANAVERAL, FL 32920 As built contents: 1. Letter of certification of as built documents for arch itectu ra 1/ m echa n ica 1/ e I ectri ca I 2. Copy of certification of as built documents for civil 3. Copy of certification of as built document for structural 4. Copy of letter from Kraus Anderson assigning responsibility of as built documents to R W Paul. 5. Addendums; . Architectural Addendum Ai . Architectural Addendum A2 I . Architectural Addendum A3 I . Architectural Addendum A4 . Architectural Addendum ,11,5 I I . Architectural Addendum A6 I . Mechanical Addendum M 1 . Mechanical Addendum M2 I . Electrical Clarification E1 I . Electrical Clarification E2 I Electrical Clarification E3 I . . Electrical Clarification E4 . Swimming Pool Design 6. Complete specifications as part of the contract documents. DATE OF ISSUE: 5 JULY 2004 DOCUMENTS THROUGH DIVISION 16 ~ )3t)lLf ~. 1 Juu1 1co'(o WEBER ARCHITECTS & PLANNERS ,. 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD LONG LAKE, MN 55356 . 20 August 2006 Mr. Todd Morley City of Cape Canaveral 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 105 Polk Avenue 952.476.4434. Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 RI=' rrlllntnl Inn R. C:llito~ r"",",o r""na\lo..,,1 1"_. .......,;....."....."IJ 11.111 "^ ......,U1 ,""",....." '-'UfJ'-' ",",UII VvlOI Dear Mr. Morley: Based on the as-built documents submitted by R W Paul Construction as a subcontractor to Kraus Anderson Construction Co. the architectural, mechanical, electrical, fire alarm, and fire protection the project is built according to the submitted to and approved by the City of Cape Canaveral. Attached to this letter are two hard copies of the above elements and disks of each. These documents include all approved documents which show actual constructed details, addendums and specifications. All of which are part of the construction documents. Please call if you have any questions. Sincerely yours, NeB Weber, AlA \lIJeber Architects & Planners Florida Reg ft'AR0017512 /lE=S DROOR &- ASSOCIA TES INC. (321) 253-8233 580 N. Wickham Rd., Suite E Melbourne, FL 32935 FAX (321) 253-8232 email: noel@droorassociates.com August 2, 2006 Project #2004-22 Mr. Todd Morley City of Cape Canaveral 105 Polk Avenue Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 Re: Country Inn & Suites, Cape Canaveral nn"'""'lr l\J1r ~1If"'\r1Q\I LJ~al IVII. I"IVI 1'--' J 1 Based on the as-built survey prepared by Stottler Stagg, Job #04-0053, Revision 3 dated 7 -10-06, the above referenced project appears to be constructed according to the approved site plans with the following exceptions: 1. The east parking lot was not constructed. " The sidewalk configuration and sizes around the building varies from the L. approved drawings. 3. The paving base material was revised from the specified lime rock. 4. The retention pond bottom elevation varies from the approved plans. 5. The outfall structure location varies from the approved plans. 6. The top of the swale elevation at the north side varies from the approved plans. 7 The driveway construction including the drainage and sidewalk along the right of I. way varies slightly from the approved plans. construction, nor have we received or reviewed C: Neil Weber - Weber Architects and Associates Kent Oliver - Portview Inn & Suites Ralph Paul-R.W. Paul Construction Co. Civil & Structural Engineering Inspections PE 37259 EB-00072 1 8 ~ DROOR & ASSOCIA TES INC. (321) 253-8233 FAX (321) 253-8232 580 N. Wickham Rd., Suite E Melbourne, Fl 32935 emai/: noel@droorassociates.com August 2, 2006 Project #2004-22 Mr. Todd Morley City of Cape Canaveral 105 Polk Avenue Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 Re: Country Inn & Suites, Cape Canaveral Dear Mr_ Morley, To the best of our knowledge and based on the inspection report prepared by the threshold inspector, Universal Engineering, and TLC, the structural elements for the above referenced project appear to have been constructed according to the approved structural drawings, with minor deviations as noted on their site reports_ Please note that we did not ins~~t the project during construction_ Please call~7ve any questions. V~')!rs ;/ //I //L, ~/~ // / U 1/ j /1 ~...r;6y60 ~ .E,_ President // Urc6f and ASSocIates, Inc. t-"' C: Neil Weber - Weber Architects and Associates, lnc_ Kent Oliver - Portview Inn & Suites Ralph Paul - R W. Paul Construction Co_ il &- Structural Engineering Inspections PE 37259 EB-0007218 Pl!1 KRAUS-ANDERSON@ CONSTRUCTION COMPANY -. _ _.1_ CONTRACTORS & CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS August 2, 2006 Mr. Neil Weber Weber Architects & Planners 2280 Watertown Road Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 Re: As-Built Drawings Counh'y Inn & Suites Cape Canaveral, FL Dear Neil, Per your letter dated May 10, 2006 you have indicated that Kraus-Anderson@ Construction Company, being the listed general contractor, must provide as-built drawings for the Country Inn & Suites project in Cape Canaveral, Florida. Although Kraus-Anderson@ Construction Company is the listed general contractor; we are assigning the responsibility of as-built drawing compliance to R.W. Paul Consh'uction for the following reasons: l. Kraus-Anderson@ Construction Company became the general contractor after the start of consh'uction for the purpose of furnishing required bonding per the lender requirements. 2. We were not involved 111 cost estimating, subcontractor bidding and bid tabulation, subcontract avvard, or any direct communication with the subcontractors and suppliers. ,.., Shop drawings and other approvals were not channeled through Kraus-Anderson@ Construction J. Company. 4. We did not have a full-time KA field superintendent on site to monitor daily construction and note compliance with the contract documents. It is our understanding that RW. Paul has submitted all of the required as-built drawings to your office as requested. If this is not the case, please contact us and we will make sure RW. Paul is in full compliance. Sincerely, KRAUS-ANDERSON@ CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 166 ~:4:l J efT Iisakka, Vice President Cc: Kent Oliver, Portview Inn & Suites, L.L.c. Ralph Paul, RW. Paul Construction, Inc. Midwest Division - Duluth Office 3716 Oneota Street, Duluth, MN 55807 Phone: (218) 722-3775 Fax: (218) 722-3778 Equal Opportunity Employer 5. Addendums; . Architectural Addendum A 1 . Architectural Addendum A2 . Architectural Addendum A3 . Architectural Addendum A4 . Architectural Addendum A5 . Architectural Addendum A6 . Medlanical Addendum M 1 . Mechanical Addendum M2 . Electrical Clarification E 1 . Electrical Clarification E2 . CIJ'""'!t.,.......r;,...."'""1 f'1~....i+i_r'\4-:__ C~ blC:;l~-,L! !\.JOJ \.....--IIC'U I!H.....CH.lU! I Lv . Electrical Clarification E4 . Swimming Pool Design 6. Complete specifications as part of the contract documents. .. ~ 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com 14 SEPTEMBER 2004 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-1 COUNTRY INNS&SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS; All changes.to architectural drawings are indicated on each of the sheets as R1 and dated 14 September 2004. ADOPTION OF PLAN REVIEW; The original plan review conducted by Todd Morley, Building Official for the City of Cape Canaveral with the responses (indicated in bold type) to specific issues shown is included in this addendu!lI. This inciudes the attached Life Safety Plan dated 14 September 2004. CHANGES TOSPECIFICA TIONS; 1. SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE Add-- This section is added to the specifications. 2. SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK Add--Subsection 1.4.C No wood, vegetation, stumps, roots, cardboard, trash, or other cellulose containing material shall be buried on the building lot. Add-Subsection 1.4.0 No material falling under FBC Section 308 Hazardous Occupancy shall be stored on site without verification that storage of such material shall meet the code requirements. 3. SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR h"~SULA T10N FiNiSH SYSTEM Change---Subsection 1.3.B.11 to read; Exterior Insulation Finish System used on this project shall meet all requirement of the Florida Building Code Section 1403 and 1403 for the exposure listed on the construction documents (both architectural and structural). Each of the manufactured system listed in Section 2.1.A manufacture systems to meet the code. Before approval of the system, the subcontractor shall submit material as stated in Section 1.4.A to meet all code requirements. The attachment of the foam is to be part of the approved system. 4. SECTION 02280 SOIL TREATMENT Add- This section has been added to indicate termite protection applied to the soil. 5. SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY Add-Subsection 2.1.A.4-Wood used on this project shall be treated to termite standards as required by the Florida Building Code. I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. n ;' III (J . 11/,'1 U!~ Jill I. . 'It' " If It-clV'" . . - h f\leil Weber, AlA' Reg. Number AROO17512 .. .:~..:-.-..J._ ._ i --'L-;" j '~:" J . ?!! .- i H '''_''H _. .__.+ -.-- ( -~_.{~- ! .j I _. -. ....._-fp-:- i -.-..-.-. --".-(~- EXIT; ...:c;.')..~ -_ -"_ i.. ......_.&-- --"" f " . . "" 1 ' I ..................~.....~ ~ . "<"'-' ,- ~- .~--, .-jCL~ .; ~;;- I '_c~ I' "_'. 2 , C , .-...,:R::........ ,; . . - Occupant load per tloor'..(u.ing tabi. 1003.1) Based on 20b sf of gross unit space = 90 peoplelftoor E:xlt Width....(Using tabla 1004) Level---- 90 X .2= 18" Stair----- 90 X .3= 27" .-, "._--~ I,,~ .~_..,:~,- 8qth are less' that the 36" door and 5'0" qorridor <'1 -"".- _.. '_._n__ _ ;t"".- T:ravel Distance... i North Corrlddr... 1 <- Thl! North Corridbr distancEj between exits Is a total pf 184'. Half the ..~ ----,-. ..---.....;g!....- dililance Is 94". Nimh / South Corrldor--- f -.., -. f'- ~:~. Thill North Corridor distanc~ between exits is a total pf 176', Half the diSli'lnce is BB', SCtuth Corridor-. -.......... ._. ..~_. -. Thl~ South Corridor distanc~ between exits is a total of 144', Half the dlslllnce is 72',! . TAII3LE 1004 INO~CATES THAT IN A SPRINKLED BUILlNGTl;IE '.. -- ,--_.. - ...."-".----:.~ "-'4'._', - ,....~,- .-- ._-~'t:'::....- MA{C TRAVEL Dl$TANCE ALLOWED TO AN EXIT IS 325'. THIS BUll-DING MEETS THAT STANDARD. . ." I; .._-...;. '" ."..,. ^-"-'-. lc}~~ 2280 Watert<lwn ROlld, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 Q,," .471; .tLi~d. J:1~V O&:\? -,d7t::.. &::;A~':t .. .......fr;\,...,..h.........;,.._...;,....-'_ __ SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE I PART 1 - GENERAL - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY . . A. This section includes the following: 1. Furnish door hardware (for hollow metal, wood and aluminum doors) specified herein, listed in the hardware schedule, and/or required by the drawings. 2. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and is required for the intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarification by addendum. Otherwise ihmish such items in the type and quantity established by this s12ey,i.~cation for the appropriate service intended. B. Related Sections. include .the following: 1. Finish Carpentry: ;.section 06200 2. Hollow Metal Doors'&nd Frames: Section 08110 3. Wood Doors: Section 08210 4. Aluminum Entrances and Store Fronts: Section 08410; All hardware for Aluminum Doors to be furnish by Section 08710 except weatherstrip. 5. Electrical: Division 16 1.3 REFERENCES A. BMHA - Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware. B. N'FP A 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and Windows. C. NFP A 101 - Code fot Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. D. UL - Building Material Directory. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 5 copies of a detailed hardware schedule under the provisions of Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures". 1. The schedule will be prepared under the direct supervision of a registered Architectural Hardware Consultant (ARC) employed by the hardware distributor. The hardware schedule to be signed and embossed with the DHI certification seal of the supervising ARC. The supervising ARC shall attend any meeting related to the project when requested by the architect. 2. Utilize the vertical format of scheduling and the practices outlined by the Door and Hardware Institute (DHI).Confidential Page 1 9/30/2004 3. Include documentation for UL 10C or other approved testing agency stating hardware has passed UBC Standard 7-2. Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 1 08710- B. Submit a keying schedule for review based on a approved hardware schedule and a conference with the owner's representative. C. Submit samples when requested by t.l}e A.rchitect for approval in the specified finish. D. Templates and approved hardware schedule to be furnished to each door and frame fabricator as required. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware unless specified otherwise. B. All submittals must be submitted in writing prior to bid and include product information along with reason for changing from the minimum standards set by Carlson Properties. Substitution will be approved by Robert Ruhland at 651-731-7127, Fax: 651-735-1800. C. Properties not furnished by TCH Co. will be inspected for compliance by a local Ingersoll Rand rep. D. Provide hardware tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. E. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming to FBe Standard. F. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings conforming in compliance with NFP A 80 1995 Edition. 1.6 DELNERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Division 1 Section "Product Requirements". Mark original containers to correspond with the approved hardware schedule for the installation location. B. Receive, inventory and store hardware in a secured and dry environment, protect against loss and damage. C. Report shortages to the A.rchitect and hardware supplier im_mediately after receipt of material at the job site. D. General Contractor to contact TCH Co. for Carlson Company volume negotiated pricing. 1. Contact information: a. Robert Ruhland, AHC 1-800~747-1980 Direct 651-731-7317 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS PRODUCTS SPECIFIED ACCEPTABLE 1. Butt Hinges Ives Hager, PBB,Stanley 2. Flush Bolts Ives No Substitution 3. Exit Devices Von Duprin No Substitution 4. Locks and Latches Schlage No Substitution 5. Pulls, Push Bars, Ives Hiawatha Push/Pull Plates 6. Coordinators Ives No Substitution 7. Closers LCN No Substitution 8. Protective Plates Ives Hiawatha 9. Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson No Substitution 10. Wall Stops Ives DON-JO Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 2 08710- 11. Magnetic Hold Opens LCN Donna 12. Thresholds, Sweeps, Reese Pemko, NGP weatherstrips, Gaskets 13. Key Cabinets T ............:1 Key Controls, Telkee LUl1U 2.2 BUTT HINGES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives Hager Stanley PPB 1. 5PBl 1279 F179 PB81 2. 5BBl BB1279 FBB179 BB81 3. 5BB 1 630 BB 1191 FBB191 BB21 4. 5BBlHW BB1l68 FBBl68 4B81 5. 5BB IHW 630 BBl199 FBBl99 4B21 B. Furnish the following hinge quantities for each door leaf. 1. 3 hinges for doors up to 90 inches. 2. 1 additional hinge for every 30 inch on doors over 90 inches. 3. 4 hinges for Dutch door applications. C. Weight and Type: 1. Standard weight: plain bearing hinge 5PB 1 for interior openings through 36 inches wide without a door closer. 2. Standard weight: ball bearing hinge 5BB 1 for interior opening over 36 through 40 inches wide without a door closer, and for interior openings through 40 inches wide with a door closer. 3. Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BBIHW for interior openings over 40 inches wide, a.l1d for all vestibule doors. 4. Heavyweight: 4 ball bearing hinge 5BBIHW630 for exterior openings unless otherwise listed in groups. 5. Butts for lockable doors opening outward shall have non-removable pin (NRP); other butts shall have non-rising pins. D. Size: Furnish doors with the following: 1. 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-112 inch by 4-112 Ii E. Provide proper butt width to clear trim and allow full 180 degree swing. F. Butts shall have flat bottom tips unless otherwise noted in hardware groups. 2.3 FLUSH BOLTS AND DUST PROOF STRIKES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives No Substitution 1. FB458 2. FB31P 3. FB4lP 4. FB51P 5. FB61P 6. DP2 B. Furnish dustproof strike DP2 for bottom bolt. 2.4 EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaverai, Florida 3 08710- Von Duorin No Substitution 1. 99 Series B. Types; fhnctions a...l1.d ratings shall have deadlocking latch bolts. C. Surface applied strikes shall be roller type unless otherwise noted in groups. D. Devices to be equipped with a sound dampening feature to reduce touch pad return noise. E. On full glass doors there shall be no exposed fasteners on the back of the mechanism visible through the glass. F. Provide thru bolts as required. G. Devices shall be the product of I manufacturer. H. Exit devices specified "LBR" are to be supplied with surface vertical rods with "Less Bottom Rod" (LBR) and no strikes installed on the floor. I. Hollow metal removable mullions shall be keyed and removed by a standard mortise cylinder. J. Exit devices that are supplied with levers shall match trim design of locks and latches. 2.5 LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Schlage }~o Substitution 1. D Series Sparta B. Furnish lock types and functions specified in the hardware schedule, with the following provisions: 1. Backsets: 2-3/4 inch 2. Strikes: a. Wrought box type for the inactive leaf of pairs of wood doors, and wood frames. b. ANSI A115.2 type for hollow metal doors and frames. c. Lip length sufficient to protect trim, frame and inactive leaf. C. Furnish knurled lock lever handles on doors to stairs (exit stairs not included) loading platforms, stages, boiler rooms, and other hazardous locations. Applied tape is not allowed on levers. 2.6 PULLS, PUSHBARS, PUSHIPULL PLATES A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives 1. linch diameter straight pull 8103EZ 2. 1 inch diameter pushbar and pull 9103EZ 3. Push/Pull Plate 82004 xl6 4. Pull 8102-8 B. Length of push bars shall be sufficient to mount each end on center of stile. Push bars on flush doors shall be 3 inches less than door width. Mount all push bars and pulls back to back with shoulder bolts and set screw. Set screw to be on the inside. 2.7 COORDINATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 4 08710- Ives No Substitution 1. COR B. Furnish a COR series coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic flush bolts and those with vertical rod / mortise lock fire exit device combinations with overlapping astragals. C. Furnish filler bars to fill the complete opening width, closer mounting brackets, carry bars, and special preparation for top latches where applicable. 2.8 CLOSERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: LCN No Substitution 1. 401114111 EDA 2. 1461FC/P1461FC B. Closers shall use high strength cast iron cylinders and I piece forged steel pistons. C. Closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of + 120deg F to -30deg F without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies \vith standards lJBC 7-2 (1997) and ULlOC. D. Heavy duty closers shall have field adjustable spring power that at the low end is capable of meeting A.D.A.requirements, and at the high end is capable of controlling a 44 inch exterior door. E. Furnish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates, special shoes, and thru bolts as may be required by the door and frame conditions. F. Provide door closers for labeled doors, whether called for in the hardware groups or not. G. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways and interior side of exterior doors. H. Closers shall be the product of 1 manufacturer. 2.9 KICK PLATES AND MOP PLATES A. Furnish protective plates as specified in hardware groups. B. Kick plates shall be 10 inch high and 2 inch LDW (less door width). Except panel doors shall be 1" less bottom rail height. C. Mop plates shall be 4 inch high and 2 inch LDW (less door width). D. Thickness to be (16 gauge) 0.050 inch Dull Brass. E. Plates shall have countersunk holes and beveled (all four) edges. 2.10 OVERHEAD STOPS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Glvnn-Johnson No Substitution 1. GJ90 Series 2. GJI 00 Series 3. GJ450 Series Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral; Florida !:' J 08710- B. Furnish GJ450 series overhead stop for doors equipped with regular arm surface type closers that swing more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, for doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelights, or other objects that would make wall bumpers inappropriate, and as specified in hardware o....n...l'l"'l.Cl 5J..vupa. C. Furnish sex bolt attachments for wood and mineral core doors unless doors are supplied with proper reinforcing blocks. 2.11 WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Ives No Substitution 1. WS407CVX 2. WS407CCV 3. WS11X 4. WS40 B. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish overhead stops. 2.12 MAGNETIC HOLD OPENS A. Provide types as listed in groups. B. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: LCN 1. SEM 7850 2. SEl\1 7830 C. Provide proper voltage and power consumption as required by Division 16. D. Magnetic holder's housing and armature shall be constructed of a die cast zinc material. 2.13 WEATHERSTRIP, THRESHOLDS, GASKETING LA. .i1.1o.cceptable manufacturers arid iespective catalog nUlnbers: Pemko National Guard Reese 1 Thresholds: 17IA 425 S205A 1. 2. Weatherstrip: 2891APK 700NA 755A 3. *Head & Jamb Gasket: S88D 2525 797B 4. Drip Cap: 346A 16A R201A 5. Sweeps: 18061CP B606A 964A B. Where specified in the hardware groups, furnish the above products unless otherwise detailed in groups C. *Furnish head/jamb gaskets and edge stile astragals for pairs, at fire labeled doors whether listed in group or not. Provide material based on passing UL 10C, UBC test standard 7-2. D. Coordinate with door manufacturer the intumescent fire and smoke material for fire rated openings. as required by door and frame manufacturer to comply with UL 10C, UBC test 7-2. 2.14 FINISHES AND BASE MATERIALS A. Except where indicated otherwise in the hardware groups or herein, hardware finishes shall be applied over base metals as specified in the finish schedule that follows. Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 6 08710- Finish Schedule: HARDWARE ITEM FINISH AND BASE MA TERrAL 1. Butt Hinges Exterior TTQA vu.,. Interior US4 2. Flush Bolts US4 3. Exit Devices US4 4. Locks and Latches US4 5. Pulls and Push Plates/Bars US4 6. Coordinators Prime painted or mill alum 7. Closers Powder coat aluminum 8. Protective Plates US4 9. Overhead Stops US4 10. Wall Stops and Holders US4 11. Thresholds Mill Aluminum 12. Weather-strip, Sweeps Drip Caps Aluminum Anodized Gold 13. Magnetic Holders Brass 14. Miscellaneous US4 2.15 KEYING A. Key locksets and cylinders into a new Schlage Everest Master Key System. B. Furnish 3 change keys each lock, furnish 6 master keys each set. Furnish 6 grand master keys. C. Provide keying as required by owner's representative~ 2.16 KEY CABINETS A. Acceptable manufacturers and respective catalog numbers: Lund Key Control Telkee 1. 1200-1205 AA M228-2480 RWC-A WC 2. Furnish 1 model 1200 or 1205 AA key cabinet with a capacity 1.5 times the number of key sets. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Before hardware installation, general contractor/construction manager shall coordinate a hardware installation seminar with a 1 week notice to all parties involved. The seminar is to be conducted on the installation of hardware, specifically of locksets, closers, exit devices, continuous hinges and overhead stops. Manufacturer's representative of the above products to present seminar. Seminar to be held at the job site and attended by installers of hardware (including low voltage hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training to include use of installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates and physical products samples. B. Install each hardware item in strict compliance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners supplied by or called for by manufacturer. Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 7 08710- C. Set units level, plumb and true to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Instal! hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer's requirements to maintain the label. E. Install per door and/or frame manufacturer's supplemental "S" label instructions on fire rated openings. F. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work. G. Drill countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accord with industry standards. H. Mounting Heights 1. Install hardware at mounting heights conforming to BMHA recommended mounting locations. 2. Install wall stops SOW and 60W to engage levers and pulls. 3. Do not mount wall stops on casework, cabinet work or equipment. 1. Deliver to the owner I complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with the hardware. J. Inspection of Hardware and Installation: The hardware supplier and manufacturer's representative (locksets, closers, exit devices and overhead stops) shall visit the project after all the hardware has been installed and shall notifY the Architect if there is any hardware that has not been installed correctly. The Contractor and hardware supplier shall furnish the Architect with written certification to this effect. After the hardware is installed, the hardware supplier and manufacturer's representative shall meet with the Owner to explain the functions, uses and maintenance of all types of hardware installed. .., .., ADJuSTMENT AND CLEANING J.J A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with type lubrication recommended by the manufacturer. B. Replace unit that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustments of the hardware. D. Clean and restore hardware to the original finish. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Furnish hardware items in the amount indicated unless additional hardware is required for a complete and operable facility. Ensure completeness, proper function and proper application of hardware for each door. HW SET: 01 Hfl'lGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA EXIT DEVICE EL99NL VON Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 8 08710- 1 EA CYLINDER INTERCHANGEABLE CORE 1 EA SURF ACE CLOSER 4111 SCNS LCN 1 EA SWEEP REE 1 EA THRESHOLD REE 1 EA WEA THERSTRlP REE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS873-2 VON 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT2 VON CARD READER BY OWNER HW SET: 02 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA EXIT ALARM 2670 VON 1 EA CYLINDER INTERCHANGEABLE CORE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 CNS SRl LCN 1 EA SWEEP REE 1 EA THRESHOLD REE 1 EA WEA THERSTRlP REE HV{ SET: 03 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH DlO SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE lYE 1 EA STOP , SET GASKETfNG i HW SET: 04 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK D70 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 CNS LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE lVE 1 SET GASKETING HW SET: 05 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK D70 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE lVE 1 EA STOP PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS HW SET: 06 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK D70 SCH 1 EA STOP HW SET; 07 HINGES AS REQUIRED Country Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 9 08710- 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH D10 SCH 1 EA OVERHEAD HOLDER 900H GLY HW SET: 08 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH D10 SCH 1 EA STOP HW SET: 09 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK D80 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 CNS LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE IVE PROVIDE GASKETING AT RATED OPENINGS PROVIDE SRI COATING ON CLOSER IN POOL AREA HW SET: 10 Hll'~GES AS REQUIRED 1 EA PASSAGE LATCH DI0 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE IVE 1 EA MAGNETIC HOLD-OPEN SEM 7850 LCN 1 SET GASKETING HW SET: 11 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA _A.CCESS COI'lTP___OL LK ACCESS CONTROL BY Owl~ER 1 EA SURF ACE CLOSER 1461 LCN ! EA I<JCK PLATE rVE 1 EA STOP 1 SET GASKETING PROVIDE SRI COATING ON CLOSER fN POOL AREA HW SET: 12 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK D80 SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE rVE 1 EA STOP PROVIDE GASKETING AT KA TED OPENINGS HW SET: 13 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK D40 SCH 1 EA STOP Country' Inns & Suites, Cape Canaveral, Florida 10 0871 0- NOTE: All bathrooms to have split finish US4 outside and US26D inside. HW SET: 14 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 SET FLUSH BOLT FB458 lYE 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 lYE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK D70 SCH 2 EA OYERHEADSTOP 450F GLY HW SET: 15 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK D80 SCH 1 EA STOP HWSET: 16 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA ACCESS CONTROL LK ACCESS CONTROL BY OWNER 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1371 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE lYE 1 EA STOP 1 SET GASKETING 1 EA DOOR GUARD 482 lYE 1 B.A. DOOR VIE\VER 698 T..rn 1 YD HW SET: 17 HINGES AS REQUIRED 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK AL40 SCH 1 EA STOP NOTE: .Li,JI bathrooms to have split finish US4 outside and US26D inside. Country Inns & Suites! Cape Canaveral; Florida 1 1 . , 08710- ::;!:t;IIUN -uatiu SOIL TREATMENT - 1- GENERAL 1.1. SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new construction. 2. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress. 1.2. SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federallnseclicide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide- Aet. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under applicable state and local law . 2. . Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use. C. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Project record documents: a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has been applied in aC?Ordance with applicablegoveming regulations and in accordance with this specification. b. Incorporate into thecettificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual application locations and, for each location, noting iTrethods and rates of applk:;atkm and including typical sections or detaYs where necessary for clarity. D. Warranty. 1.3. QUAliTY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Ucensed to install sp~jfied products in the state in \vhich t~e project is located and in the local jurisdiction. 2. A company Installing products of this section and whose installations have performed in a satisfactory manner under comparable conditions for a period of 5 years. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located. 2. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations. 1.4. WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: 1. Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas. 2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contrac.t documents. 3. Warranty period: 5 years. B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following: ,t Relreatmentof areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered. 2. Repairing, patching, removing, and reinstalling of building materials and soil materials when necessary to facilitate retreatment fonowing infestation. 3. Restoration, repair, or replacement of building materials (including permanent fixtures) that become damaged by subterranean tenn/tas. 02280-1 SECTION '-02280 SOIL TREATMENT C. Transferability: While in force, warranty shall be fully transferrable to subsequent owners. PRODUCTS ........-" 2. . .,.. 2.1. TERMITICIDE A Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevaning at the project site. B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use prevaifing at the project site. C. . Products: Provide one of the following: 1. Dursban Te. 3. EXECUTION 3.1. APPUCA TION A. Applytermiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply termiticlde at the maximum recommended appiic-ation rates forme respective areas to be treated and mettJods of treatment used. C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated. .-. '. D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction. 3.2. CLEAt-lING A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturers instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur. B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not pressure-preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non-pressure-preservative treated wood to contact with or remain proximate to soil. END OF SECTION 02280 --,-- _/ '.- 02280-2 26 October 2004 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-2 COUNTRY INNS & SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS; 1. Clarification of Wall Types---Addendum drawing A 1...(attached to this addendum) ADOPTION OF PLAN REVIEW; The Second plan review (Dated 26 October 2004) conducted by Todd Morley, Building Official for the City of Cape Canaveral with the responses (indicated in bold type) to specific issues shown is included in this addendum. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS; Fireplace (located in Lobby) Specification- Fireplace shall be; Heatilator --Siihouette-Electric Fireplace Series-SILH60E-(110/120 volt) (See attached sheets to this Addendum) I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. Neil Weber, AlA Reg. Number AR0017512 , -~ 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com 1 April 2005 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-3 COUNTRY INNS & SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS; All changes to drawings are marked as Revision #2 CHANGES TO SPECIFICIATIONS; 1. Section 05712 Change 1.1 A.2 to read; Wood rails and spindles are to be provided by contractor. Supplier shaH select materials to be used to meet design intent and submit to architect and ovmer for appiOval. 2. Section 06200 Omit 2.5.A (sills to be cultured marble) 3. Section07112 Add-1.1A.1-Damproofing to be applied to elevator footings and foundations. 4. Section 07210 Omit 2~2sA 5. Section 09510 Omit 2.3.8 6. Section 14240 Change-1.7 A1. To read; There are two passenger elevators and one housekeeping elevator. Change-1. 7 A 5 to read; There are 4 stops for each elevator. Add:-1.7A- Flooring for two client elevators shall be either Ceramic tile or Carpet as selected by interior designer. ADDITIONAL DETAILS; 1. Addendum 3 R1--Wood base and casing trim 2. Addendum 3 R2-EIFS color selections 3. Addendum 3 R3-Window installation 4. Addendum 3 R4-Fan exhaust shaft 5. Addendum 3 R5-Mechanical changes letter from Engineer I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. Neil Weber, AlA Reg. Number AR0017512 Wood Casing--to be located on the public side of all door to units and other public spaces (as supplied by Cox Interiors-www.coxinterior.com-or equal) Wood Base-as scheduled ROOM SIDF (as supplied by Cox Interiors-or equal) -- i '" ..' , I ~ "- CORRIDOR SIDE ,.- Wood trim to be applied to all doors facing publlic (non-room) spaces. BC8S00 6/a" x 51 114" BC84QO 5/8" x 11 J/4" Typical VVood Trim @ Doors and Base 1. Wood spacer 2. Casin~J trim at jamb and head AQJ)ENDU~~ 3 R1 B~ ...-... ......,......._... _...r..'....... I II II L Jlflll Y ~'I III III II Jj 1 II J Jlfl 11 =f=' - @- - -- ~~ - - .wLa ~~~ \ _\.--- ..,.-- \ I~II ~~. ~ \ ~K~I " 1 / I' l Jll " JiJ ~ 9 Ii' ... -0 - _0 HHHo .h - ~ .. IIV"","II",.<:i ;;; \~ ~-^. ~IH~ j...---T JI~I JC_~_ ~ \ D Ii II r IA I / i"i I - Iil Iil flll!IRI (1 , , ~. _\ ~ \ III<lI I. II J~ ~ ~ '- \ I ~- 'I~ r .:J II ,~.~~ .. .."'-- _ _ _. _ 01/"5':'_.. 1_ - ~ ~ ~. . ..... ~. .... =r-i!r' Iil I8J 18I y~ 1fT elFS~ --.:;;;:::- -=- -::;:;: :::- ;::s :::-..::~ - ;.......-- r- -- @- ../ .... 1'l"4 \ It: 0.::::: \" 1f<4 -- 4"~~ r 1. ~4 ~ r- - W- ..'" ~ r- .... Ir r- I- , ~==~ I ~ '==lh_t=l 1= t P """ ~::l: "'= ... j 1_'- - 0<. L _ L _ L , , , ~-- -.. - ,--"'-- ..,;;.-.1------ '-r Dryvit Colors; (the following are the formulas for the Dryvit Colors as used on the Country Typical locations of EIFS colors Inn and Suites (Kissimmee/Lake Buena Vista 5001 Calypso Cay Way) and have been approved Submit color samples for approval by Carlson Companies and selected by the owner Cape Canaveral. 1. Dark Yellow Quartz Q29 205 03 20 57 Sand S29 205 03 20 57 A Windows... shaH be white lattice....2" squc:tres shall be white 2. Light Yellow Metal roof...shall be Berriage Hartford Green or Forest Green Quartz Q29 205 03 20 58 Sand $29 205 03 20 58A Railing at front porch (See construction documents..elev,ations)....shall be white 3. Biege Quartz Q29 205 03 20 60 Shutters at top floor windows...shall be Fypon-raised panel Sand S29 205 03 20 60A shutter...ltem #105332 (Old #41 C)-size to match window 4. Raintree FP29 205 03 20 59 A[)DENDUM 3 R2 4 ~c:;1C5") COMPARATIVE ANAL1rSIS & INSTALLATION SeReIJ CHART CALl WINDOW DESIGN PRE:SSlJlE #6' SCREW' SIZE SIZE (INCHES) CAPACITY IN PSI' DllANTITIES IIIDTH/HE:/liHT E:XTERIOR lNTE:RIOR HEAD/SII.L EACH JAMB PERli'ETE:R 1530 16 X 38 70 -2<10 c.. c~ 2 CAUlJ< BY 2030 24 X 36 70 -240 2 3 OTHE:RS 2038 24 X # 70 -2<10 ., 3 20<0 24X48 70 -240 2 4 2044 24 X 52 70 -240 2 4 20110 24 X 60 70 -240 2 5 2060 24 X 72 70 -240 2 6 2070 24X84 70 -2<10 2 7 2 ~6 - 4 28X38 0 -<10 2 3 2438 28 X # 70 -240 2 4 2_ 28X48 70 -2<10 2 .. 2_ 28 X 62 70 -240 2 4 2<150 28X60 70 -2<10 2 5 2480 28 l( 72 70 -240 2 6 2470 28 X 84 70 -2<10 2 8 '- SHEA THINI; 7 2 32X38 BY OTHERS 2838 32 X # 70 -240 4 2840 32X48 70 -2<10 4 VlNDOII 2844 32 X 62 70 -2<10 6 HE:lGHT ~ CAULK DEfVEtN 21!!lO 32X60 70 -2<10 8 'ilINDO~' /"IN , 21lOO 32 X 72 70 -2<10 7 SHEA THINCi 2870 32 X 84 70 -2<10 9 - 3OJO 38X38 70 -2<10 3 J S E C T I ON B EXTERIOR fiNISH 3038 36 X # 70 -2<10 3 4 -..--- BY OTHERS 3040 38XtB 70 -240 3 4 J044 38 X 62 70 -231 3 6 3060 38 X 60 70 -21~ 3 6 3080 38 X 72 70 -213 3 7 IJINDO'w' 3070 38X84 70 -213 3 8 -- 38X 6 70 - 13 10 14TH. 40X 6 3438 40X44 70 -217 4 3440 4OX48 70 -206 4 3_ 4OX52 70 -197 4 34!lO 4OX80 70 -184 6 I . . 3480 4OX72 70 -175 6 . 11 3470 4OX84 70 -173 7 , # 3480 4OX9$ 70 -17J 9 } " 44X38 - 3838 44X44 70 -190 .. J . . 3840 44X4lI 70 -1/10 .. .. J8# #X52 70 -172 .. 4 38!lO 44X60 70 -15~ .. 6 EQUALLY 3860 44 X 72 70 -148 .. 6 EXTEllIllR ~ SHIN AS REQ'D \.IINDO'w' . SPACED 3870 44X&I 70 -143 .. 7 I'INlSH BY (SE:E NOTES> . <TVPJ 3ll8O 44 X 86 78 -14J .. 8 IlTHOlS HGT. ff; 4lI X 36 - J :J 4038 4lIX44 70 -170 .. J T'JIl DY FRANE: 4040 4lIX48 70 -1/10 .. J I'MIN. BY OTHE:RS . <1044 4lI X 52 70 -162 .. 4 4060 4lI X 60 70 -140 .. .. E:NDE:Di'ENT 4oeO 4lI X 72 70 -128 .. 5 4070 4lIXt!4 70. -122 .. 8 SECTION A INSTALLATION ANCHOR . 4080 70 -120 .. 7 #8 SCREII X - . . . -L 6038 6OX# 70 -128 .. 2 A , 6' FROM ~ 6OX411 .70 -120 .. i J 60# 60 X 52. 70 -113 .. 3 L END MAX, 50!l0 60 X 60 70 -102 .. j J (TYP,) 5080 60 X n 70 -~1 .. .. <S' FRQN EHD MAX. (TYP,) _ 5070 60 X 84 70 -84 .. 5 WID 5OIlO 80 X ~ 70 -80 .. 5 I) INSTALLATnIN< FIN FRAHE: W'lNDO\I IN ilOilO FRAME OPENING USE #8 SCRE\I ANCHORS or SUf"F1CIENT LENGTH TO ELEVATIO/\! ".~g~:j!_ e' ENERGY SAVING PRODUCTS OF" F"L1JIRIDA PROVIDE MilN. I' EHDE:/lHENT INTO SllIlSTfIATE. 2) SHIM IS REQ'O. AT EACH INSTAllATION ANCHOR WI1H UlAO 8EAAING SHIM. WIX. AllOWABlE SHIM STACK TO BE 1/4', VIEWED fROM EXTERIOR! ::~{;", "~ .... JASPER, FLORIDA USE SHIM IIIIERE SPACE OF" 1/18 IN. OR GREATE:R EXISTS. 3) WINDOW FRAME MAlERtAl.: AIJJM1NUl/ AI.J.OY 6OlI3. .' ~ ' /. 4~ USE CAUl.K 8EHINO WINDOW FIN AT HEAD, SII.I. '" .IAMBS. .:: ,- ',. , :;,., >mL> SERIES 500 SINGLE HUNG 'w'INDD'w' S USE CAUlK FOR PERIMETER SEAl. AAOUND EXTE:RIOR OF" WINDOW FRAIoIE. !~ .. ~ "1~'~" INSTALLATION DETAILS IN 'w'OOD FRAME 8) ~ THlClCHESS MAY YARY PER THE REOIJIREMENlS OF ASnI EI300 GlASS CHARTS. IlSUlATlNG Gl.ASS IS SlfOWH, ~; ",;. -:~ J),~ ':.m 0lGI>0m> R. J. Q. ..... 1111 ' 4/23/03 SIN GW~IHG GlASS IS AI.S() QUAUFlEIl. 7) PflOOUCT .. INSTAllATION IS SHOWN ON lIi1S SHEET COMPIlES Wl1I! THE 2001 FlORIDA SUlLOlfIIG COIlE AT OESlGN ~~j~~;.,~, . ,::', !.".:~~;" IlISC1PUl1t. STRUCTUAL seAl.() FULL '''ESP-0040 PRESsURES INOICATE:RD ON DRAWING, . . '~;',/. ..::~'~.;:')...e~f)?~,}~fF.- "~'.>' F'L. ftEG. to 47946 acv. LETfDt, StET_, 1 IT 1 ~'.~ CUIlI'.. use L.WItINM /tv.. UTE L WIml...... fUImjt, Jr1III ,......, ~ F'jJ:ll." ~ ADDENDUM 3, R3 WINDiOW INlST ALl.A T'I():N a WiI"llM.....U... 4-.... a...~, _____1-1_ .... f9' ......... I' { I (f) ~ ......,. ~ . - - ~ ill I it ':r,j - 3" , 8 % g , ~ I ~- I / / ~ , ~< ~'~- /' 1. WOOD BLOCKING ~ 2. GYP BOARD 3. SILL 4. CAULK 5. EIFS SECTION A TYPICAL 'v'Vlt~DO\'V INSTALLATION ADDENDUM 3 R3A ~ @ \ X / \ / \ , ~ \ \ I \ - cC \ ,----'-.,.-,. - --- --_.------ "f \ ti 1. WOOD BLOCKING -4 VINDO\I VIDTH ~ f 2. GYP BOARD 3. SILL SECTION 13 4. CAULK 5. EIFS TYPICAL WINDOW INSTAllATION ADDENDUM 3 R3B co @. \ I I CD -, ..~ . - ~ 1 fA -t- 11 I I ..... i -. i , I SD: / I 4 I < ~ ----~~ -- i. WOOD BLOCKING ~ . 2. GYP BOARD 3. SILL 4. CAULK 5. EIFS SECTION A FIRST FLOOR \'VI~~DOVV INSTALLATiON ADDENDUM 3 R3C o Q) \ \ 'X / \ " / \. \ --~~-~--~-,..,------- - -.. ._-- r- _ 1 , '~~ 1. \VOOD BLOCKING .... \r'INDO\I \/rDrH II I 2. GYP BOARD 3. SILL SECTION 13 4. CAULK 5. EIFS FIRST FLOOR WINDOW INSTAllATION ADDENDUM 3 R3D ~-- I::) I::) I::) architects & planners 2280 W"e""~ Ro,"" Lo,," u.ke, MN 55356-8419 952.476.4434. Fax 952.476,5863. nw@weberarchitects (;') . /.r~ ~...... ~ --- "-"-...... __'~mm~ ___... '._" "" , _<__ A!lI '_",M<_"_'p,_""" -- CD (D .. -.+ t ~,l T"1f > ._- .-... -- 1. 8" CONCRETE BLOCK 2. 16'''X14'' DUCT@ FIRST FLOOR 3.1'" CORE BOARD wI CHANEL TRIM AT lENDS 4. :5/:B" 'Type X GYPSUM IBOARD UL 436 ADDIENDUMI 3 R4 D,~ architects & planners L.INDELL ENGINEERING, INC. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PL.YMOUTH, M!'! 5544' PHONE: (763) 542-91 US/FAX: (63) 542-92 t 4 E-MAIL: INFo@UNDELLENG.COM 30 Mar 05 Mr. Neil Weber Weber Architects & Planners 2280 Long .Lake Road Watertown, MN 55356 Fax: (952) 476-5863 Suhject.: Country 1nn &. Suites hy Carlson Cape Canaveral, Florida Lindell Prt~ject 041J Dear Neil: The contra.eta!" and owner requested the following changes: 1. The rooftop Air Conditioned Units .A.H~6 through AtI-I 0 arc changed from York heat pumps to Carrier rooftop heating and cooling units. The entire rooftop unit shall be coded for seacoast protection. 2. The HP~l, 2, and 3 Amanu through.thc-wall heat pump shaH be changed from heat pumps to Amana electric resistant heaters and straight cooling units with 5eacoast protc-etion. 3. The air-conditioned condensate shall terminate with a p-trap to prevent insects passing and discharging near the outdoor grade. The above changes are acceptable and meet with my approval. Plt:ase advise iHhere are any questions. ~~ Richard A. LindeH,. P.E. RALJcjn ailOO121 ~~ 21~ ~ II ~ architects & planners 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 952.476.4434. Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com 3 August 2005 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-4 COUNTRY INNS & SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRA\^JINGS; None CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS; Clarification as to location of marble thresholds as specified in Section 09310 2.68; They are to be located at every guest bath door. I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct superJision and that! am a duly licensed ,[).\rchitect under the lavv's of the State of Florida. . WA Neil Weber, AlA Reg. Number AR0017512 4' ~ 25 August 2005 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-5 COUNTRY INNS & SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS; Revision of Ceiling Plan A7.1 (and portion above lobby from A7.2) As per attached drawing. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS; None. I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct supen.tision and that i am a duly licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. r-... \ 11riL(!(~ Reg. Number AR0017512 , 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863' nw@weberarchitects.com 28 October 2005 ARCHITECTURAL ADDENDUM A-6 COUNTRY INNS & SUITES CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA This addendum shall be added to and become a part of the original plans and specifications. All items shall be as originally specified or drawn, unless specifically amended by this or subsequent addenda. CHANGES TO DRAWINGS; 1. 4th Revision of Ceiling Plan A7.1 ~and portion above lobby from A7.2) 2. Sketch #11-Ceiling Drops @ 2n , 3rd, and 4th floors-as discussed at site meeting 3. Sketch #12---Exterior Wall Layout @ Laundry Room-as discussed at site meeting 4. Sketch #13---"Eye Brow" detail @ front entry-as discussed at site meeting and conf. Call 5. Sketch #14---Layout of cab. in small meeting rooms---as discussed at site meeting 6. Sketch #15---Lobby Duct Information & Roof Drainage "box out"---as discussed at site meeting 7. Sketch #16~~- Typical Furring details due to negotiated detail with Building Inspector As per attached drawing. CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS; None. I hereby certify that this addendum was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. 1MW~ I eil 'v\leber, AlA Reg. Number AROO17512 DATE: Z:z xr ~ TO: "'.W.rML --FROM: Neil Weber, AlA 2280 'vVaiertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 RE: ~~ ct:tu,;JJ"OS 952.476.4434. Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com ~.l' J"- JI~ (A)/ -:rrORA ~ () I .~ 8 ~ C;tLINf.fJ DlWtJ ~ u ~ ~~;::: I in ,-] 'OLDING GTR. J 0 ,,- ~ ..... - . . . ~ CflL ~ I _ \ / ~ - ~ - - I I .":. I v' /_~ , .~. ;". I. II ~ ( 'U ~ "W~~~~ I) '" .. } ../ (D . ........... '. .... . .' . ~. - . I ",ft ~ = Ii ~~ I \.) t t" J ... ~ ~ (0)~\ ~~Lf DATE: Z'l~~ ~.~~m TO: p.vJ (:hJ L- architects & planners -, FROM: Neil Weber, A!A 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 RE: r>>ttfL. /llf~~~ 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863' nw@weberarchitects.com . V~ i~ d j7, U h'V:.vc"\.v....V.....'0.""-ovO.....-O"<'lo.........,'<iI U LJ. I<~-O..c~-c,.......><.....~ W '-' '-' DS DB] g~ogo~ogog$'og~ga !'f'~&gogogo~gog<go g~go~o~oogogogo ~ !Xl . ..... - , - . -...... ., --r=: -- ~ I I -.. - -- I .&c.,~",.~r~ I L_ I I I I I ~ , I I I k ~ ~ I.~ -~~fdt5 ~'..)( 4' -AAf!O~~ t.. ~o" X JCji 6J.~ P\.)(~ vJ(~ . I "~ II I I I JVf I . 11$'1>",1 I 1>/' .~-l I 1:2' PROVIDE BLcOGKING ~L .t. I I I 1/'\1 I I' FOR S116NA&E ; ... ". -':3 ~_ .c_ . "cC;~".:' -c-....:=I::.--..,-.-77";:.. C..-:.: :::=,-'-:==-..-: .....=:c.._..'-' - Y~H - ~ D~~ -!~i'~ tl~i f~D~,f- ~ GOINING . UPPER C<ORNICE SEE SECTIONS/D)ETAI~S PRE-FINISHED I ~I~ '"j' ~~ ~ il' -, - ~ ~' STANDING SEAM (TYF) ~~.:. I~D I-j'- "~~~~.~,:~~-", I Q~1DD OVER 5/fO' ROOF OECK --L OVER M5. FRAME SEE STl<UCTlJ~ ~ W : EfJ~ 8 i":~)1~7~W~ ~ -''/ ,~ ~I - _ ~I III /' illl m~ . F .LJC -;: ~ c~ 'f}-9} - r~~"-~ t= br F ) r= II i--------:--------l \ ~ t= _, ~ ?'" -----r- ___~: I~ t;:I lill Ill!:iil -r _ - III t;:I ~ ...... /'~ r- -- '" L I I-~ ~--"r- EIFS "- /-=::;; l- f [8 0 l- i-- 8 10 I- '- r- , ~ r t-1I8D I- - it - I- II1II ... It ~~ ~ j~ij l'Ib ~ j---,. I'Ib ~ lOb " . -'" _ 0....--- SIDE ELEVATION FRONT ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES; 1- "EYE8!<~OW" LOCATION...the eyebrow is to be located os low os, possible with the sign locoted...centered between windows on the third floclr and 01' the head of the third floor windows. .2, The 10uvl~r for the VT ac unit is 3.2" wide to the framing fm" the window CIS done in other locations. SKeTCH ~:j:1:S 3. The windows ore to be sized as Jorge as possible once ~'he "eyebrow" is in ploce. ENTf<Y "E'Y'ES!<.OW" 4. The sign as approved is to be located...centered between ,the windows and at the head of the windows on the third level. 5. The "eyebrow is to be constructed os detailed on the structural documem's and covered with 0 metal fa5cio and metal ro.:;lf to match ~m~ the break metal of the roof above the fourth floor. architEICts & planners . 2280 Watertown Re,ad, Long lake, MN 55356-9419 j, i \ I. I C\ " : \ " 1, fL') ~-')\ ,-'\ I 1T P/~TIN)~\ GREEN TO MATCH METAl.. ROOFING ! ,,'-, ,./ 1411 ! ;- ______,r~ , r- j I , ------ -7-----1 i I .--- I I " . r -. " ---;:.L,.----r- \ '" r,II-" '1"- t ' \..-.t-''--'"---'c'''-;'''--~--4-''' ~k 'V.f -. --: . ,i : 'qe:;' I , .,." 1 --::;Of;--'I .) ) \"- . I .' ~ I f6) III i \~ II i I rr\ II ~ j\.DlI . I I I j I i I ! i I r I I ! -- ~/ ! ----F-j_ f -\\ , i 1"-- i ---;::>jr:--- () , i>{1-' i - .......~__~I -~,- . l- ----- \'-\-- \It- -I I~OTES; 'NHITE - f 1. 12" 16 GUAGE METAL. FRAMING i:S>16" OC 2. /A,"rT ACH AS DET AIL.eD ON SHEE:T S7 "EYE 3. 5/,8," DENSBOARD BROW" DETAIL 4. 'I %" FOAM AND EIFS .5. E><ISTING WAI..1.. CONSTRUCTIO~~ WITH 5/8" PI.. YWOor: SKETCH '1.3A SHEATHING O E TA. I L I ~EREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION OR _ ' REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT :SIJPERVISION AND THAT I AM I~ DLJL Y REGIS.T~.R!i.[ D ARCHITEC1'- \V~51DJ t~DER THE U'7..S CJ:THE STATE OF rtPl'tpAl't \:.JIJ ~::LJ\..S.. DATE I G J)tI}. WI> Jlitfffi',(/fA.-' 81rchitects & planners NEIL WEBER, AlA 2280 Wateltown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863. nw@weberarchitects.com DATE: '1:z, t:x:::r~ 7t:t:I;; TO: --fROM: Neil Weber. AlA 2280 Waiertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 RE:' 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com 11JJM~ ltO ~ ILrHtt DrqHtS ~ ~lb U I II Q / KIDS - ~~ I .. ~~'W ~ ~~l)t" 1.- ". -~ I ~ I I ~ I I OPEN TO BELOJAJ I , ^ I / I \ 1.. 11 I ~MtlJ ~~. TOW,m; r7 ! '" (:j' I I r#~'. · ~ ~ 1--b · ~ ~hM ~.... ~y; l~ 'AlUy/M.a) ~~ (! ~Uhttt. ~ JQ ltIJ!tt [Ut. ~.~. llJ~. . 1l:> 1&f ...~.~ f;1i 1(lUIL, ;"" PI /-It. l1CNO , f.\t:r · . ~ CTbPA ?~IJfW) ~~JbP ~ WtJ~) " ~ ~ F#;uJJJ(P -J. . . O~ ~p to I~~ p~ ~ ::1 ~) r . ~~ ", ~,. [ .' WOfI1)r~~ (J-. ~ ~ "'l~ DATE: I b kJrN ;ZCO( TO: f2w ~L --.mOM: Neil Weber, AlA 2280 Watertown Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 RE:~ IbA " '0~ 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863 . nw@weberarchitects.com ~ NOTES; The following sketches (1Ga and 1Gb) I'"eflect conditions on the job that I'"equil'"e clal'"ification. 1GA...... This sketch I'"eflects the condition of the veNical sharrs fol'" bath exhaust. The ol'"iginal detail I'"equested by the cantl'"actol'" will not wOl'"k $inoe the duct has been incl'"eased as to not fit in the wall. The depth of the sharr enclosul'"e as negotiated by the contl'"actol'" and the building official will have a depth that may I'"equil'"e walls to fUl'"l'"ed out. These conditions al'"e not code items and have been detel'"mined on site. While the design of the building stacks units as i"!'iu"h as possible~~~l"ioi" all uniTS al'"e back TO back TO get the pl'"opel'" unit mLx. ~lnce the detail I"eques'fed by the cantl'"ac'fOI'" does nat work some fUl'"l'"ing will be required. 168..... This is the detail negotiated between the contractal'" and building official as iT relates to the block walls between the units. " -- - ""=t;: // ~ (]) ",/ Q) I // -;..J Duct / ~ (]) Q) " ,/ \(\ ~ / . H U /'" U /' ~ "" ~ ~" " ~ 0 '-, 0 "'~ U "'" U "",- "'" A ~ A , - - -- - B . -- - D ~. C~ - -- I ----- ---- A: 1" coreboard wrring:, 4" wide, floor to c1eiling. ( B: 1 H coreboard. I ~. /:" 1S2".l . HV,t d . . Ii i I . ....... . r'\ fT"\Pto. . 1""l. {'Ii -x fr:J, . '-". -./1 U ,,)}'v ..("'- J.J vv ~~u.. I ( D: Air space. I ( I I 1=1." 1\Apt5l1 tr~~lc- DATE: TO: --JOM: Neil Weber, AlA 2280 \Natertowil Road, Long Lake, MN 55356-9419 RE: 952.476.4434' Fax 952.476.5863' nw@weberarchitects.com ye:rbl.l- --: 6Jp :~~ ~G .~1S~ .LA.J~ ts:l1 ! : c;o~.t2., T::x;; i?- . . ----. ~ i ~~ I ! ! ' I i I V/ ,U;N~"'8c.oc.L.. ~. ~ - ~ ;,.. '/' . . vU4c...L- ~G:er .~ f'Oi: / . ~~ . C:::x:.P ~v.JeeJ(-/ '" // J '" I ~c..t:- lr"-J.AL.L- , i -' I A~ ' '~C'J~: : ~~~. <""b . - .- / -::::::>, ~\.,. "',- ~,' 'e=r' -K.o:cL, iJ . ,.' ./' : ~,~~~ . '. ~l / . :. !"'; ; / ' ~ 1 ; ~ .~ -j' I~ . .1 __ .....~ I /': I i / . !!U2..~ ~ I C" ~ .Go;I~ I j ! . I J ' ,: i.1 i :;' i . . I I I ; . " . ; ! I ! .. ....,,:.,... 'iR~l!I....I!e..<rr.~~ - ~p C~eL i :".. i O'J .~~: ~(D e. c:;F :"B(..oCe::::.. W4<....l....... I I . I I I ~. · · : · --0: -~/bB ~~~. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN, SPECIFICATION OR REPORT WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DUL Y REGISTERED ,L\RCHJTECT UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF FLORIDA. 7/tiIW~ DATE /4- j)M.UiJ~ NEIL WEBER. AlA REGISTRATION AR0017512 2 MAY 2005 CLARIFICATION ADDENDUM M-1 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certifY that this addendum was ARCHITECTS vVEBER ARCHITECTS & prepared by me or under my direct PLANNERS supervision and that I am a duly licensed 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD Professional Engineer under the laws of SUITE 100 t~fFIOrida. LONG LAKE, MN 55356 (952) 476-4434 ~~~ IE. Richard A. Lindell ENGINEERS Reg. No. PE0061553 Project 0413 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INe. 3411 I<JL~,1ER LAl'.JE NORTH PLYMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO AND BECOME A PART OF THE OPJGll'~AL PLA_t~S Al''{TI SPECIFICl-\..TIOl'~S. ALL rrEtv1S SH~A T .L BE ..:111-8 OPJGL~~ALL y SPECIFIED OR DRAWN, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY .Al\1ENDED BY THIS (iR '-'-<'- SUBSEQUENT ADDENDA. CHANGES TO THE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 15400 (PLUIVIBING SECTION) L Add grease interceptor paragraphs 19.0 through 19.4 as fo11o'ws to section 15400 ofthe specifications 19.0 GREASE INTERCEPTOR - ON FLOOR TYPE 19.1 Furnish and install a Josam (Zum, Wade or approved equal) Series 60105A grease interceptor for on-floor installation. Unit shall have a rated flow rate of 20 GPM and a grease retention capacity of 40 pounds. Provide vent at flow control and at discharge side of unit. 19.2 Provide a J osam 1063 flow control with 3" inlet and outlet, 1-1/2" vent connection and c1eanout plug. 19.3 Coordinate with the General Contractor and provide sufficient information to allow the proper space for this flow device. 19.4 Shop dra\vings are required. lof2 CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS 1. Sheet MLl has been revised. See sheet ~v11.1a, dated 2-1vfay-05 revising the following: a. Add a grease interceptor to the three-compartment sink in Food Prep room 138. Coordinate exact location of sink and grease trap with all trades. Strict coordination of invert at sink trap outlet and grease trap inlet shall be made prior to installation. MECHA.NICAL CLARIFICATION M-l 2of2 ? M A V flJ:: - .A.1'.:a...L.JL.:L V.,J COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I I I I -- I (II ~n_--r n Q 91~ l -Tile]' 1'1 I II. ' I "I II I III II ! II i I' I II (-il L-';] II f n~~ Ililll IIlllr 1"1" )1111 I Ii" , I , i Ie:: ]"F,O, wi ~ II I _~nn__~~. i%-..-....--r-r I FUI~NEL I I I I I i III Iii,. 1.1 ' I I I : [ W-12 P-12 i ! I I l-~- j L__.__ / Ii I FOOD FRE~ / I / 'I 11381 / I I I i ~ 'n I Ii A--/ ' I I i I ~jj I~ I ( ~. I I /rL,- I ~ /.--J~~ I /F~~ I II i \F-18 ~ I I "---/ II I I ~ I I [' C0P~RTIAl PL.-U~BING FL.-OOR PlAN : () 4' I I LINDELL ENGINEERING,INC.II PROJECT: . II DATE: IISHEET: II ?,AII VII Mt:::o I A,It::: "-"'0"" 1 ,I I I II ~-1iNNEAP~LIs~MN'5~'~~~ I COUNTRY INN & SUITES 2-MAY-05 M1.1o II (103)542-'3103 i CAPE CANAVERAL 'L I I inro""lindellengcom 1 r II I, 13 JUN 2005 CLARIFICATION ADDENDUM M-2 - T1f""\.TTlI..TfT"1T'\""I:r ..........~T I") r'lTTTI'""W""T""'\'-' \..-VU1"llKI li"ll"l 6[ ~UILt.,~ BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certify that this addendum was ARCHITECTS WEBER }\.RCHITECTS & prepared by me or under my direct PLANNERS supervision and that I am a duly licensed 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD Professional Engineer under the laws of SUITE 100 the State of Florida. LONG LAKE, MN 55356 ~~~JZ (952) 476-4434 Richard A. Lindell ENGINEERS Reg. No. PE0061553 Proj ect 0413 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PLYMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO AND BECOME APART OF THE ORIGINAL PLi\.NS AI'-ID SPECIFICATIONS. AIL ITEMS SHALL BE AS ORlGn~A.LLY SPECIFIED OR DRAWN, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY AMENDED BY THIS OR SUBSEQUENT ADDENDA. CHANGES TO THE DRA \VINGS l\H.l-FIRST FLOOR PLUlVIBING FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete water coolers F-22 and F-23 and associated piping in Corridor 162. 2. Mop sink F-21 and a soak sink F-27 has been added to Laundry room 108. Domestic water and sanitary sewer serving break room sink have been increased in size to accommodate F- 21 and F-27. See sheet M1.1b dated 13-Jun~05 showing sinks and piping. 3. Add water cooler F-28 and associated piping outside of Breakfast room 137 south of elevators. Connect a 2" sanitary sewer to nearest 3" or larger sanitary sewer pipe and connect 1-112" vent to nearest vent stack. Connect 1/2" cold domestic water to nearest 3/4" or larger cold domestic water pipe. Verify exact location of water cooler on architectural drawings. 4. Piping has been revised at grid lines L15 and G15 to serve revised units above. See sheet M1.1c dated 13-jun-05 showing revised piping. lof5 M1.2-SECOND FLOOR PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete mop sink F-21 and associated piping in Housekeeping room 249. - 2. Piping has been revised above main entrance lobby to serve revised units 300 and 328. See sheet M1.2a dated 13-jun-05 showing revised piping. Ml.3- THIRD FLOOR PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete mop sink F-21 and associated piping in Housekeeping room 349. 2. Piping has been revised to serve revised units 403, 430 and 457. See sheet M1.3a dated 13-jun-05 showing revised piping. M1.4-FOURTH FLOOR PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete mop sink F-21 and associated piping in Housekeeping room 449. 2. See sheet M1.4a dated 13-Jun-05 adding units 403, 430 and 457. See sheet M1.4a dated 13-jun-05 showing fixture types. M2.1-FIRST FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLA.1'~ 1. Exhaust fan E-41 and assoc. ductwork has been added to Elevator Equipment room 163. See sheet M2.1a dated 13-Jun-05 showing fan and ductwork. 2. See sheet M2.1a dated 13-Jun-05 revising ductwork from air handler AH-5 due to elevator equipment room addition. 3. See sheet M2.1b dated 13-Jun-05 revising ductwork from air handler AHA due to finished ceiling height and beam height conflict. 4. Supply air duct in front of main elevators near Storage room 163 shall be 18/10 in lieu of 16/12. M2.2-SECOND FLOOR BV AC FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete exhaust fan E-38 and associated ductwork in Housekeeping room 249. 2. Guestroom 202 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10- May-05. 3. Guestroom 210 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool, route 3" MECHA_NICAL CLARIFICATION M-l 2of5 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY iNN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10-May-05. 4. Storage room 247 shall have an exhaust fan type E-42, route 4" round duct from fan to 22 - inches up inside bat11room exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10- May-05. 5. Guestrooms 229, 231, 233 shall have typical exhaust fans E-2 as shown on typical unit layout. M2.3- THIRD FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete exhaust fan E-39 and associated ductwork in Housekeeping room 349. 2. Guestroom 302 shall have an exhaust fan type E-210cated above whirlpool, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10- May-05. 3. Guestroom 310 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10-May-05. 4. See sheet M2.3a dated 13-jan-05 showing exhaust fan shaft at units 300 and 328 to allow for neVl Suite room 457 above. 5. Guestrooms 329, 331, 333 shall have typical exhaust fans E-2 as shown on typical unit layout. 6. Guestrooms 300 and 328 shall have HP-2 style heat pumps in lieu ofHP-l. lVI2.4-FOURTH FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLAN 1. Delete exhaust fan E-4Q and associated ductwork in Housekeeping room 449. 2. Guestroom 402 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10-May-05. 3. Guestroom 410 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10-May-05. 4. Guestroom suite 457 shall have an exhaust fan type E-2 located above whirlpool and in bathroom, route 3" round duct from fan to 22 inches up inside bathroom exhaust fan shaft. Exhaust fan shaft shall be sized as per suggested shaft detail dated 10-May-05. See sheet M2.4a dated 13-Jun-05 showing exhaust fans. MECHANICAL CLA-RJFICATION M-l 30f5 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA 5. Guestrooms 429, 431, 433 shall have typical exhaust fans E-1 as shown on typical unit layout. -- L Delete heat pump HP-l in deleted storage room 457. v. 7. Delete heat pump HP-1 in deleted storage room 458 8. Add heat pump HP-4 for new Executive suite 457. See sheet M2.4a dated 13-Jun-05 showing HP-4 and assoc. ductwork M3.1-ROOF PLAN 1. Roof exhaust fans type E-22 shall be at grid lines E12 and G12 to serve typical unit shafts. 2. Add roof exhaust fan E-43 for typical unit exhaust fan shaft at grid lines K15. 3. Relocate roof exhaust fan E-23 for typical unit exhaust fan shaft to grid lines H 15. M4.1-MECHANICAL SCHEDULES 1. Delete plumbing fixtures F-22 and F-23 from the plumbing fixture schedule. 2. Delete exhaust fans E-38, E-39, E-40 from the fan schedule. 3. Exhaust fan E-41 thru EA3 has been added to the Exhaust fan schedules. Exhaust fan make and model shall be as follows: FAN SCHEDULE FAN RooM(S) MODEL MODEL ACCESSORIES CFM ESP MOTOR FAN VOLTSj NOTES NO. SERVED NO. NO, - - .. w.e. H.P, RPM PHASE - E-41 ELEV. EQUIP. ACME V900 A,B,F,J 880 0,250' 440w 1050 120j1 2 I [-42 'STORAGE RM 2471 8ROAN I 676 11l"'l. , 110 ' ,20" I 90w I - I 120/1 I i I f\,:lj [-43 TYP. UtiITS ACME PRN100 a,D.E,F ~'O 025" 1 "^ '0""' '20 '. 3 LI . . llU I:J\J I /1 ACCESSORIES NOTE5 A. GRAVITY 8ACKDRAFT DAMPER 1. CElUNG OR WALL MOUNTED EXHAUST FAt~ WlTl1 SQUIRREL CAGE BLOWER AND B, SEE SPEC. FOR STARTER, DISCONNECT ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED. AND OVERLOAD PROTECTION C. 8ROAN MODEL 644 RELIEF HOOD 2. ACME MASTERETTESERIES CEllJNG EXHAUST FAN WITH SQUIRREL CAGE BLOI'ItR AND D. MOTORIZED DAMPER SOUND INSULATED HOUSlNGAND ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED. E. ROOF CURB FOR FLAT ROOF BY GEN. CoNTRACTOR. MECH. CONT'R SHALL 3, DIRECT DRIVE, ROOF MOUNTED, CENTRIFUGAL EXHAUST FAN MQUNTED ON ROOF COORDINATE SIZE. CURB AND OTHER ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED. UNIT SHALL BE MOUNTED IN SUCH F. SPEED CONTROLlLER A WAY AS TO MEET 130 MPH WIND LOAD. G. ACME WlC. WALL. CAP H. ADJUSTABLE SHEAVES I. BROAN HIGH CAPACITY RELIEF HOOD J. 120 VOLT THERMOSTAT K. EAVE GRILLE MECHANICAL CLARIFICATION M-l 4of5 13 JUN 05 COIJNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA 4. Soak sink F-27 and water cooler F-28 has been added to the plumbing fixture schedule. Plumbing fixtures make and model shall be as follows: - PLUMBING RXTURE SCHEDULE FIXTURE TYPE DESCRIPTION COLD HOT WASTE VENT NO. WATER WATER . . . . , , F-:27 , :rvpE" ,LAU~D~, WB" pou~u; ~otA~AR.TM~T, FJ,.QOR, ~o.UNT~D, , , , , , 1/2". , 1/2", 1~1/t' H/2" .BQW~ , ,F~T F~TO,DQUf3L~ CQMPARn.tE~T, ~O,LD,ED ~qNE . FA'uGEJ: rn;:LrA212~ WI(HAERAT9R SVPi'Ly . D~BqR,N BRASS, 271.2$CW (1 /2~) ,."~GLE STops, WfTtl SUPPU~S, (C~RQM~), .DR.AIN , T'(L~.LA pArr~R~ AB$ 9R. pV~ P-TRAP WIT.H .DNIQN . F-28 1YPE . HiGlili.oWWATER . COOLER,. HDCP' SURFACE MOUNTED. ON ,WALL , , . , , , ' i/t. - 1-:-1/2" 1':'1/2" UNIT . Q-KAY HI/LOW ,EZSTL8G WITH STAINLESS STEEL ONE PIECE 8~IN WITH SIDE . AND FRONT PUSH BARS, (SUBMIT, COLOR SAMPLES WITH, SHOP DRAWINGS) , DRAIN lYLER ABS OR PVC P-TRAP WITH UNION GENERAL NOTES 1. ALL FIXTURES FOR HANDICAPPED USE SHALL COMPLY WITH HANDICAP CODE REQUIREMENTS AND ADA. REFER TO SECTION 15185 FOR INSULATION OF TRAPS AND SUPPLIES AT HANDICAP FIXTURES. 5. VTAC HP-4 has been added to the heat pump schedule for Executive suite 457. Make and model shall be as follows: HEAT PUMP SCHEDULE (AR TO AlA) r i INiT IUAI\IIIJ:""APn IO~ j unnc-I I C~M 1 Ilrj,T MeA I NO:' I"""':"vw,,~ I Nt),".... I m:l'\I - ~I FIRST. CO" , '18:;PU3. I 640. /3kW NOiE8 1. PAGi<AGED VEimqAL lHROUPH WALL STRAIGHT COOL UNIT, LOUVERER ACCESS/RETURN AIR PANEL, FILlER RACK, WALL SUEVE. WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT, ROOM TEMPERATURE LIMITER, ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATER AND SEA COAST PROTECTION. PROVIDE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY CONDENSATE PiPiNG TO APPROvED LOCATION. lVI5.1-MECHANICAL DETAILS L See sheet M5.1a dated 13-jun~05 showing condensate riser detail as noted on sheets MI.I thru MIA. MECHANICAL CLARIFICATION M-l 5of5 13 JUN 05 COUl"n'RY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I I I - I I SEE 1/4" SCALE PLAN ON THIS SHEET MECH. RM 140' 1 LAYOUT. ",' lill~I>}: ( "---~~:'+"H-ffiENGf+-. i-'+H~c-"'It , I 1-1/4" I TYP. OF (j2). IIi' I lU111 III i I I' . I LAUNDRT1.~.I.I' ~ I.Cl.....'lr..,..,....'....."..'.'.,.,'..,.~',.....,,...................,.'1 ./ w...t-.... ."." C) I F 20 I I' "ii I , . I ~ 1- '11:1'" 'tl , "llil i?1 I. MEeH. r1<0\1 _~~I~ ~ <I~ 'I lllt'l' :1 . ill F-21 [ I, III.,..,.....'..!, ! I , 'I I ,II". ., ,1" I ,11', r', i ," III _JUi'3i'-1j4/l II J II 7 :::, t I I 1-rr=-LF==:=--=1 n\ :[" I ~/Lf I I' I" jE:pREAK RM!W II'Z I I_""""~"'I' J i . II i I. ! i I ~~_....., . I Y,j/4, - [ " = l' _ i.! '. I~'- I · · ---' Iii II GJ) III' I i 0 ~'" 0 j" . i I I. II \\ IIII I I L~I~ ~ .1> II; II II" - I I b\ i i II \ "i(P5)~ il~:v~16)5 '..11 II r I ~ ~ 11>-< -....... _.A--.JJ,I_~_~_ I~.I . I P 7 ,( u, '\ -II , , , II, tll~\) "\~ '-II J ~ Iii I b 11;>-<( II ~I~A j I " i i I I r -, (\jf 0 \ I' vIIV" \ i. i I I \,-{, 6'?',:'1 I I' J ,=11 I "' "' 14'JJ;I--1 I' I \ 7_' N' 1-1/ ~ 'L \ L C.O. II} 55 MA IN Ig] ~ C)P;RTIAL PLU~BING FIRST FLOOR PLAN o 8' LINDELL E~JGI~JE[Ri~JG)INc.ll PROJECT: II DiHE: I ISHEe. T: II ~AII '/11 ~~~, ,,,- ,,---. I I' I -"'+11 "'-IU'lt::r-; LA''it:. NUr<1 H I MINN. EAPOLlS, MN, 55441 'I COUNmy INN & SUITES 113 JUN 05 . M1.1 b (163)542-'3163 , CA'JE "ANA\j'RAL Fi I . inrO'iilllndelleng,com r lv, t ) L II ,I ,I I I I I ~ UJAITIi'{G AREA ~ I I I r REGISTRA TION ~ ~ 8P~RTIAl PlU~BING FIRST FlOOR PlAN o 8' LI~JDELL E~jGI~jEERING)I~jc.ll PROJECT: II D/HE: IISHEET: II 34ii KiLME:R LANE NORTH I I 13-JUN-05 I' I MiNNEAPOliS, MN. 55441 COUNTRY INN & SUITES ,I~J (103)542-:)103 . CAPE CANA V'RAi FL inrO'iil1indelleng.com L' L, Q / KIDS FURR OUT -~ I FUr< fJlfJlNG, VERIFY WITH ARCHITECT. - ~ IIII ~- .iIIr ~~ II " \ , I r i.1 ii' ~, ID 'I' I ID H I () III! I ~ H ! --_________JJL_~ ~I -. I-- 11[1'1 I =C'I ~1'1 ~ II i . JilL ~I I11I I I I'II'J-i --! Ii II I I I I r1 .. I '11.1 ) I ! III I III ! 1__Jil i H /" 1:21~:i- or~~~ ~ELOIU IV; I~. __,~_H FURR OUT WAL.L,. - Ii I J, I !. ~ FOR PIPING, i II I I \ VERiFY WITH i I ~ ARCHIT,ECT ~~"_.- !'J / Ie" Inc, , --- ..... . IIL...............____ --- -- '-X. I I-.....Il...,.../-..../ ' III1 ''1 II ' -----,-, " "! = 'n_ I I ~' il~------.J L_~ In 10,1 \ III ,I! II' 12301 'I ~. II I' ': r~ll I' II ~I ,: I I:LEC. Roor1~ I!I:I I II (\ "G[, , , ~~'[' ~=H \ i II I I ~I III Ai '11\ , 'i! II I , , ."', I I , I I ! (I ~P~RTIAl PL-U/~BING SfCOND FlOOR PlAN I I ~ 0 8' I L1~JDELL E~JGINEERI~JGJI~JC I PROJECT: II DATE: [[SHEET: II . 3~li~~1~~,6L~A~~~~~~~ III COUN TIIY INN & sums 113- JUNOS II MI20 I (163)542-'3163 'I rAPE CANAVERAL FL I I I ' 1 inPo'@llndelleng.com ',-, " I I I I I -- I II CC J ~--------1 Q / KIDS I I I I 13031 I , II ~ ' I i I , I I : I i , I , I I I , ! ! ' i _____J . ._L~ " ; ! i i I ! i i ! I I I Ii! Q/Q II ~~ I I I 1300 I I ~~ I I I ~ , I'! I I I I I Ii! ! Ii' , I I II I I II .----tt--+----.I- f II I I I il ~ II! I II ~ Iii! ! ii Q/Q I ~j ~.! II Ii II ~ ~ I /~ II I JI ' // I I I I r il // I i i~ I ! CO I -f-. '// Ii / / ! I / _ml , ++-- I I [(--, I ( IU i I I OOT~~ U I I I I I FOR PIPING. iili I I I , VERIFY WITH I ' I I I i j I 'IARCHITECT . _. S I '1'1 I ! llH I Q / KID' I III I I Ii l-j ~~ ~tr1 ~ ~4::> I I ]tt----CD I -- I I 111 I ' I I KING / EXEC. I I I CI)P~RTiAl PlU~BiNG THIRD FlOOR PlAN I o 8' J LINDELL E~jGI~jEERING,I~JC.11 PROJECT: IIDAJE: I[SHEET: II J~i~~~~~~~I~~~.I~~~:~ I COUNTRY INN & SUITES II L3-JUN-05 II II (103)542-'3103 CADI CANAVERAl FL I M1.3o II inf'O'iD1inc:ietteng.com I I L _, I II I'~~ ~. I~] ill ~ r-1r -::::~UITE ~T- I I ~' V 'I ~ i I I , I I I /l '-i. I ( II ,I I ..Cr1j .J i- '.!~--J~.--'- I I EXE SUITE i i ~ I I TYPICAL I i I i UNIT i I - - --. ! j- GQI70Q---(D I I , I I' I , , I' I . i ,i . , i . I I' I I i /1. rB1.'-----kf/) I I 1/ --+ ..~~.,..i~-L I-J~ \ II Ji! ) I ~-l ~ hl---J I i -~' I I '--'dj- '......."'~ C,U".-,-t:. " "~. " I CAe l"--il"lL:l: '-" I ~- I 11------- i I L.j I I , III I I I I I - - i ~ I I CCY~RTIAL- PW~BING FOURTH FLOOR PL-AN I LI~P,E1~ JltGI,N^~~R!~~~~J,C/ I PROJECT: II DATE: IISHEl I: II ~MI'NNEA~~LI's~;:;~'~'5,:~~ II COUNTRY INN & SUITES !13-JUN-05 It, 1.44~ol I (103)542 -'3103 I CADE CAN. AVERAL FL I I inPo-aJ11ndelleng_com ' " I, I, II 1 I PANEL I' 7 MECH. ~ ~ 7 I-BR 0J =r- I 7 ( il I I ",-_l:lJ1 UP I I ELEC. 1/ 11211 i I i R-1<<-- 112x6 ~ 1200 CFM I ~ 1 I I [gJ I I I R-2 12xl0 I I i i I 24x24xS"0 II 200 CFM; II t I I r--l " ~ <<--~ II' I I y J . ill ./l i ~E. COR. I I PARTIAL MAIN FLOOR PLAN I I I I i 0' 8'-0" LINDELL ENGINEERING.INC. I PROJECT: II 0 A TE: IISHEET: I I 3411 KILNER LAHE' I CUUNTRY INN & SUITES 13-JUN-05 t~J i I NORTH I I i PL ,MOUTH, MN. 55441 CAPE CANAVERAL, I I (103)542-:)103 Ii I infoUl iinde:lienO.com I I I - !Wilr'cJ ~ I '[%jI ~ I I i iV~'i H 114~~ I I I ~ " I I 10/12 UP~ ' L AH-4 I ~ II I /l I .@ \:=1 ;; 10"0 BREAKFAST ~ I I I ~~ I I ---~,---.__. I I D-2 ?Llv?4vR"1Il I 26o~ CFM ~l i ~W_ I ~ i I I J I I I I i'~ -n--r I I II II / i '-" I Ill. II Y ill I I 10" 0 P=J iD=lLJ I I \ , I ~ ~\t. , I BRKFST -HTG I / I i ~ ~ I ~ I D-2 L-. I 24x'24xlO"0 I 24X24X8"~ t 250 CF~ I I ~.CFM\ I, 1 I i I I 1'1 Ii'~ FLOOR PLA~~ I 8'_12''' I LI~JDELL ENGlrJEERlrJG INC.II PROJECT: II DATE: II SHFFT: II 3411 ~L~~~LAi"E) I COUNTRY INN & SUITES 1113-JUN-05 I M2,1b II PLYi'10UTH, MN. 5S441 I CAPE CANAVERAL, FL I I, (163)542-'3163 I II II jnfo'@iindellenq.com I - I I I I UI Q/Q 13001 \ Ii ~ \~ II -----u --llL Q/Q I' 132BI HP-2 I '~F",c',RTIAL n~IRD FLOOR PLAN M2.3a I I 0' 8'-0" i I LI~JDELL E~jGINEERI~~G,I~K,11 PROJECT: II 0 A TE: 11C::f-Jr:-i=T II i II M'2~3LO" I 34ii KIU~iER LANE' II COUNTRY INN & SUITES 11J-JUN-OS NORTI-I II PL YMOUTI-I, MN. SS441 . CAPE CANAVERAL, FL II II (']03)S42-3103 infoo@lindellen .com I II Ii Ii I I I I \1 w I EXE. SUITE 141=,11 Ii 1 ~ Ii i - -~-----"----_.,'-- I I i R-1 I I i I I I I , I I '"^ R I I I I I i ! i I I 1 1 i 0' B'-0" I I I LI~JDELL ENGINEERING,INC.II PROJECT: IIDATE: I/SHElI: II 3411 KiL,'IER LANE COUNTRY INN & SUITES 1!13-JUN-05 IM240 [I NORTf-J ' PL YHOUTf-J, HN. S5441 CAPE CANAVERAL, FL (l03JS42 -'3103 I L_J inFo"'iindellen .com I I I J~/~ VERTICAL THRU-WALl HFAT PUMP ~ UNIT. TYPICAL. I . ~ OPEN END PIPE FOR AIR VENT AND ClEANOUT. I 3/4" CONDENSA TE PIPING AND STACK BY H.V.AC. CONT'R. REFER TO SPEC. SECTION 15060 FOR PIPING ~ MATERIAL. TYPICAL. 3/4" CONDENSA TE PIPING iNSTALLED WITHIN I INTERIOR WAll OF MECH CLOSET /,,,S I I I I I I 3/4" ~ 3/4" DISCHARGE THRU EXTERIOR WAll AT . ~ 18" ABOVE FINISHED GRAOE. .J' ./ ~1 r ____________ 3/4" OiSCHARGE THRU EXTERiOR WAll AT A I n _ i I I V.v. ~ MINIMUM OF 6" ABOVE FINISHED GRADE. IV CONDENSA TE DRAIN PIPING DETAIL NO SCALE I LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. I PROJlCT: II DATE: IISHEET: II 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH I II II II MINNEAPOLIS, MN. :;':;'441 II COUNTRY INN & SUI TES I!U-JUN-05 Ir:J (163.642-'3163 . CADE CANA V~RAI ~I inFoUllindelleng.com I I I t ~J r L I I 13 JUN 2005 CLARIFICATION E-l - COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certifY that this clarification was ARCHITECTS nrenared by me or lLl1der ill)' direct ~ ~ WEBER ARCHITECTS & supervision and that I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of PLANNERS the State of Florida. 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD ~~(J~ I'tJ, SUITE 100 LONG LAKE, MN 55356 Richard La.... Lindell (952) 476-4434 Reg.No.PE0061553 Project 0413 ENGINEERS LINDELL ENGINEERING, We. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PL YMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO AND BECOME .A Pl-\RT OF THE ORiGINAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL ITEMS SHALL BE AS OR1GINALL Y SPECIFIED OR DRA wl~, UNLESS SPECIFICALL Y AMENDED BY THIS OR SUBSEQUENT CLARIFICATIONS. CHANGES TO _THE DRAWINGS SHEET E1.1 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, add (4) recessed incandescent cans type "G3" and (1) dinuner in MTG-l #149. Refer to sheet E1.1a dated 13Jun05. 2. In MTG-2 #154, add (4) recessed incandescent cans type "G3" and (1) dilmner per Country Inn & Suites. The surface mounted fixture shall be type "V". The decorative vanity fixture shall be type "U". The vanity fixture in the restroom shall be type "T". Refer to sheet E 1.1 a dated 13Jun05. 3. In MTG- 3 # 15 5, add (4) recessed incandescent cans type "G 3" and (1) dimmer per Country Inn & Suites. The surface mounted fixture shall be type "V". The decorative vanity fixture shall be lype "U", The vanity fixture in the restroom shall be type "T". Refer to sheet E 1.1 a dated 13Jun05. 4. Per Country Inn & Suites, add (8) recessed incandescent cans type "G3", and add (1) dimmer, and delete (1) switch in BREAKFAST - MTG #140. Refer to sheet E1.1a dated 13Jun05. 5. Change the (5) dinuners located in \Vork 142 to switches. lof6 6. Change (2) dimmers located in Breakfast 137 to switches. 7. Relocate (2) light fixtures type "0" in I'v1en 133 from N.E. Corridor 161 wall to above vanities to accommodate Architectural changes. SHEET E2.1 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, add (l) duplex outlet in Laundry 108 for chemical dispensing equipment. Outlet shall be located at the rear of washing machines. Circuit to spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-30. 2. Delete (2) water cooler GFI outlets from S Corridor 162 adjacent to Great Room 152. 3. Add (1) GFI outlet for a water cooler on the corridor side of Breakfast 137 south of the elevators. Circuit to spare a 1 P-20A circuit breaker in panel K -1. Refer to Architectural drawings for exact location of water cooler. SHEETS E 1.1. AND E2.1 1. Maintenance 109 has been deleted. House Keeping Office 130 has been relocated into the Maintenance 109 space. Delete the (2) light fixtures type "C" from the original House Keeping Office 1 03 location. Relocate the (3) outlets and (1) telephone/computer outlet from the original House Keeping Office 1 03 location to the new area. Locate one outlet per wall in the new office. VerifY the new locate of the telephone/computer outlet with the Owner. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. 2. Break Room 131 has been enlarged. Relocate electrical devices as required to accommodate Architectural changes. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. 3. Entrance to Main 127 near new House Keeping Office 130 has been revised. Relocate electrical devices to accommodate Architectural changes. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. SHEETS E1.1. E2.1, AND E3.1 1. Storage 163 has been deleted. Relocate outlet to back of fireplace. Delete switch and light fixture type "C". 2. Elevators near Lobby 101 have been moved. Relocate elevator pit and elevator lobby electrical devices to accommodate Architectural modifications. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. 3. Elevator EL- 3 and the shunt trip circuit breaker shall be located in new Elevator Equipment Room #162. The new elevator equipment room is located adjacent to Elevator 3 in Laundry 108. Provide new elevator equipment room panel EP-2 (1P, 30A, 208V, 12 IP-20A CBs). ELECTRlCAL CLARIFICATION E-I 2of6 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA Panel EP-l shall be feed with 3#10 conductor from main distribution center MDC-l. Provide a 2P-30A branch circuit breaker. Provide an outlet in new equipment room and circuit to panel EP-2. Add (1) light fixture type "Dl" and circuit to panel EP-2. Elevator 3 pit - electrical devices shall be circuited to panel EP-2 in lieu of panel EP-I. Provide heat and smoke detectors in new equipment room. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. 4. Add power and control wiring for new exhaust fan E-41 (440W, I-Phase, 120V) in new Elevator Equipment Room 163. Wire a 120V thermostat and speed controller :f.J....T..ished by the Mechanical Contractor. Furnish, install, and wire a motor rated on/off snap switch disconnect. Locate thermostat, speed controller, and snap switch adjacent to hinge side of door. Circuit to panel EP-2 with 2#10 conductor. Provide a IP-20A circuit breaker. Add (2) fire smoke dampers locations in Elevator Equipment Room 163. Refer to Electrical Equipment Schedule on sheet E4.2 for fire smoke damper wiring requirements. SHEETS E1.1. E1.2. E1.3. AND El.4 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, in typical unit type Q/Q IBR, add (1) wall sconce type "s" located on party wall and adjacent to entry door. The switch located at the entry door shall control the wall sconce in lieu of the switch outlet. Typical. 2. In typical unit type Extended Stay, relocate bedroom wall sconce type "s" and switch to accommodate change in door swing. \Vall sconce shall be centered on wing \vall adjacent to bathroom vanity. Refer to Architectural drawings for unit changes. Typical. SHEETS E2.1. E2.2. E2.3. AND E2.4 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, in typical units with a dry bar, delete (1) outlet from wing wall. ~.1ount outlet for microwave/refrigerator at 16" a.f.f. and mount outlet for coffee maker 2" above counter backsplash. Typical. 2. Per Country Inn & Suites, in typical units with an "activity table", mount (1) outlet at 16" a.f.f, mount (1) outlet at 36" a.ff., and mount computer/telephone outlet at 36" a.f.f Refer to architectural drawings for furniture layout. Typical. ,., In typical units Specialty 202, Specialty 302, and Specialty 402 relocate wall sconce type "s" .J. to accommodate Architectural modification to unit entry. Refer to Architectural drawings for changes to unit modifications. 4. Delete exhaust fan E-38 from Housekeeping Room 249. ~ Delete exhaust fan E-39 from Housekeeping Room 349. .l. 6. Delete exhaust fan E-40 from Housekeeping Room 449. 7. In Specialty units 202, 210, 302, 310,402, and 410, add exhaust fan type E-2. Fans shall be ELECTRICAL CLARIFiCATiON E-l 30f6 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA located above tubs and circuited with tub's recessed can lighting. 8. Guest Units 229, 231, 233, 329, 331, 333, 429, 431, and 433 shall have bathroom exhaust fans B-2 in lieu of E-I. 9. Add new exhaust fan E-42 (90W, IPhase, I20V) in Elec 247. Provide power and control wiring. Furnish and install a separate on/off switch. Circuit to a spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-30. SHEET E2.5 1. Roof exhaust fan E-32 shall be located at grid lines EI2 and G 12. Verify exact location with Mechanical drawings. 2. Relocate roof exhaust fan E-23 to grid line HIS. VerifY exact location with Mechanical drawings. 3. Add new exhaust fan E-43 (l/lOHP, IPhase, I20V) for typical unit exhaust fan shaft at grid line KIS. Provide power and control wiring. Wire a I20V thermostat and speed controller furnished by the Mechanical Contractor. Furnish, install, and wire a motor rated on/off snap switch disconnect. Circuit to a spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-30. VerifY exact location of fan, speed controller, thermostat, and snap switch with Mechanical drawings. SHEETS Et.4. E2.5. Al",u E3.4 1. Stair B has been change to have access to roof. Add (1) wall bracket light fixture type "P" and (1) emergency light fixture type "F" above roof access door within Stair B. Circuit with Stair B lighting circuit. Add (1) outlet adj acent to roof access door wit.b..in Stair B and circuit with Stair B outlet circuit. On the exterior of Stair B above roof access door, add (1) light fixture type "L". Fixture shall be controlled thm lighting control panel. On exterior of Stair B adjacent to roof access door, add (1) WP/GFIoutlet. Circuit outlet, unswitched, "'lith exterior light to spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-IS. Relocate smoke detector to roof level ceiling. Add (1) IScd Horn/Strobe adjacent to roof access door within Stair B. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. SHEETS E1.I. E1.2. E1.3. EI.4. E2.1. E2.2. E2.3. AND E2.4 1. In typical unit type Q / Kids, relocated bar light fixture type "U", bedroom wall sconce type "S", bedroom outlet, bedroom telephone/computer outlet, bar outlets, and switches to accommodate changes to unit walls and bar location. Refer to architectural drawings for unit changes. TypicaL 2. In typical units Q/Q 208, Q/Q 308, and Q/Q 408 make the following changes to accommodate Architectural modification to the unit entries: Relocate switch adjacent to door on latch side. Relocate wall sconce type "S" 6'-0" towards new entry door location. Add (1) outlet in entry (3 thus). Outlets shall be circuited vertically. Circuit to spare IP-20A circuit ELECTRICAL CLARIFICATION E-l 40f6 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA breaker in panel P-27. Refer to Architectural drawings for changes to unit modifications. 3. In typical units King 227, King 327, and King 427 make the following changes to accommodate Architectural modification to the unit entries: Relocate switch adjacent to door on latch side. Relocate wall sconce type "S" 5'-0" towards new entry door location. Add (1) outlet in entry (3 thus). Outlets shall be circuited vertically. Circuit to spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-27. Refer to Architectural drawings for changes to unit modifications. 4. In typical units King 229, King 329, and King 429 make the following changes to accommodate Architectural modification to the unit entries: Relocate switch adjacent to door on latch side. Relocate wall sconce type "S" 5' -0" towards new entry door location. Add (1) outlet in entry (3 thus). Outlets shall be circuited vertically. Circuit to spare IP-20A circuit breaker in panel P-27. Refer to Architectural drawings for changes to unit modifications. 5. In Storage 228, Storage 353, and Storage 451, relocated outlet, switch, and light to accommodate Architectural changes. Refer to Architectural drawings for room changes. 6. In Elevator Lobby 200, Elevator Lobby 351, and Elevator Lobby 400, adjust locations of decorative surface mounted fixtures type "B", decorative wall sconces type "A", and emergency light fixtures type "P" to accommodate Architectural changes. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. SHEETS E1.3. E2.3. AND E4.3 1. Units Q/Q 300 and Q/Q 328 have been changed to new unit type Exe Q/Q Suite. Circuit li.l1its to same panel and circuit breakers. Refer to sheet E- TV -a dated 13Jun05 for typical unit electrical layout. 2. Stor 352 has been deleted. Delete outlet, switch, and light fixture type "C". Relocate outlet and wall sconce type "A" in Elevator Lobby 351 to accommodate Architectural change. SHEETS E1.4. E2.4, A1~D E4.4 1. Storage 457 and Storage 458 have been changed to new typical unit type Exe Suite. Delete lighting, outlets, and switches associated with storage rooms. Circuit all of typical unit Exe Suite's electrical devices to spare IP-20A circuit breakers in panel P..30. Add (1) 2P-35A circuit breaker for HP-3. Refer to sheet E- TU-a dated 13Jun05 for typical unit electrical layout. Relocate (1) outlet in Elevator Lobby 400 to accommodate Architectural modification. SHEET E2.1 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, add (1) wall mounted phone outlet in vestibule. Locate adjacent card reader. Verify location with Architect. 2. Add (1) GFI outlet for chemical dispensing equipment in Laundry #108. Outlet shall be ELECTRICAL CLARIFICATION E-l 50f6 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA located at rear of washing machines. Verify exact location with owner. Circuit to spare IP- 20A circuit breaker in panel P-13. 3. Verify locations of all kitchen equipment with owner prior to rough-in. SHEET E4.2 1. In the Electrical Equipment Schedule, Heat/Cool Units He-I. HC-2, and HC-3 shall be noted as HP-l, HP-2, and HP-3 respectively. 2. Add Heat/Cool Unit HP-4 (l8MCA, 1 Phase, 208V) to Electrical Equipment Schedule. Circuit with 2#10 Conductor. Refer to Electrical Equipment Schedule note "M". 3. Change light fixture type "U" from decorative sconce to decorative vanity. Owner shall select fixture. ELECTRICAL CLARIFICATION E-l 6of6 13 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA J I I U I P-16 10 I I I I I I .I Y ~ I 1\ _ ~ I I \ \ ~ I i 1 PARTIAL MAIN FLOOR PLAN - LIG~TING I I lZ)' 8' - lZ)' LINDELL ENGINEERING INC.II PROJECT: 0413 II DA TE: II SHEET: /I 3411 KiLME;;( LANE No~n..j COUNTRY iNN & SUITES ~~ MINNEAPOLIS, MN. &&441 BY CARLSON (163.542 -~163 infOllllindellens.com CAPE CANAVERAL FLORIDA -~-- - .1 n q._;==:=~==~ ~ ~~-=~=l;'~. . ~~~. . --- ---1 ~~ lP-20A t . _C::;J -~-~ -~- S6 ~- ------- ~//..------ ~ 7 T ~___~ / ~ .L~_...~~_~.._. --==~.~_',==:==<~., -~-"---,~- u u (/u-. ~YPICAL U,NIT - EXE Q/Q SUITE . ~-- 0' 4'-0" -- -- LINDELL EN, GINEERING INC. Ph~OJECT: O~~13 , -I DA IE: I SHEET: 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH COUNTRY INN & SUITES i MINN~~~~~~~2_~~6i5441 BY CARLSON 13JUN05 E _ TU-a inro@linclelleng.coM CAPE CANA ~ERAL, FL.ORIDA __ -- -- -----~----"._---~--~--"_._._-"_.. --- ---- '-......... --- -:Fl - ------- ----"--- SSB [- ) ~ [ ------ TYPICAL UI\JIT .- EXE SUITE ( ""-------- ::::J ( 4'-0' ~ "., ~ \_- \ ~/~ ( ) \ \ ,.~_/ r I " \ '\ \ ',-) V I I '\\ l ( ------ - nl.. ~8 T-f{. 2P-20A- 0 "- -~-~-~.~~T - -- -- -- LINDELL ENGINEERING INC. PROJECT: O~~1.3 -- DATE: ] SHEET: I 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH COUNTRY INN & SUITES I MINNEAPOLIS, MN. 55441 BY CARLSON 13JUN05 E - TU-b (763)542-9163 inf'o@lindelleng.coM CAPE CAN A \fERAL, FLOR~IDA -- 24 JUN 2005 CLARIFICATION E-2 -~. COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certify that this clarification was ARCHITECTS prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed WEBER ARCHITECTS & Professional Engineer under the laws of PLANNERS the State OfFIO~ 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD SUITE 100 ~d.~~ /~ LONG LAKE, MN 55356 Richard A. Lindell (952) 476-4434 Reg..}Jo,PE0061553 Project 0413 ENGINEERS LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PL YMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO i'..ND BECOME A PART OF THE ORIGll-IAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL ITEMS SHALL BE AS ORIGINALLY SPECIFIED OR DRA\VN, lJNLESS SPECIFICALL Y AMENDED BY THIS OR SUBSEQUENT CLARIFICATIONS. CHANGESTOTHEDRA~NGS SHEET E4.2 1. To the Light Fixture Schedule, add fIxture type "G3" as follows: Prescolite IDBX-T072 (or approved equal) with a 100W R40 incandescent lamp. lofl J -.....--.- I y. . . .' P-16 10 I 0_11': ~ , I .......L ~ I I ';:I I \ I I rk >-A / ~ I L/ T rWT -~ \ \ \ 19 ~ '&ld \H~: Q / ~ Q Q Q \ \ ,\., / ~ lYI I I - A--~:/- G3 G3)) ~ ) I ~~1(r3 c ! . MTGI.-2 MTGI.-~ . ~ ~. F1 I G~ '')S. I rr .. ~~~Q ELEe ocnQ :. ~ \ PARTIAL MAIN FLOOR PLAN - L IGl-ITING I I (2)' 8'-(2)' LINDELL ENGINEERING,INC. PROJECT: 0413 DATE: SHEET: 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH COUNTRY INN & SUITES MINNEAPOLIS, MN. SS441 BY CARLSON 13JUN05 E1.1 a (16)3.042 -~16>3 1I"lfD@!!l"lri,.,!!,o-n9 "''''''m f' ^ nc {"\ ^ I\IA \lrn ^ I il r\r->,Ir\ .A II II II I II.If\iL I.IMI'IMVc.r\J-\L, rLVKIUA 30 JUN 2005 CLARIFICATION E-3 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certify that this clarification was ARCHITECTS prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed W bBER ARCHITECTS & Professional Engineer under the laws of PLANNERS Kte ofFlonda. 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD SUITE 100 ~{[ ~/- . . /. (;/~er'/ LONG LAKE, MN 55356 Richard A. Lindell (952) 476-4434 Reg. No. PEOO61553 Project 0413 ENGINEERS LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PLYMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO AND BECOME A PART OF THE ORIGINAL PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL ITEMS SHALL BE AS ORIGINALL Y SPECIFIED OR DRA \V~"',f, UNLESS SPECIFICii~LL ,\r AMENDED n"T THIS OR Dr SUBSEQUENT CLARIFICATIONS. CHANGES TO THE DRA \VINGS SHEETS El.l. E2.1. AND E3,1 1. Elevator EL-3 and the shunt trip circuit breaker shall be located in new Elevator Equipment Room #162. The new elevator equipment room is located adjacent to Elevator 3 in Laundrj 108. Provide new elevator equipment room panel EP-2 (1P, 30A, 208V, 12 IP-20A CBs). New panel EP-2 shall be feed with 3#10 conductor from main distribution center MDC-1. Provide a 2P-30A branch circuit breaker. Provide an outlet in new equipment room and circuit to panel EP-2. Add (1) light fixture type "D 1 and circuit to panel EP-2. Elevator 3 pit electrical devices shall be circuited to panel EP-2 in lieu of panel EP-1. Provide heat and smoke detectors in new equipment room. Refer to Architectural drawings for floor plan modifications. 2. Elevator panel EP-l shall be feed from MDC-l with 4#3 conductor. SHEETS El.l. El.2. El.3. El.4. E2.l. E2.2. E2.3. AND E2.4 1. Per Country Inn & Suites, in typical unit types Q/Q IBR and King / I-BR, add (1) wall sconce type "S" located on party wall and adjacent to entry door. The switch located at the entry door shall control the wall sconce in lieu of the switch outlet. The switched outlet shall be changed to a non-switch outlet. Typical. 1 of2 SHEETS El.4. E2.4. AND E4.4 1. Storage 457 and Storage 458 have been changed to new typical unit type Exe Suite. Delete lighting, outlets, and switches associated with storage rooms. Circuit all of typical unit Exe Suite's electrical devices to spare IP-20A circuit breakers in panel P-30. Add (1) 2P-35A circuit breaker for HP-4. Refer to sheet E- TU-b dated 13Jun05 for typical unit electrical layout. Relocate (1) outlet in Elevator Lobby 400 to accommodate Architectural modification. ELECTRICAL CLARIFICATION E-3 20f2 30 JUN 05 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON PROJECT 0413 CAPE C~"~A VERAL, FLORIDA 04 AUG 2005 CLARIFICATION E-4 COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA I hereby certify that this clarification was ARCHITECTS prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly licensed '\lEBER ARCHITECTS & Professional Engineer under the laws of PLANNERS the State of Florida. 2280 WATERTOWN ROAD ~~ PL5 SUITE 100 LONG LAKE, MN 55356 Richard A. Lindell f: is. . (952) 476-4434 Reg. No. PE0061553 Project 0413 ENGINEERS LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. 3411 KILMER LANE NORTH PL YMOUTH, MN 55441 (763) 542-9163 THIS CLARIFICATION SHALL BE ADDED TO AND BECOME A PART OF THE OIUGINAL PLANS i~>-ND SPECIFICATIONS. ALL ITEMS SHALL BE AS ORIGINALLY SPECIFIED OR DRAWN, UNLESS SPECIFICALL Y AJvfENDED BY THIS OR SUBSEQUENT CLARIFICATIONS. CHANGES TO THE DRAWINGS SHEETS E1.1 L Per Country In...lJ & Suites, Breakfast-137 shall have dimmable lighting. Change (26) recessed non-dimming cans type "G" to dimtnable recessed can type "G3." Change (2) switches to dimmers. The (10) cans located in the southern area of Breakfast-137 shall be circuited to Panel K-l and controlled through (1) dimmer. The (16) cans located in the northern areas of Breakfast-137 shall be circuited to a spare IP-20A circuit breaker in Panel K-l and controlled through the second dimmer. The exit/emergency lights located in Breakfast-137 shall be circuited non-switched with the nearest lighting circuit. 2. Per Country Inn & Suites, Lobby-1 01 shall have dimmable lighting. The (20) recessed cans type "GI" located in Lobby-lOI shall be dimmable as originally specified: Prescolite CFT826HEB-WTF802H-DM (or approved equal). These cans shall be controlled through a dimmer located in Work-l 42. The (2) decorative fixtures type "J" located in Lobby-lOI shall be dimmable. These decorative fixtures type "J" shall be controlled individually through (2) dimmers located in Work-I42. I of I -- SWIMMING POOL DESIGN -- -- j u. Vl a t-:. N vi _ . J-'----/ ~ . . ,.___1- . 1-...-- -.- ."-1 l . :... ......, .' .:.. _.!.:~! VJ _I ~ ~ . . r=:~:1 :"; a ~ . . i -'>j- .)71 ~ 1'_ ~ ~1 -:z ~ ::z s ?;- ~ . - . .._._~ ~ '" . - ~ - \ ."--'-- 6 ~ - u-:l:':.l r @ i I J~~' " ~ I I 1\ -- I I I ... r '. . I .. ~~,.., //. , - -.- , /....,~""". . ~. ~~ -_.--- ----- ~.."" -,-"'-~--_-.......:-/~~. , . ---. -. ~ -- -.... . r~ol:. tJ4 POOL DIMENSIONS '. F~eform Pool of J575 square feet. Pool water depth will be 3 feet at th~ shanow end steps, and 5 feet at the main drain. POOL CONSTRUCTION wm be buiit fer Construction design of an engineer and the state of Florida. The sides and flOOT will be fonned with #3 steel bar. The floor is to be gunite 3S00psi @ 6" and tbe walls 3S00psi @ 6". Includes Gem fini5h. COPING I TILE The pool edge will ~Qns.st of 2 rows of 6x6 inch waterline tile~ with Flow Gutter & cantilever deck edge on interior of pool. Selections skall be made from samples supplied by All in One Pools. POOL REA T A single StaRitt 400,000 BTU Included to beat pool. SAFETY AND C.LEANING EQUIPMENT AU safety and cleaning equipment requireel by the state eode ,.hall be furnished by An in One Pools. This equipment includes life ring, life hook with pole, pool rules sign, test kit, vacuum bead, vacuum hose, pole, ladders, handrails, and depth. markers. POOL LIGHT All underwater pool lights required by the state code are included in tbis proposal. This proposal does not include overhead or deck lighting, which is nqbii'~d by state code for night Sl'timming. FIL TRA TION SYSTEM Inc:ludcs Commercial Grade, State approved D.E. free flow system furnished and installed with a collector tank, re..circulatioii pumps, valves, gauges, flow meter, automatic water make up device, and chlorination. POOL PLUMBING All plumbing sball be sehcdule 40 PVC pipe. Pool contractor not required to 8UPPly the f~h water line at tbe equipment pad but we will connect. CLEANING SYSTEM The vacuum system shall operate through vaeuum fittings placed within the swimming pool walls. . All standard cleaning equipment necessary for maintaining the pool are provided. DEW A TERlNG SYSTEM During excavation, AIl in One Pools will provide up to 20 cubic yards of gravel for dewatering and soil stabilization purposes. It is assumed tbat standard 2 inch electric pumps will be adequate for dewatering. ,Large diameter diesel pumps are excluded from this proposal. A permanent under drain system shall be installed below the main drain and capped at deck level for future dewatering durin~ draining and maintenance. I r'"1__ Vw EXCA VA TION I BACKFILL c Excavation of tbe pool shan be performed by An in One Pools. The eXCAvated till will be dropped ad.iacent to the pool for use by otheJ"S or removed from this site. The pool shall be backfilled and compacted in ODe foot lift!. The compaction of the deck area outside the pool backfill shan be the n:gp~Gsibmty of the pool dc~k sub~ufjt.f'actor unit:s.t! the deck is part of this proposal. CHEMICAL 1ST ART UP All chemicals for the initial balancing and start up of ~he pool shall be provided. An in One Pools shail perfoma the initial start up and balancing, provide operational manuals, and instruct personnel on the operation of the pool t:quipment. OPERATTNGPERNUTS All local and state applications for Operating Permiu shall be initiated by All in One Pools. WARRANTY All pool structures and equipment carry a One-year warranty effective from date design engineer approves State of Florida inspution. SPA PROPOSAL INC.LU.DES ENGINEERING I PERMITS State of Florida and local applications rOt" initial operating permit llre induded. SPA DIMENSIONS .Freeform Spa of 120 squ;lre feet. Designed to be 12 person. SPA CONSTRUCTION WiD be built Per Construction design of an engineer a.nd the state of Florida. The sides and floor will be formed with #3 steel bar. The floor is to be gunite 3500psi @ 6" and tbe wall~ 3500psi @ 6". Includes Gem finish. COPING I TILE The pool edge will consist of 1 rows of 6x6 ioch waterline tile, cantilever deck edge on interior of pool. Selections shall be made from samples supplied by All in One Pools. SPA HEAT ^ single StaRite 400~OOO BTU Included to beat spa. SA.FETY AND CLEANING EQUIPMENT All safety and cleaning equipment required by the state code shall be furnisJled by All in One Pool" This equipment indudes life ring, life hook --- . -.. -- ......-. . r Hot:. ~'f with pole, pool rules sign, test kit, vacuum head, vacuum hose, pole, ladders, handrails, and depth markers. SPA LIGHT AU underwater pool lights required by the state ~ode are included in this proposal. This proposal does not include overhead or de~k lighting, which is required by state code Co.. night swimming. FIL TRA TION SYSTEM Indudes Commercial Grade, State approved D.E. 'free Oow system furnbbed and installed with a collector tank, re-drculation pumps, valves, gauges, flow meter, automatic water make up device, and chlorination. Includes large volume therapy ,jets. SPA PLUMBING All phunbing shall be schedule 40 PVC pipe. Pool contractor not required to supply the fresh water line at the equipment pad but we will conned. CLEANING SYSTEM The vacuum system shall operate through vacuum fittings placed within the swimming pool walls. Ail standard cleaning equipment necessary for maintaining the pool are provided. DEWATERING SYSTEM .During excavation, All in One Pools will provide up to 20 cubic yards of gravel for dewatering and soil stabili7.ation purposes. It is assumed that standard 2 inch electric pumps will be adequate for dewatering. Large diameter diesel pumps are excluded from this proposal. A permanent under drain system shall be installed belqw the main drai~ and capped at deck level .for future dewatering during dnining and mailiteuance. EXCA V ATION I BACKFILL Excavation of the pool shall be performed by All in One Pools. The excavated fin will be dropped ad.iacent to the pool for use by others or removed from this site. The pool shall be backfilled and compacted in one foot lifts. The compaction of the deck an~a outside the pool backfill shaU be the responsibility of the!: pool deck subcontractor amess the deck is part of this proposal. CHEMICAL 1ST ART UP All chemicals for the initial halancing and start up of the pool shall bc provided. AU in One Pools shall perform the initial start up and halancing, provide operational manuals, and instruct personnel on the operation ofthe pool equipment. OPERA T.ING PERMITS All local and state applications for Operatin~ Permits shall be initiated by An in One Pools. - --- . -.. -- --. . rH<.:1t:. tJo WARRANTY All pool structures and equipment carry a one-year warraJdy effective from date design engineer approves State of Florida inspection. WADING POOL PROPOSAL INCLUDES ENGINEERING I PERMITS State of Florida and local applications for initial operating permit art included. WADING POOL D.lMENSIONS Freeform Pool of 300 square feet. Pool water depth will be 6"-12" the entire pool. POOL CONSTRUCTION Will be built Per Construdion design of an engineer and the state of Florida. The sides and floor will be formed with #3 steel bar. The floor is to be gunite 3500psi @ 6" and the walls 3500psi @ 6". Includes {":vem finish. COPING I TILE The pool edge will consist of 1 rows of 6x6 ineh waterline tile, with cantilever deck edge on interior of pool. Selections shall be made from samples supplied by All in One Pools. SAFETY AND CLEANING RQUIPMENT All safety and deaning equipment requh'ed by t.he state code l'hall be furnisbed by All in One Poob. Tbi~ equipment includes life rin~ life hook with pole, pool rules sign, test kit, vacuom he-ad, vacuum hose, pole, ladders, handrails, and depth markers. FfL TRA TION SYSTEM Indudes Commercial Grade, State approVEd D.E. free flow gystem furnished and installed with 8 ~Ue.etor tank, re-drculation pumps, valves, 28uges, flow meter, automatic water make up device, and chlorination. WADING POOL PLUMBING AJI plumbing shall be schedul.e 40 PVC pipe. Pool contractor not required to supply the fresh water line at the equipment pad but we will conned. CLEANING SYSTEM The vacuum system shall operate through vacuum fittings plaCed within the swimming pool walls. All standard cleaning equipment necessary for maintaining the pool are provided. DEWATERING SYSTEM During excavation, All in One Pools will provide up to 20 cubic:: yards of gravel ror dewatering and soil stabilization purposes. .It is assumed that -- - - standard 2 inch electric p.....ps wlU be adequ.ate for dewatering. Large ... diameter diesel pumps are excluded from this proposal. A pcr1llanc:nt under drain system shall be installed below the main drain and capped at deck level for future dewatering dllring draining and maintenance. EXCA VA T!ON I BAGI<FILL Excavation of the pool shall be performed by All in One Pools. The excavated fill will be dropped adjacent to the pool for use by others or removed from this site. The pool shall be backf'tlled aDd compacted in ODe foot lifts. The t!Ontpaction of the deck area outside the pool backfill shall be the responsibility of the pool deck subcontractor unles~ the deck is part or this piVpwal. CHEMICAL I START UP All ehemicals for the initial balancing and start up of tbe pool shall he provided. All in One Pools shall perform the initial start up and balancin2, provide operational manuals, and instruct personnel on the operation of the pool equipment. OPERA TING PERMITS All local and state applications for Operating Permits shall be initiated by All in One Pools. W ARRANl'v All pool structure! ~'ftd ~qujpmellt carry a one-ytar warranty effective from date design engineer approves State of Florida inspection. WATER FEATURES 5'xl5' Koc:k waterfaU built t<>> 200 GPM Specificatj<>>n. Jncluding separate pump. 3'x9' Rock waterfall built to 50 GPM Specification. Including separa.te pump. Wading ,Pool to include two water bugs, One wateW" cannon and Ii J-aludrop feature built t~ 300GPM Specifications. Includin2 separate pump. .ELECTRICAL The pool equipment i~ provided pre-wif"~. Electrical supply to the sub- panel is to be by otbers. Pool light conduits will be terminated outside the deck, fOf eonnection by others. Additional switches or controls are not included. DECKING . The pool deck will be fiber mesh reinforced concrete with a stamped concrete. The deck will have expansion and control joints, deck-o-drain and positive slope as needed for proper drainage. The deck edge at the pool will be floating cantilever. The deck priced is based on an area of 5700 Sq Ft Additi()!!! n~ deletions to the deck priee wi!! be :t S 6.00 per square foot. EXCLUSIONS 1. Site clearing, demolition and grade cban~es. 2. Remove and lor reroute underground utilities. 3. Unknown subsoil conditions, muck, rock, etc., and ,piling installation if required. 4. Temporary job site electricity and water. S. Eledrical service to equipment and sub~panels. 6. Waste line from filter equipment. 7. Domestic water supply to the filter equipment. D Deck shower and drinking fountain. o. 9. Overhead ni~ht lighting. 10. Buildin2s, showers, bathrooms, footers for lights or buildings. 11. Fencing 12. Maintenance and chemicals after'inspection by ,Engineer of Recorn. 13. ,Pool lift for handicapped acct5s if required. This Bid is the outline for the specified job and would be sub.ied to pool ~esign if engineered by another source. Thank you for tbe opportunity to bid this Job. Sincerely, Bill Wallace CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DOCUMENT 00001 PROJECT DIRECTORY DATE: 5 July 2004 PROJECT: Cape Canaveral Country Inns & Suites New Facility 9009 Astronaut Boulevard Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 OWNER: STRUCTURAL/CIVIL ENGINEER: Port View of Cape Canaveral Droar & Associates, Inc. 5718 Grand Avenue 580 North Wickham Road, Suite E Duluth, MN 55807 Melbourne, FL 32935 Telephone: (218) 628-2700 Telephone: (321) 253-8233 Facsimile: (218) 6282724 Facsimile: (321) 253-8232 Contact: Kent Oliver Contact: Noel Droor ARCHITECT: MECHANICAL ENGINEER: 'v^Jeber Architects & Planners Lindell Engineering, inc. 2280 Watertown Road Long Lake, ~v1~~ 55356 3411 Kilmer Lane North Telephone: (952) 476-4434 Plymouth, MN 55441-2415 Facsimile: (952) 476-5863 Telephone: (763) 542~9-163 Contact: Neil Weber Facsimile: (763) 542-9214 e-mail: nw@weberarchitects.com Contact: Chris Zepeda e-mail: czepeda@!inde!!enO.com GENERAL CONTRACTOR R. W. Paul Construction, Inc. ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: 581 E Horatio Ave Lindell Engineering, Inc. Maitland, FL 32751-4520 3411 Kilmer Lane North Telephone: (407)-599-5858 Plymouth, MN 55441-2415 Facsimile: (407) 599-5850 Telephone: (763) 542-9163 Contact: Ralph Paul Facsimile: (763) 542-9214 e-maii: rpaui56(i1)earthlink.com Contact: Troy Adams SPECIFICATION WRITER: e-mail: tadams@lindellenq.com McCarty Consulting Services, Inc. 1895 Hampshire Lane North END OF DOCUMENT Minneapolis, MN 55427-4276 Telephone: (763) 545-0599 Facsimile: (763) 545-1015 Contact: Dean E. McCarty e-mail: dean@mccartvconsultinq.com ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 00001 - 1 OF 1 PROJECT DIRECTORY CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DOCUMENT 00005 CERTIFICATION PAGE PROJECT: Cape Canaveral Country Inns & Suites New Facility 9009 Astronaut Boulevard Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 ARCHITECT I hereby certify that this Drawing, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Florida. Architect's Name: Neil Weber, AlA. Architect's Signature: Date: 5 July 2004 Registration No. AR0017512 MECHANICAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this Drawing, Specification, or Report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Florida. Engineer's Name: Richard A. Lindell, P.E. Fnoiof'!Ar'!'; Sion;::lhirA' -"v"'--' - -'v"-'~-'-- Date: 5 July 2004 1""'\_ _:_L_~J.:__ tl.1~ ^^r\I'\r\ ri.t:\:l I::> II ctllUr r I\lU. vuuvv ELECTRICAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that Division 16 of this Specification was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Florida. Engineer's Name: Richard A. Lindell, P.E. Engineer's Signature: Date: 5 July 2004 Registration No. 00000 END OF DOCUMENT ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 00005 - 1 OF 1 CERTIFICATION PAGE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DOCUMENT 00010 - VOLUME 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE Cover Sheet 03521 Lightweight Insulating Concrete 00001 Project Directory 00005 Certification Page 00010 Table of Contents DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies BIDDING REQUIREMENTS BY OTHERS DIVISION 5 - METALS 05400 Cold-Formed Metal Framing INSTRUCT!ONS TO BIDDERS 05500 Metal Fabrications 05510 Metal Stairs and Ladders 00300 Information Available to Bidders 05712 Ornamental Stairs BID FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC B'( OTHERS iiR1iiii Onllnh {-"'#':l"'r\~n+1"'\1 __ IV...., I '\.VU~II \,JOf fJ'Crl HI Y 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork CONTRACTiNG REQUIREMENTS 06600 Cast Plastic Fabrications 06620 Molded Millwork BY OTHERS DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PROTECTION 01110 Summary of Work 07~~"" Bituminous Dampproofing I IlL 01250 Contract Modification Procedures 07210 Building Insulation 01310 Project Management and Coordination 07240 Exterior Insulation Finish System 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 07411 Metal Roof Panels 01330 Submittal Procedures 07552 Modified Bituminous Membrane 01331 Submittal Transmitta! Form Roofing 10400 Quality Requirements 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls Sheet Metal Warranty 01600 Product Requirements 07720 Roof Accessories 01630 Product Substitution Procedures 07840 Firestopping 01631 Substitution Request Form 07920 Joint Sealants 01700 Execution Requirements 01740 Cleaning 01770 Closeout Procedures DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 01780 Closeout Submittals 01785 Project Record Documents 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 01790 Operation and Maintenance Data 08210 Wood Doors 01795 Warranties and Bonds 08461 Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors 08520 Aluminum Windows 08710 Door Hardware DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION 08810 Glass and Glazing BY OTHERS ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 00010 - VOLUME 1 - 1 OF 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 16100 Basic Methods and Materials 16200 Electrical Service System 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 16300 Electrical Distribution System 09310 Tile 16400 Lighting Fixtures 09510 Acoustical Ceilings 16500 Communications Systems 09620 Specialty Flooring 16530 Addressable Fire Alarm System - 250 09650 Resilient Flooring Point 09680 Carpet 16700 EIActricallv Powered Eauioment 09720 Wall Covering --- ~ -- - - - ,I I , 09775 Reinforced Plastic Panels 09900 Paints and Coatings END OF DOCUMENT DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 Toilet Compartments 10265 Impact-Resistant Wall Protection 10305 Manufactured Fireplaces 10520 Fire Protection Specialties 10810 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10900 Wardrobe and Closet Specialties DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTiON NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15001 Mechanical Alternates 15010 Mechanical General Provisions 15050 Mechanical Basic Materials & Methods 15060 Pipes & Pipe Fittings 15100 Valves 15185 Insulation 15400 Plumbing 15800 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16001 Electrical Alternates 16010 Genera! Provisions 16011 Temporary Power TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010 - VOLUME 1 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DOCUMENT 00300 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS PART 1 - PRODUCTS 1.1 QI=f'Tlfll\l 11\1f'1 III""\I=C' '-'L-'-J I 1'-" ~ II'iVL..VLJL-V A. Information that is made available to Bidders is for reference only, and is not intended to be part of the Contract. 1.2 USE OF INFORMATION PROVIDED A. Bidders are encouraged to obtain a copy of Subsurface Exploration and review information before submitting a Bid, and obtain additional information if Bidder desires. B. Owner will not consider requests for additional compensation for extra Work due to conditions that reasonably could have been anticipated from the information provided. 1.3 INTERPRETATION A. Owner supplied information is provided only for information and convenience to Bidders. Owner and Architect disclaim responsibility for accuracy of information that has been prepared by others. Owner and Architect further disclaim responsibility for interpretation of that information by Bidders. 1.4 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATiON A. A copy of the Subsurface Exploration (Soil Boring Report) cover page is behind this Section. B. Testing Agency's project number: 33872-001-02G C. Date of Survey: June 11, 2004 D. Geotechnical Evaluation Report Prepared By: Universal Engineering Sciences, Inc. 820 Brevard Avenue Rockledge, FL 32955 Telephone: (321) 638-0808 PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF DOCUMENT ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 00300 - 1 OF 2 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY " 280 Watertown Road;. ~_ , . , Long lake, Minnesota 553.56 " ' , ~l,'~ ~.~ " .. '. ." , ",' . .. "." , ..... ' , .. . .." .' , .....' . ' . '.' '~, 0~' .. ''!lIl" *,' 1f1'l/Il; ,5\ ":i," " ., . "'~ '7'" ..' .., .....'. '. .. .~.." . " . . . ". t,' . :~ 0, ,', ' P <.i;JltfeW;< p, ''1c' "-: ~~' " - :( "," . :ilJI ~ 1k :,,' :if"", !:ik 1liI" b1 , .: .V.~ li!Il - ~ ':i1fl~ . ' . ',., t'Jmi""Lis.il~~gin~~.:~ ~. .5?~ ~ If' : . '. '".. ""820BrevardAvenue"',,, . .' i.e. , ~~;'l 'I, .,,\ ,.}.~~~~',!/> ',. ;: ::;: . .,,' ,,' RockledgerFfori~~>~f~6'5" . ' ". '. ...' ':'. ."W (321) 6~8-080~;'YV" ;. " '.' .." '. ,',. , . ':;" .. ", .,' , :' " , . .', ,..;.. '..' . ,'.. " ....:. ' ': ,." .' , " ,", : ' 'w.. " , ~~ M ,~ ~I. ',~ . .. . . .' i ~ .;11 ." ' . ::' .. '.' ,/ '..' : . > .' ....,. ': /.' ..J, .: .".'.. .... , INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 00300 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 IMflRK' fl!= Tl-tl~ ("'flI\ITRA(",T "II' _. '.'10. _. I I II....., "".......,' I t v~."'-' I A. Work of this Project consists of General Construction; including Mechanical and Electrical Work, at Country Inns & Suites, 9009 Astronaut Blvd, Cape Canaveral, Florida, and is summarized by references to Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Specification Sections, Drawings, Addenda, and Modifications to Contract Documents issued subsequent to initial printing of this Project Manual, and including printed material referenced by any of these. B. It is recognized that Work of Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations, natural phenomenon, including weather conditions, and other forces outside Contract Documents. 1.2 CO[\JTPvl\CT ~v1ETHOD A. Owner will award a Stipulated Sum single Prime Contract (AlA Document A101) for total Work of Project. 1.3 COMMENCEMENT OF WORK ^ Neither commence \Nork, nor allow Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors to commence Work until: n. 1. Contract (AlA Document Ai 01) has been fully executed; and OVlner has issued a Notice to Proceed. 2. Owner has approved evidence of Contractor's Liability Insurance, Owner's Protective Liability Insurance, and other required insurance to be purchased by Contractor. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES ^ Include items necessary for proper execution and completion of \rVork. Cover portions of Contract ". Documents and Work necessary to produce intended results. B. Include construction administration and supervision, labor, materials, articles, equipment, incidentals, items, tools, services, supplies, methods, operations, and skills in such quantities as may be necessary to complete Project within intent of Contract Documents. 1.5 C V~LAPPING AND CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Where compliance with 2 or more standards or requirements is indicated, and where overlapping requirements establish different or conflicting levels of quality; the most stringent requirement is intended, and will be enforced unless written approval is granted otherwise by Architect. B. Bidding Stage: Notify Architect in writing of overlapping and conflicting requirements for clarification by Addenda. C. Construction Stage: Refer to Architect[, for resolution of conflicting requirements and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, and receive written clarification from Architect before proceeding with questioned Work. 1.6 USE OF PREMISES A. General: The contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. The contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project. 1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01110- 1 OF 2 SUMMARY OF WORK CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Maintain required building exits necessary for fire and life safety conditions. Review enclosures for temporary exit corridor construction with Architect and local fire and building officials to insure safety and compliance with applicable codes. C. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Obtain written permission from Owner at least 48 hours in advance of such occurrences. Provide and maintain proper shoring and bracing for existing underground utilities and sewers encountered during excavation Work, protect them from collapse or movement, or other types of damage until such time as they are to be removed, incorporated into new Work, or can be properly backfilled upon completion of new Work. 1. Limit such disruptions of services to a maximum of 1 hour. Prior to beginning excavation, contact utility companies for locations of existing underground services. D. Protect pavements, curbs, trees, landscaping, and existing construction during course of Work. Repair or replace parts of same that become damaged. E. Keep vehicles clean to prevent depositing of dirt and debris on public streets or highways. Pay costs levied by public authorities having jurisdiction in connection with cleaning of streets soiled by Work of this Contract. F. Provide and maintain access roads for delivery of materials and services to site. G. Keep driveways and entrances serving site clear and available to Owner and Owner's employees and agents at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. H. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy, and to place and install equipment, in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy does not constitute acceptance of total Work. 1 A Certificate of Substantia! Completion wil! be executed for each specific portion of Work to be ,. occupied prior to Owner occupancy. 2. Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 3. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, make cetiain that mechanical and electrical systems are fully operational, and required inspections and tests have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy, Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systerns in occupied portions of building. 1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections :jil;~itOtr~ 6-division format and CSi "Master Format" numbering system. ",' .... 1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern execution of Work of Sections in Specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION SUMMARY OF WORK 01110-20F2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 I.&~RCH!TECT'S SUPPLE~v1Ef'JTAL Jt-4STRUCTJO~~S (ASI) A. Architect will advise of minor changes in Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions to Contractor on AlA Document G710, Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 1.2 PROPOSAL REQUEST (PR) A. Architect may issue to Contractor a proposal request on AlA Document G709 - Proposal Request, which includes a detailed description of proposed Contract change with supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, a change in Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both for executing change, and period of time during which requested price will be considered valid. B. Respond to proposed change describing full effect of Work. Include a statement describing effect on Contract Sum, Contract Time, and effect on work by separate or other contractors. Include full documentation of how costs were figured, including labor and material cost, overhead, profit, tax, bond costs, and supervisor, and indicate a period of time during which proposed change will be considered valid if different from that required in Proposal Request. 1.3 CONTRACTOR PROPOSED CHANGES (CPC) A. Contractor may propose to Architect, on Contractor's official letterhead, a change in Contract, describing proposed change, and its full effect on Work. B. Include a statement describing reasons for change, effect on Contract Sum or Contract Time or both, with full documentation, including full documentation of how costs were figured, inciuding labor and material cost, overhead, profit, tax, bond costs, and supervisor, and a statement describing effect on work by separate or other contractors. C. ,Ll,rchitect \,A/il! revievJ proposed change vvith OVvner1 and if accepted, Architect will prepare a Change Order and distribute to Contractor and Owner for their acceptance and authorization. 1.4 CHANGE ORDERS (CO) A. ,A.rchitect \^/i!! prepare Change Order and distribute to Contractor and Owner for theii acceptance and authorization. 1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE (CCD) A Architect may issue to Contractor a construction directive, on AlA Document G714 - Construction Change Directive, authorized by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with a change in Work, for subsequent inclusion by a Change Order. B. Document will describe changes in Work, and designate method of determining changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change. C. Architect will prepare Change Order and distribute to Contractor and Owner for Contractor's and Owner's acceptance and authorization. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01250 - 1 OF 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250-20F2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SU~v4~y1,L~\RY A. Section Includes: 1. Project coordination 2. Request for information procedure. 3. Pre-construction/Pre-installation meetings. 4. Coordination meetings. 5. Progress meetings. 1.2 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction operations included in various sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.. ,... Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures "', with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of Work. Such administiative activities include tile following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. D. ConserJation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energYJ water1 and rl1ateriais. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. E. Verify that utility requirements of opeiating equipment are cornpatibie with building utilities. Coordinate Work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. F. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable. Place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. 1. Prepare coordination drawings as outlined in Coordination Drawings Article below. G. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction occurring in finished areas, except as otherwise indicated. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. H. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their "Vork is required. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 0131 0 - 1 OF 4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CAPE CANAVERAL COONTRY INNS & SOlTES NEW FACILITY I. . Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. J. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in compliance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330. B. Staff Names: List of Contractor's principal staff assignments, including Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. 1. Provide emergency phone numbers for key staff members. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific coordination drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Coordinate vVork of trades, ensuring that mechanical systems function properly while not interfering with finish design of spaces. C. Where deemed necessary by Architect and Contractor, or where noted on Drawings, coordination drawings will be required to faciiitate avoidance of conflicts between mechanical tiades and location of finished items. Obtain coordination drawings from mechanical trades and review for accuracy and completeness by prior to fabrication and installation of Work of trades involved. D. Review areas of conflict that involve changes in design with l\rchitect and Owner, and if required, Architect's consulting engineers. Do not make changes in layout of finished items or sizes and shapes of mechanical equipment without approval of Architect or Architect's consulting engineers. 1.5 OPENINGS, BLOCKING, BACKING, AND GROUNDS A. Provide openings, blocking, backing, and grounds in walls and above ceilings necessary for installation of contracted Work as Work progresses 1. Cost incurred for cutting and patching due to lack of adequate openings, blocking, backing, or grounds will be borne by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. B. Make suitable preparations for installation of Work including piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds, and supports that are to be embedded in concrete, masonry, floors, precast concrete, partitions, or structural members, or that are to pass through or be attached thereto. C. Receive and install proper sleeves, boxes, receptacles, or chases for openings or recesses to receive Work occurring in or passing through such members. Locate accurately and secure firmly in place before erecting such masonry, concrete poured, or walls/ceilings enclosed. 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. Requests for Information (RFls) are encouraged as a documented means of communication between Contractor and Architect. Plan, schedule, coordinate, and sequence Work so RFI, if necessary, may be submitted to Architect in a timely manner so as not to delay progress of Work. Transmit submissions of and responses to RFI, with copies to Owner, via facsimile equipment. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-20F4 ISSOED FOR CONSTROCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Limit RFI to 1 specific topic, question, or issue, and if at all possible, limit to 1 or 2 sentences. Submit RFi on a standard form on Contractor's letterhead, sequentially. Include following information on each RFI: 1. RFI number, date of issue, Architect's Project name and job number. Include this information on each separate sheet of attachments, if any (sketches, Sub-contractor documentation, supporting information, etc.). 2. Text regarding RFI. 3. indication if the topic in question may have a possible impact on Contiact Sum or Contract Time. 4. Space for a hand-printed response (1/3 to 1/2 of the page). 5. Space for respondent signature and date. 6. Architect will have same time period to respond to an RFI as Shop Drawing review period. 7. No damages for delay due to RFI response beyond allotted time will be allowed, unless Contractor can show that RFI was not foreseeable with proper planning, scheduling, coordination, and sequencing, and that Architect's late response delayed timely purchase or delivery of equipment or materials, or limited construction personnel from proceeding with their task(s) within previously listed "Progress Schedule" activity period(s). 8. When Architect is required to respond to an RFI that requires Architect to redesign or re- engineer an aspect of \^Jork due to a desire of Contractor for an alteinate means of construction, or to allow a deviation from Work due to Contractor error, reimburse Architect. Also reimburse Architect for time spent in obtaining approvals from regulatory agencies for the change. 1.7 PRE-CONSTRUCTION/PRE-INST ALLA TION MEETINGS A. Architect wii! schedule a pre-construction meeting to be held within 15 days after Owner has issued the Notice to Proceed. Meeting agenda \Nill include a review of responsibilities and personnel assignments, rules and regulations specific to site, and general coordination procedures. B. Attendance Required: Owner Representative, Architect and Contractor and Contractor's Superintendent, major Subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, and other concerned parties. r- Tentative Agenda: v. 1. Organ izational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of Subcontractors, materials suppliers, and Architect. 2. Channels and procedures for communications. ~ Construction schedule, including sequence of critical Work. v. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original Documents and revisions. 6. Processing of Shop Drawings, and other data submitted to Architect for review. 7. Use of premises, equipment deliveries, and priorities. 8. Processing of field decisions, ASl's, RFI's, and Change Orders. 9. Rules and regulations governing performance of Work. 10. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related matters. 1.8 COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct Project coordination meetings, in addition to specific meetings, at regularly scheduled times convenient for parties involved. B. Request representation at each meeting by every party currently involved in coordination or planning for the construction activities involved. C. Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance, and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01310-30F4 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION NEW FACILITY 1.9 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals for duration of Project. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within 3 days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made. C. Attendance Required: Contractor's Superintendent, Major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner's Representative, Architect, Independent Laboratory representative and as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Tentative Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, issues, and decisions. 4. Identification of issues that impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding Work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and Work standards. 1.10 PRE-INST ALLA TION MEETINGS A. 'vVhen required in individual Specification Sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at Work site prior to commencing Work of Section. 8. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, Work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect and affected parties a minimum of 4 days in advance of meeting date, unless specified in individual Specification Sections. D. Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies 'v'v'ithin 2 days after conference to participants. Submit 2 copies to Architect. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-40F4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01320 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for documenting progress of construction during performance of Work, including the following: a. Contractor's Construction Schedule. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Daily construction reports. d. Field condition reports. e. Construction photographs. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Critical Path: Longest continuous chain of activities through network schedule that establishes minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. B. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time belongs to the owner. C. Fragment: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. D. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit 3 copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of Subcontractor. 5. Description of Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two printed copies of initial schedule, one a reproducible print and one a blue- or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three printed copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float. 1. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of activities sorted in ascending order of total float. D. Daiiy Construction Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals. E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01320-10F4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, l""\_L.._...J..I_ _L \/_1..__ __..J 0l,;IIt:UUIt: UI v ClI ut:::> , ClIIU Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit concurrently with first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL ^ T:.........,.. 1::'....................... 1::',.................,..1 ,...,....1-......,..1, .1..... +""""I'V'O r1_of._ ru.....,...hfil""h........... +_r- ",,__'.u"Y'\l'""\n,...r\t""Y"\l""\nt ",t UU"\I"'L-- fl"'\ ri.-:-.r.tn 1""\+ M. 1IIIIt; rldlllt;. CAlC;IIU ~\"'IIC;UUIC II VIII UQlC C"laUII~IIOU IVI \JVIIIIII'Vllvvlll"VIIL VI VVVI f\. l.V UOL'I;:;i VI substantial Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01330 Submittal Procedures in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 10 days for startup and testing. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of SubstantialCompletionu 5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work. C. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragments to demonstrate effect of proposed change on overall Project schedule. 1. ')':1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) "'-.<oJ A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for remainder of Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis -I:.... ____........... Ulct8lctlll. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of work. 2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 3. Use "1 workday" as unit of time. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of activities required to complete Work. Using preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Purchase of materials. c. Delivery. d. Fabrication. e. Installation. 2. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce CPM schedule within limitations of Contract Time. 3. Format: Mark critical path. Locate critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports shovJing the foiiovJlng: 1. Contractor or Subcontractor and Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Ear!y and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. n ^. ......____ _:__ .....L ...__I..t:____ ::1. !-\Vt:f dY~ ~!L~ V! WU! K!Un;e. F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording events at Project site, including the following: 1. List of Subcontractors. 2. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 3. Accidents. 4. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 5. Meter rerlrlinns rlnrl similrJr n::;r.nrrlinn<: ------- . ----.....;;.J- _n._ --.-p._- '--~'-"'v-' 6. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01320-30F4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 7. Services connected and disconnected. 8. Equipment or system tests and startups. B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include detailed description of differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing Contract Documents. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. ~ Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary fieid offices. I. ,., When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to same parties and post in same L... locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01320 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 101 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Section Includes: 1. Project start-up submittals. 2. Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Sample submittals. 3. Quality assurance submittals. 4. Contract closeout submittals. 5. Procedure for submitting, reviewing, and resubmitting. 1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE (PROJECT START-UP) SUBMITTALS A. Construction Schedule: Prepare and submit initial Construction Schedule in duplicate within [7] days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement for Architect's review and approval. Submit schedule detailed enough to address Work activities, estimated duration of activities, and activities' interrelationships with other Work activities. 1. Obtain Construction Schedule approval prior to initial Application for Payment, or payment will be withheld until process has been completed. 2. !nitial Submittal: Submit Construction Schedule in both critical path method (CPtv1) and horizontal bar chart form and activity listing with a separate line for each activity of Work, identifying first Work day of each week. a. completion date. 3. Updates: Submit 2 copies of revised Construction Schedule with each Application for Payment. Identify' changes since previous submittal. a. Submit 1 set of computer data disks that include the same information if requested by Architect. b. Distribute copies of revised schedules to affected parties. c. Issuance of a Certificate for Payment is conditioned upon receipt of an updated Construction Schedule with each Application for Payrnent. 4. Compliance will be monitored and enforced by review of Construction Schedule. Unless otherwise indicated, failure to comply with Construction Schedule requirements is subject to reduction in amounts certified on subsequent Applications for Payment. 8. Submittal Schedule: Provide a Submittal Schedule for Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples to Architect coordinated with Construction Schedule for submittals and Architect's review period. 1. Coordinate submittals of related items. 2. Updates: Submit a revised Submittal Schedule when changes occur and identify those changes since previous Submittal Schedule. C. Schedule of Values: Submittal as defined in General Conditions of Contract and this Section required before first Application for Payment. 1 . Submit Schedule of Values on AlA Form G703. Contractor's standard computerized forms wii! be considered on request. 2. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with Specification Section number and title. a. Provide separate line item for labor and materials for each work category. b. On separate line items identify Contractor's fee, general conditions, permits, and contingency. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01330 - 1 OF 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES NEW FACILITY 3. Updates: Submit revised Schedule of Values with each Application for Payment. Identify changes since previous submittal. a. Applications for Payment will not be processed until Schedule of Values has been reviewed and accepted. b. Revise Schedule of Values to list executed Change Orders. Keep Change Order amounts on a separate line item until completion of Change Order Work. c. At application for final payment, distribute executed Change Order amounts into appropriate line items. D. Application for Payment: As defined in General Conditions of the Contract and Section 01290. E. Cash Flow Projection Schedule: Submit Cash Flow Projection Schedule to forecast cash flow requirements in form acceptable to Owner. 1. Prepare Cash Flow Projection Schedule to comply with Construction Schedule. 2. Update as appropriate and as requested by Owner. F. Subcontractors and Materials List: Submit Subcontractors and Materials list. 1. Include only products included in original Bidding Documents, Addenda, and other Modifications. 2. Subcontractors: Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of indicating by specification section number Work to be performed by each. 3. Material Suppliers: Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers, indicating by specification section number Work to be performed by each. 4. Provide identification of materials and equipment by brand and model including. a. items proposed in compliance \^/ith specified reference standards. b. Items proposed in compliance with descriptive specifications where a specific proprietary product is not indicated. c. Items proposed in compliance with proprietary specifications. 5. Do not include proposed substitutions with Materials list. Comply with requirements outlined in Section 01630. 1.3 PRODUCT DATA, SHOP DRAWINGS, AND SAMPLE SUBMITTl-\LS A. Product Data: Submit not less than the following information. 1. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction, and fabrication. 2. Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent products or models. 3. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 4. Show dimensions and clearances required. 5. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information that is not applicable to this Project. 6. Types and quantities of submittals: B. Shop Drawings: Submit not less than the following information in a clear and thorough manner. Do not reproduce Contract Documents for use as Shop Drawings. 1. Identify details by reference to sheet and detail, schedule, or room numbers indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Clearly show how product is to be incorporated into Project through Drawings, such as elevations, plans, sections, and details. C. Samples: Submit not less than the following information. 1. Submit colors, textures, and patterns for selection. 2. Submit Samples to illustrate functional characteristics of product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing Work. 3. Include identification on each Sample, giving full information. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-20F5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS A. Submit per Section 01400. 1. Statement of Qualification: Submittal required to indicate experience or other evidence of qualification as defined in Contract Documents. 2. Statement of Compliance: Submittal to indicate a product complies with Contract Documents. 3. Professional Certification: Submittal required to document professional certification of portions of Work required by Contract Documents. B. Source Quality Control: Tests and certifications as described in Source Quality Control Article in Part 2 of Specification Sections. 1. Material Qualification Test: Submittal required directly from testing lab to indicate a proposed material complies with Contract Document requirements. 2. Field Quality Control: Tests and certifications as described in Field Quality Control Article in Part 3 of Specification Sections within Contract Documents. 3. Soils Engineer Certification: Submittal required from Soils Engineer or Soils Engineer's authorized technician indicating confirmation of required inspection and observed required by the Contract Documents. 1.5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMiTTALS A. Submit per Section 01780. 1.6 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTING ,6..\0 TimeHne for Submittals: Transmit submittals vvithin time frame to prevent delay in construction activities or compromise review process. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Administrative (Project Start-up) Submittals: Submit not rnore than 30 days after Award of Contract. a. Schedule of Values: Submit not less than 30 days before first application of payment. b. Progress Reports: Submit within 10 days after date of Owner/Contractor Agreement. 2. Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Sample Submittals: Submit prim to starting fabrication and per Submittal Schedule. 3. Quality Control Submittals: Make submittals promptly to not cause construction delay. S, Transmittal: Accompany submittals \^Jith a completed Submittal Transmittal Form. Sample form is attached as an Appendix at end of this Section. C. Failure to comply may result in return of submittal without review. D. Number of Submittal Copies Required (reproducible by plain paper copier). Submit number of copies as specified herein unless indicated otherwise in other Specifications Sections. 1. Product Data: 4 copies, unless reviewer will be unable to photo copy this submittal, submit total of 7 copies. 2. Shop Drawings: One reproducible transparency in mailing tube (to be returned to Contractor), plus 4copies opaque reproductions. 3. Samples: 2 of each type of Sample. 4. Quality Control: 4 copies of each document required by Section 01400. E. Locate the following information on each submittal where practical and on accompanying transmittal. 1. Date of submission and dates of previous submissions. 2. Project title. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of Contractor, supplier, manufacturer. 5. Identification of products with reference to Specification Section number, including Materiall.D. Code or paragraph number. 6, Reference to Drawing numbers. 7. Field dimensions required for communicating Design Intent. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01330 - 3 OF 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SLJlTES NEW FACIUTY 8. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work. 9. Applicable standards. 10. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 12. 4 inch by 5 inch blank space for Contractor's and Architect's stamps. 13. Contractor's stamp, Subcontractor's stamp as applicable, initialed or signed, certifying prior review of submittal, verification of products, field measurements, field construction criteria, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract Documents. a. Submittals not signed and dated by Contractor will be returned without review. F. Provide submittals for each portion of Work that are complete and accurate. Incomplete or partial submittals will be rejected and will require resubmittal. 1. Submittals may be made of portions of Work, but make certain that each submittal is complete in respect to information necessary for proper review by Architect and Architect's consultants. 2. Combine submittals to ensure "design intent" of system assembly. 3. Cross out non-related material to submittal. G. Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, and Quality Control Submittals: 1. Determine and verify: a. Field measurements. b. Field construction criteria. c. Catalog numbers and similar data. d. Conformance with Contract Documents. e. Coordination \^lith other \lvork. 2. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work, Construction Schedule, and Contract Documents. 3. Notify Architect in writing, at time of submittal, of deviations in submittals from requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.7 PROCEDURE FOR REVIEWING A. General: Make submittals far enough in advance of dates scheduled for installation to provide time required for reviews; for possible revisions and resubrnittals; and for placing orders and securing delivery. B. Architect's Review Time: In scheduling, allow at least 14 calendar days for review by Architect following Architect's receipt of the submittal or as otherwise may be required under each Specification Section. Allow an additional 10 days for reviews involving Architect's consultants, or as otherwise may be required under each Specification Section. C. Submittals will be reviewed by Architect with the following actions: 1. "No Exception Taken" indicates submittal conforms to "design intent" of Work. Contractor, at Contractor's discretion, may proceed with fabrication, procurement, and installation. 2. "Make Corrections Noted, No Resubrnission Required" indicates submittal, after indicated corrections are made, would conform to "design intent" of Work. Contractor, at Contractor's discretion, may proceed with fabrication, procurement, and installation. 3. "Make Corrections Noted, Submit Corrected Copy" indicates the noted revisions are such that a corrected copy is required for review to confirm the revisions have been understood and made. Contractor, at Contractor's discretion, may proceed with fabrication, procurement, and installation. Contractor is responsible for correctly interpreting and implementing revisions. 4. "Rejected, Revise, and Resubmit" and "Rejected, Submit Specified Item" indicates submittal does not conform to "design intent". Resubmittal is required. 5. "Resubmit with Related Assembly Items" requests submittal of related items for an assembly to permit a coordinated review. Review will not start until related items are submitted. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 6. "No Action Required" indicates Contractor may proceed without review of submittal by Arcilitect based on provisions of Contract Documents. This does not relieve Contractor of requirements of Contract Documents. D. Review by Architect of submittals is not an authorization for Change Order. Follow procedures described elsewhere in Contract Documents for Items requiring Change Order. 1.8 PROCEDURE FOR RESUBMITTING A. Make corrections or changes in submittals required by Architect and resubmit when Architect's stamp requires resubmittal. B. Resubmittal Review Fees: If Architect rejects (Rejected, Revise and Resubmit) Contractor's submittal more than 2 times for same Specification Section, Architect will be compensated for additional reviews. 1. Amount of such compensation will be incorporated by Change Order and deducted from Contractor's Application for Payment. C. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for initial submittal. A Clearly identify changes made other than those requested by Architect by "clouding" or other I. suitable means acceptable to Architect. Only changes that are "clouded" and changes requested by Architect will be reviewed on a resubmittal. Architect is not responsible for reviewing resubmittals that are not "clouded" on resubmittal. D. Samples: Submit new Samples as required for initial submittal. E. Contractor is responsible for delays caused by resubmittal process. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01330-50F5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY (Insert Contractor's Letterhead here) SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM TO: Weber Architects & Planners 2280 Watertown Road Long Lake, MN 55356 PROJECT Cape Canaveral Country Inns & Suites New Facility 9009 Astronaut Boulevard Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 Project No.: NA Date: Attached is the following submittal for your review as required by the Contract Documents. 1. We understand a separate transmittal form is required for each Specification Section for which a submittal is required. 2. If a submittal contains material not applicable for review, delete text that is not applicable before submission. 3. We further understand that submittals not dated and signed per Contract Documents will be returned without a review and must be resubmitted. PRODUCT DATA, QUALITY CONTROL, CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Submit number of copies per Section 01330 and the following: If reviewer will be unable to photo copy this submittal, submit total of 7 copies. Section Number and Title: Article and Paragraph: Description of Item: Manufacturer's Name: Supplier's Name: Date: SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTAL Submitted reproducible transparencies and opaque reproductions per Section 01330 and the following: Section Number and Title: Article and Paragraph: Description of Item: ~_ Manufacturer's Name: Supplier's Name: Date: SAMPLES Submit Samples per Section 01330 and the following: Section Number and Title: Article and Paragraph: Description of Item: Manufacturer's Name: Supplier's Name: Date: Submitted by: Subcontractor's signature and date: Contractor's signature and date: ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01331-10F1 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUl'vlMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Provisions of this Section do not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and-control services required by Architect, Owner or authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into Work and completed construction comply vlith requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at source, which is, plant, mill, factory, or shop. E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of Work and for completed Work. F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean same as testing agency. G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter", must perform certain construction activities. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of corresponding generic name. H. Conventional Testing and Inspection: Work herein described as those items not specifically required by the Florida Building Code but are considered essential to proper performance of building systems. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01400 - 1 OF 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS NEW FACILITY I. Special Structural Testing and Inspection: Work herein described includes items required by the Florida Building Code and other items, which in professional judgment of Structural Engineer, are critical to integrity of building structure. 1.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by design professional are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. S. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: Quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be minimum provided or performed. Actual installation may comply exactly with minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. ., h SUB~y1iTTi\.LS I.V ^ Comply \Nith Section 0-1330. r\. B. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Articie to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. C. Manufacturer's Factory Authorized Service Representative: 1. Submit qualifications of manufacturer's factory authorized service representative to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer is subject to approval of Architect. 2. Submit report in duplicate for Architect's review within 30 days of observation. D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. ~ Identification of applicable standards. v. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reporis that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records. submit conies of nermits lir.AnsAs . t r -.....--, ".--"---J certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling Work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose Work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. ,.... Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to u. those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer vvho is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Testing Agency Quaiifications: An agency with experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by Work that failed to comply with Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-contra! services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at feast 24 hours in advance of time \A/hen \^/ork that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01400 - 3 OF 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS NEW FACILITY 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. r' Special Tests and Inspections: Owner wi!! engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and v. inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. ,.. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected \^Jork. ;). D. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's Authorized Field Services: Where specified in individual Specification Sections, engage factory authorized service representative to observe site conditions, inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections, quality of \^Jorkmanship, start-up of equipment, testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 2. Submit report to Architect of observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers. \^/ritten instructions. E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and ContiactOi promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of Work. 5. Do not perform duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of per sonne!. Provide the following: 1. Access to Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 -4 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of work. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of Work where tests and inspections are required. 2. Partial List of Specification Sections requiring Conventional Inspections and Tests: a. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. b. Section 03415 - Precast Concrete Hollow Core Plank. c. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies. d. Section 05120 - Structural Steel. e. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. f. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications. g. Section 05510 - Metal Stairs and Ladders. h. Section 07840 - Firestopping. I. Coord ination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1 Q SPECIAL TESTS A~~D 1~~SPECTIOt~S I.V A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage qualified testing agency and, where required by Contract Documents, special inspector, to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as responsibility of Owner, and as follows: B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified agency and, where required by Contract Documents, special inspector, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1. Notifying i\rchitect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in Work during performance of its services. " Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service ,. to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Submitting final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report vvhether tested and inspected Work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Retesting and re-inspecting corrected Work. 1.9 SPECIAL STRUCTURAL TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Complete the Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule, included at end of this Section, signed by involved parties. Completed schedule is an element of Construction Documents and after permit issuance, becomes part of building department's approved Drawings and Specifications. Completed schedule includes the following: 1. Specific listing of items requiring testing and inspection. 2. Relevant Specification Sections and articles that define applicable standards by which to judge conformance with approved Drawings and Specifications per Florida Building Code This may include degree or basis of testing and inspection; that is, intermittent, will-call, or full time/continuous. 3. Frequency of reporting. 4. Parties responsible for performing testing and inspection VVork. 5. Required acknowledgments by each designated party. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01400 - 5 OF 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY TNNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Exception: Building Official may waive requirements for employment of special inspector if construction is of a minor nature. C. See attached "Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule". 1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. General: Throughout Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards that establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and methods for testing and reporting on pertinent characteristics. 1. Provide materials and workmanship that meet or exceed specifically named code or standard. 2. Deliver to Architect required.. proof that materials, workmanship, or both, meet or exceed requirements of specifically named code or standard. Submit proof in form requested by Architect that will generally be required to be copies of certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency acceptable for that purpose to Architect. 3. Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into Work that fail to meet such minimum requirements as non-complying. 4. Specific naming of codes or standards occurs on Drawings and in other Sections of these Specifications. Comply with laws, ordinances, and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit proofs of compliance that are signed by respective authorities having jurisdiction. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Requirements for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Disabled People. c. Itll.ppiicabie Reference Standards: 1. Standards referenced in Specifications are usually referred to by abbreviation of organization's name and designation of the document (for example, ASTM A36). Documents in common use may be referred to by their o'vvn designation (for example, f'~ational Electrical Code is published by National Fire Protection Association as NFPA-70 but is referred to as NEC and is part of a series of documents or standards referred to as the National Fire Code). " References am to latest issue of publication available on date stipulated for receipt of Bids L. unless indicted otherwise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 6 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY Special Structural Testing and Inspection Schedule Project Name: Cape Canaveral Country Inns & Suites Location: 9009 Astronaut Boulevard; Cape Canaveral, FL 32920 Permit Number: ~nA,.i:l1 ~trllrh".:l1 Tactinn :Inn Incnarti",n -F"".....-.-. -.. --..-.-. . -_....~ _'1- 111_t"__"._I. Specification Description (2) Type of Report Assigned Section Article Inspector (3) Frequency Firm (4) !k)31 00 Formwork Inspection SI-S Each Pour !0321 0 Concrete Reinforcement SI-S Each Pour k)3300 CIP Concrete Testinq SI-T Each Pour 03300 CIP Concrete Insp. SI-S Each Pour 03415 Precast Concrete SI-T Each Visit 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies SI-T Each Visit 05120 Structural Metal Framina SI-T Each Vi~it I II II I ~ I 1---- Notes: Fill out this schedule when applying for building permit. (1 ) Permit No. Provide to Building Official. f?\ Use descriptions per applicable building code. \#;...J (3) Special Inspector - Technical, Special Inspector - Structural. (4) Firm contracted to perform services. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: Each appropriate representative shall sign below: Owner: Firm: Date: Contractor: Firm: Date: Architect: Firm: Date: SER: Firm: Date: TA: Firm: Date: SI-T: Firm: Date: 81-8: Firm: Date: F: Firm: Date: Identify individual names of prospective special inspectors and Work they intend to observe. (Use reverse side of form if more room is needed.) Legend: SER = Structural Engineer of Record TA = Testing Agency F = Fabricator SI-T = Special Inspector - Structural SI-S = Special Inspector - Technical Accepted for the Building Department by: Date: ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01400 - 7 OF 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURl'.,NCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, but not limited to: 1. Building Code Requirements. 2. Health and Safety Regulations. 3. Utility Company Regulations. 4. Police Department, Fire Department, and Rescue Squad Rules. 5. Environmental Protection Regulations. 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI- A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library, "Temporary Electrical Facilities". 1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Service", prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electricai service. instal! service in compliance \;vith t'Jational Electric Code (~~FPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary' utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporar; Utilities: Coordinate dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility with Owner. At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on site. C. Environmental Requirements: Provide and maintain heat, fuel, materials, and services necessary to protect Work and materials against injury from extreme heat, cold, dry winds, dust, or dampness as follows: 1. During performance of Work, provide sufficient heat to ensure heating of spaces meets requirements of individual Specification Sections. ') Suspend operations on Work when subject to damage by climatic conditions, flooding, or L. because of insufficient curing or drying of surfaces or materials. 3. Take necessary action to protect site and Work from wind, flood, and storm damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials and equipment. If acceptable to Architect, undamaged previously used materials equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 1. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01500-10F6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS NEW FACILITY 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- 120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot light, for connection of power tools and equipment. B. Electrical Power Cords: Grounded extension cords. Use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. C. Lamps and Light Fixtures: General service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. D. Heating Units: Temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to type of fuel being consumed. E. Temporary Offices: Prefabricated or mobile units, or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. F. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single occupant toilet units of chemical, aerated re- circulation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar non-absorbent material. G. First Aid Supplies: Comply with local and governing regulations. u Fire Extinguishers: Hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ~!,11,," fire extinguishers for temporary II. offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried portable, UL rated, Class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for exposures. L Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classifications, extinguishing agent and size required by location and class of fire exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate facilities where they serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary services, or connect to existing services. Where utility company provides only part of service, provide remainder with matching, compatible materials and equipment, complying with utility company's recommendations. 1. Arrange with utility company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services. 2. Provide adequate capacity for each stage of construction. Prior to temporary utility availability, provide trucked-in services. 3. Use Charges: Pay for Use Charges. Cost of use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect, and will not be accepted as a basis of claims for a Change Order. 8. W~tF!r SF!rvir.F!' In~t~1I w~tF!r ~F!rvir.F! FInd distrihution DiDino of sizes and Dressures adeouate for ------ ~_. ----- ----~-.-. -"----. --- ---- --...- ----,,-----."-.- l'-'I-"'~ ',' ", .." "." -" I construction until permanent water service is in use. 1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Contractor may connect to Owner's existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Provide and pay for weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. 1. Include meters, transformers, overload protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and rnain distribution switchgear. Except where overhead service must be used, install electric power service underground. 3.4 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Wherever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without operating entire system, and that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. B. Provide and maintain adequate lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain adequate lighting to interior Work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps. c ~v1aintain lighting and provide routine repairs. L. 3.5 TEMPORARY HEATING AND COOLING A. Provide and pay for cost of energy for temporary heating or cooling devices. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat per exterior enclosures in this Section. B. Clean filters, ducts, and motors as required to restore building equipment to operational condition equal to condition prior to use for temporary heating. 3.6 TI=I\APflRll.RV \/I=I\ITII ll.Tlfll\l I L-IVII ........... 'OJ" '\. I V L..-I'I I 1'-Fl.1 1"-"''1: A. Ventilate enciosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide and pay cost of energy for temporary ventilation devices. Enclose building prior to activating temporary ventilation per exterior enclosures in this Section. C. Upon completion of Project, return existing ventilation system to operating conditions equal to pre- construction conditions. Clean ducts, fans, and terminals as necessary. 3.7 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary Offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class ABC dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA recommended classes for fire exposures in sufficient quantity to comply with applicable safety regulations. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classifications, extinguishing agents, and sizes required by location and class of fire exposure. B. Provide fire and smoke alarms as required by Owner's insurance policy. Connect to a central station. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01500-30F6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A Contractor, Subcontractors, and employees under their jurisdiction, will be responsible for damages to roofing, flashing, and roof structure while performing Work on roof. B. Carefully supervise Work to prevent injury to trees and plants that are to remain on property, and replace trees and plants that are damaged or destroyed due to construction operations. ^ Provide construction aids and equipment required by personnel and to facilitate execution of Work. v. Provide staging, runways, platforms, railings, trash containers, and other such equipment. 3.9 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE, FACSIMILE, AND COMPUTERS A Provide, maintain, and pay for secure telephone with voice mail system, and facsimile service to field office at time of Project mobilization. Maintain systems until time for Substantial Completion. B. Provide at least 1 dedicated Internet computer connection at site office. 1. Establish an email account for key personnel. 2. Establish a project management site online for Project. 3.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A Plumbing contractor may connect to existing building water source required for construction operations. B. Provide and pay for cost of temporary water service. C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing at areas where required. D. Drinking vVater: Provide containerized, tap-dispenser bottled, water type drinking water units, including paper supply. 3.11 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACiliTIES A Provide, maintain, and pay for temporary sanitary facilities, including temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water fixtures. B. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. C. Install where facilities will best serve Project's needs. D. Existing building permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. 3.12 FIRST AID A Provide complete first aid kit and supplies for emergency purposes, and have a qualified person on staff capable of rendering basic first aid requirements. 3.13 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Elevators, Hoists, and Cranes: 1. Construction Elevators, Hoists, and Cranes: A temporary elevator or material hoist for new structure will not be provided in this Contract. B. Scaffolding and Platforms: Provide and maintain scaffolding and platforms. Coordinate placement and scheduling of equipment as required to expedite Work. C. Temporary Stairs and Ladders: Provide and maintain necessary temporary stairs and ladders to facilitate conveyance of workers, materials, tools, and equipment for proper execution of 'Nork. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY Provide protection and safety stair and ladder devices as it relates to safe conduct of Work per OSHA rAf"'Illir~mAntc: ~nrt rarll d'!:1tif'\nc . -"1........ -.. --- ........ -..- 1_:::;....."..-'1..._' ".... 3.14 TEMPORARY BARRIERS A. Provide temporary barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage by construction operations and demolition. B. Provide protection for existing plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life with new materials. C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, and existing structures from damage. 3.15 TEMPORARY BARRICADES A. Provide protection and safety barricades, devices, covers, etc. as it relates to safe conduct of Work per OSHA requirements and regulations. 3.16 TEMPORARY FENCES A. Construction Limits: Minimum 6 foot high temporary chain link fence, new or used, commercial grade, with line posts at 8 foot on center maximum. B. Provide a fence around construction site to separate construction operations from public functions. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. C. Complete!y remove fencing and gates from site on date of Substantial Completion, unless Architect directs otherwise. ~17 ROADS, PARKI~~G, A~~D TRAFFIC COt~TROL v.I' ^ Maintain site access mads within construction limits including areas to receive hoists and cranes, M. scaffolds, platforms, etc. Inclement weather may require additional grading, fill, rock base, or other measures. 8. Provide temporary' traffic control at junction of temporary roads with public roads, inciuding warning signs for public traffic and STOP signs at access to public roads. 3.18 EXTERiOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary, insulated, weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual Specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. 1. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 3.19 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious and toxic substances and pollutants produced by construction operations. 3.20 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Grade site to drain and maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment, if necessary. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. C. See aiso site and off site protection requirement of Division 2. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01500-50F6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.21 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate Work areas to minimize damage. 1. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, ceilings, and soffits of openings. 2. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects by protecting with durable sheet materials. 3. Prohibit traffic or storage on waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 4. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 3.22 FIELD OFFICES AND STORAGE SHEDS A. Field Offices: Provide, maintain, and pay for a weather-tight field office, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table. ~ Provide space for Project meetings, vv'ith table and chairs to accommodate a minimum of [10] I. persons. 2. Locate field office as approved at Pre-Construction Meeting. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds, sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open sneiters or fuBy enclosed spaces. 1. Locate storage sheds and storage aieas as agreed upon at Pre-Construction Meeting. " '"l" CONSTRUCTION SIGNS v.Lv A. Architect's Sign: Install sign furnished by Architect listing Architect's company name, address, and telephone number. Erect sign on site at location as directed by Architect. B. Safety Signs: Provide and maintain temporary warning signs and other temporary signs required for safe and proper execution of Work. 1. Except for "Safety Signs" which may be required by authorities having jurisdiction, do not install billboards, advertisements, or other similar signs unless approved by Owner. C. No other signs are allowed on site without Owner permission, except those required by law. 3.24 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY UTILITIES, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary Work. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SU~i!!\4ARY A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions of products. 2. Basic product requirements. 3. Product options. 4. Hazardous materials prohibition. 5. Product transportation and handling requirements. 6. Product storage and protection requirements. 7. Integrity of fire, sound, and weatherproof assemblies. 1.2 GENERAL A. Material and Equipment Incorporated into Work: 1. Conform to applicable Specification Section and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: ~ Design, fabricate, and assemble per industry standard engineering and shop practices. I. 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges for interchangeability. 3. Provide 2 or more items of same kind that are identical and by same manufacturer. C. Provide supplementary materials not specifically described in each Section, but required for a complete and proper installation of Work, that new, first quality of their respective kinds, and subject to review and acceptance by Architect. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ^ Products: !tems purchased for incorporation into vVork, whether purchased for Project or taken from J-\. previously purchased stock. 1. This includes terms material, equipment, systems, machinery, components, fixtures, and terms of similar intent for incorporation into Work. 2. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, and erection of Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. 3. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of Contract Documents. B. Materials: Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of Work. C. Equipment: Products with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Include within Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure full protection of materials and Work. 8. Source Limitations: Provide products of same kind, from a single source, to fullest extent possible. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01600 - 1 OF 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS NEW FACILITY C. Compatibility of Options: When Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on Project, select products compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. Provide the following information required on nameplate and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial numbers. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. E. Prior to requesting final testing, adjusting, and balancing, use adequate means to assure that Work is completed per specified requirements and is ready for requested testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.5 BASIC PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by Contract Documents. B. Provide interchangeable components of same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Prorlllr.t~ Snf~r.ifip.rl hv Rp.fp.rP.ncp. Standards or Descriotion Onlv: Products meetina those standards . .------ -r---'--- -J ----------- -----.-------- -- - -----1-..-- -- ..I ...., or descriptions. B. Products Specified by Naming 1 or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting Specifications only with no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming 1 or More Manufacturers With a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a Substitution Request Form, Section 01631, for manufacturers not named. 1.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROHIBITION A. The use of asbestos or asbestos-containing products is prohibited in Work of this Project or in tools, devices, clothing, or equipment used to affect this construction. 1. Asbestos and asbestos-containing products include items containing chrysotile, crocidolite, amosite, anthophylite, tremolite, and actinolite. 2. Material containing greater than 0.01 percent asbestos is defined as asbestos-containing material. 3. Disputes involving the question of whether or not material installed with asbestos-containing products will be settled by electron microscope. Pay costs of such tests. 4. Architect will immediately reject Work or materials found to contain asbestos, or Work or material installed with asbestos-containing products. Remove rejected Work from Project site at no additional cost to Owner. S. The use of wood preservatives containing inorganic arsenals, creosote, and pentachlorophenol are strictly prohibited unless precautionary labeling approved by Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) per the September 30, 1985 Settlement Agreement with the Wood Industry Consortium is affixed and precautions labeled are foliowed exactly. After sawing and working with treated wood, collect and dispose sawdust and debris off Project site in a manner approved by EPA. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600-20F5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Materials installed in this Work that have been prohibited by this Section, or materials installed using installation procedures prohibited by this Section, are deemed to be "Defective" and "Non- Conforming" as defined in General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AlA Document A201 _ 1997 edition. 1.8 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Product Substitution Procedures: Refer to Section 01630. 1.9 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Refer to Section 01110 - Summary of Work. 1.10 PRODUCT TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products per manufacturers' written instructions. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. D. Arrange deliveries of products per construction schedules and in ample time to facilitate inspection before installation. E Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site, taking into consideration: i. \i\inril' nf {-"nntr"=lJ"'trw' I"\r {~'\A/n~r y y...... n. '""I ,",VIIt,1 UVI.VI VI ,"-"VYIIV'I. 2. Limitations of Storage Space 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. F. Deliver products in undamaged condition in original containers or packaging, and with identifying labels intact and legible. G. Clearly mark partial deliveries of component parts of equipment to identify the equipment, to permit easy accumulation of parts, and to facilitate assembly. H. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipment to ensure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact and labels are legible. 4. Products are undamaged and properly protected. I. Architect reserves the right to observe delivered materials, to review accompanying bills of lading, and to reject the following: 1. Materials not identifiable as accepted products of accepted manufacturer. 2. Materials exhibiting shelf lives in excess of those stipulated by the manufacturer. 3. Materials not bearing the appropriate label of Underwriters laboratories (UL), where applicable. 4. Materials in opened or excessively damaged containers. 5. Materials exhibiting evidence of moisture, organic matter, or other adulterants. J. In the event of damage or rejection by Architect for stipulated cause, immediately make repairs and replacements necessary to acceptance of Architect and at no additional cost to Owner. 1.11 PRODUCT STORAGE AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Store and protect products per manufacturers' written instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01600 - 3 OF 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. C. Provide secure off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. Provide Architect with complete inventory of off-site stored items, and provide certificate of insurance for stored items. D. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation. E. Store loose, granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. F. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. G. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. 1.12 INTEGRITY OF FIRE, SOUND, AND WEATHERPROOF ASSEMBLIES A. Sea!, grout, fill, or otherwise protect spaces formed between fire or sound rated wall, floor, ceiling, or roof assemblies or penetrations through such assemblies by pipe, conduit, ductwork, other items, or voids provided for possible use of items in a manner to maintain fire or sound ratings. See Section 07840 - Firestopping. B. Where openings or penetrations are subject to moisture or weather, seal openings and penetrations with non-shrink grouts and e!astomeric sealants intended for specific application 1- Sea! floor penetrations during construction to prevent water from flowing through building. '} Where safing and batt insulation are used, protect from moisture. Remove damp material and L:... install new material before enclosing. C. Sound Control: Maintain sound ratings through partitions that have a designed STC rating. General construction practices include requirements specified herein. 1. Oversize pipe openings to allow approximately 1 inch air space around pipes. Pack openings to comply with systems specified under Section 07840. a. Do not use solid shims. 2. Pull, junction, and outlet boxes in corridors or area separation (party) walls: Separate boxes opening on opposite sides of wall by not less than 8 inches in concrete walls, 16 inches in masonry walls or not less than 1 stud space in frame construction walls. 3. Openings in pull, junction, or outlet boxes in corridor, area separation (party) or exterior walls, and area separation (party) ceilings: Seal shut to comply with Section 07920. 4. Provide flexible metal conduit at electrical connections made to vibrating or motor operated equipment. 5. Use rubber inserts where conduit is fastened to metal members. 6. Backside of pull, junction, or outlet boxes in corridor, area separation (party) or exterior walls, and area separation (party) ceilings: Fill with polyfoam. 7. Openings between pull, junction, or outlet boxes, and the gypsum board in area separation (party), corridor, and exterior walls: PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, unused at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and detaiis needed for a complete installation and for intended use and effect. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Standard Products: Provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects and fuliy comply with requirements of Contract Documents. C. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase ".. .as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that comply with other specified requirements. Architect wi/I select color, pattern, and texture from product line selected. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. B. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01600 - 5 OF 5 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01630 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Special definitions. 2. Methods of specifying. 3. Substitution procedures. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A Standard of Quality: Specified manufacturers, materials, products, and equipment have been used in preparing Contract Documents and thus establish minimum qualities for performance and appropriateness. 1. iviateriais, products, and equipment described in Contract Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality. 2. Comply with Specifications and reference standards as minimum requirements. 3. Where a particular manufacturer and product is indicated, followed by a description of product (material and equipment) including special features or performance criteria, manufacturer agrees to make necessary modifications to manufacturer's "Standard or Custom Products" to fully comply with product described. B. Base Bid: Base on materials, products, and equipment described in Contract Documents. 1. Ifle phrase "or equal" is not used within this Project Manual and is not implied. Where non- specified manufacturers are allowed, the term "Approved Substitute" will be used. Make requests for substitutions to comply with procedures specified herein. 2. It is understood and agreed by Bidders, Contractors, material suppliers, and Subcontractors that Bids and Contracts are based on products (material and equipment) and processes as specified or as revised by addenda or modification. r Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction '-' . required by Contract Documents proposed by Contractor after award of Contract are considered requests for substitutions. The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by Owner or Architect. 2. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 3. Contractor's determination of, and compliance with, governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.3 SUBSTITUTION TIME FRAME AND CONSIDERATIONS A. Pre-Bid Substitutions (Prior Approval): 1. Instructions to Bidders (AlA Document AlOl) specifies time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during Bidding period to requirements specified in this Section. 2. Consideration: Substitution will only be considered if submitted by an invited Contractor and each request includes information listed under "Consideration Requirements" Article specified below. 3. Consideration: Substitution will only be considered if submitted by pending Contractor and substitution request is being made because a specified product has become unavailable. a. Include with requests information listed under "Consideration Requirements" Article specified below. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01630 - 1 OF 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES . . .CAPETANAVERALCOONTRYTNNS&SUITES - - - - - ------- NEW FACILITY B. Substitution Requests Made After Award of Contract: 1. Consideration: Substitution will only be considered if submitted by Contractor and substitution request is being made because a specified product has become unavailable. a. Include with requests information listed under "Consideration Requirements" Article specified below. C. Failure to complete Substitution Request Form, Section 01631, or to submit requested information in acceptable format is grounds for rejeGtion~ D. Products listed "No Substitutions Allowed" will not be considered for substitution by Architect. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals, without prior written approval from Architect, or when acceptance will require revision to Contract Documents. F. Architect may require testing of a substitute material to assure compliance with Specifications, at Contractor's expense. When so directed, submit Samples for acceptance. Equipment, material, and articles installed or used without required acceptance shall be at risk of subsequent rejection. 1.4 SUPPORTING INFORMATION FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Include the following supporting information: Name of product (material or equipment) for which substitution is being requested and a complete description of proposed substitute including drawings, Product Data, Shop Drawings, Samples, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. Cross-reference submitted data to specified products for Architect's evaluation. 1. Substitution Request Form: Submit completed Substitution Request Form with each request for substitution including the fol1ovv'ing information: 8. A statement indicating changes in other materials, equipment, or other Work that incorporation of this substitute would require. b. Comparison of qualities of proposed substitution with specified product. c. Changes required in other elements of Work because of substitution. d. Effect on construction schedule. e. Cost data comparing proposed substitution with specified product. f. License, fees, or royalties required. g. Availability of maintenance sen/ice and source of replacement materials. B. Alterations or changes to other Work are responsibility of Contractor proposing substitution, including redesign if determined by Architect. 1. Burden of proof of merit of proposed substitute is upon proposer. C. !t is understood and agreed by Bidders, Contractors, material suppliers, and tier Subcontractors, that Bids and Contracts are based on products (material and equipment) and processes as specified or as revised by addenda or modification. 1.5 CONSIDERATION REQUIREMENTS A. Substitution request will be considered by Architect when the following conditions are satisfied: 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents. 3. Request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted. 4. Substitution Request Form is completed and attached. Additionally, 1 or more of the following are satisfied: a. If a specified product is not available. b. Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within Contract Time. Request will not be considered if product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue Work promptly, coordinate activities properly, or submit required submittals in a time!y manner. PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY c. Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority and requested substitution can be approved. d. Substantial advantage is offered to Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities Owner may be required to bear as determined by Architect, which includes additional compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction, or separate contractors, and similar considerations. e, Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where Contractor certifies substitution will overcome incompatibility. f. Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and Contractor certifies proposed substitution can be coordinated. g. Specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by Contract Documents and Contractor certifies proposed substitution provides required warranty. B. Where proposed substitution involves more than 1 installer, installers shall cooperate to coordinate Work, provide uniformity and consistency, and assure compatibility of products. C. To determine if proposed substitution complies vvith function, appearance, quality, perforrnance, and dimensional characteristics of specified item, Architect may: 1. Require Sample units, technical Product Data, and independent test reports sufficient to establish compliance, cost of which shall be paid by submitting party. D. Substitution request not complying will be returned without action other than to record noncompliance Vvith submittal requirements, .; c:. CO~~TRL\CTOR'S/8IDDER'S REPRESEi~T A TIOi~ I.V A. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor/Bidder: 1. has investigated proposed product and determined that it is equal to or superior in ail respects to specified product. 2. will provide same or better warranties or bonds for substitution as for specified product. 3. will coordinate installation of substitution, if accepted, into Work; and make other changes as required to make Work complete and meet the intent of Contract Documents. 4. \A/aives claims for additional costs, under Contractor/Bidderis responsibilitYJ which rnay subsequently become apparent. 5. will pay Owner for Architect's time required by substitutions to modify and coordinate documents as a result of change. 1.7 ARCHiTECT'S EVALUATiON PROCESS A. Architect is sole judge of acceptability of proposed substitution. B. Architect will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness and respond as follows: 1. Request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation. 2. Pre Award: Notify Bidders of decision to accept proposed substitution by written Addendum. 3. Post Award: Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject proposed substitution. C. Accepted substitutions will be documented by Architect's Supplemental Instruction, or, if Contract Sum or Time is affected, by Modification (Construction Change Directive or Change Order), including manufacturers' names and catalog numbers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01630 - 3 OF 4 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01630 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ,.. '" . 'vVeber Arcf1iiects & Pianners iV. 2280 Watertown Road long lake, MN 55356 PROJECT Cape Canaveral Country Inns & Suites New Facility 9009 Astronaut Boulevard Cape Canaveral, Fl 32920 Project No.: NA Date: We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above- mentioned Project. Specification Section and Paragraph: Drawings and Details affected: Proposed Substitution/ Description: Manufacturer's Name: \NHY IS SUBSTiTUTION BEING SUBMiTTED? (Select i of the following): 0 Pre-Bid Substitution (Prior Approval): Include detailed analysis comparing proposed substitution against specified product, including red lined Specification Section showing differences. o Specified product is not available. Explain in detail using attached letter. o Cost savings to Owner. Indicate comparative cost analysis as attachment. rI flfh......,.. C'V'....d......;"'. L-J '-IlIlvl. L-.^tJ1QIJ I. EFFECTS OF PROPOSED SU8STITUTfOt~ (IAJtach complete explanations and technical data, including laboratory test, if applicable.) Include complete information changes to Drawings and/or Specification that proposed substitution would require for its proper instailation. Fill in blanks below: ^ Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? o No DYes .... B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by requested substitution? o No DYes C. What affect does substitution have on other trades? D. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? E. Manufacturer's guarantees of proposed and specified items are: o Same o Different (explain on attachment) The undersigned states that function, appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to specified item. SUBMITTED BY: For Architect's use: (included name, address, telephone, and contract person o Accepted o Accepted as noted of manufacturer/supplier of proposed substitution) o Not accepted o Received too late n Incomplete Information o No substitutions accepted for this Reviewed by/date: Comments: Submitted by: Subcontractor's signature and date: rAntr~rtf"\r'c Cinn'!:ltllro. "'=I;n~ rI~tn' ,..;;...... .... .......'W'.._. .... >JI~I 1'-'l\.l.A1 '-' \.AllY '-AU\.V. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01631 - 1 OF 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SYSTE~v1 DESCRIPTIOf'J A. Performance Requirements: 1. Cutting and Patching: a. Structural Work Requirements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. b. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. c. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace Work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of described items, completely familiar VJith requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to extent needed for communicating essential data. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Com ply with Section 01330. B. Survey Work: Submit name, address, telephone number, and registration number of licensed Land Surveyor before starting survey \^Jork. 1. On request by Architect, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey Work. 2. Submit a copy of site Drawing and certificate signed by licensed Land Surveyor that elevations and iocations of \l'Jork Bie in conforrnance vvith Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for Project record. ~ A QUALIFiCATiONS I.'" ^ For field engineering or survey Vvork, employ a iicensed Land Surveyor of discipline required for ". specific service on Project licensed in the State in which Project is located, and acceptable to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product Sections, match existing products and Work for patching and extending Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Comply with section 01700. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01700 - 1 OF 4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS NEW FACILITY B. Each trade is responsible for examining substrates related to that trade's Work. Notify Contractor and Architect of unacceptable conditions. C. Commencement of Work indicates acceptance of conditions. Corrections required because of incomplete substrate examination or improper substrate conditions will be corrected at no cost to Owner. 3.2 LAYOUT OF WORK A. Provide layout of Work as a part of Work. B. Take responsibility for accuracy with respect to layout of Work. Immediately report perceived discrepancies or errors in Contract Documents, or Work to Architect. Make adjustments per instructions given by Architect. C. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. D. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. E. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. 3.3 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Employ and pay for a Land Surveyor licensed in the State in which Project is located, and acceptable to Architect and Owner. 1. Prior to first Application for Payment, submit name and address of licensed Land Surveyor to Architect, including changes as they may occur. Obtain approval of changes frorn Architect B. Submit evidence of Land Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in form of an Insurance Certificate. C. Survey Reference Points: 1. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for Project are those designated on Drawings. 2. Locate and protect control points prior to starting site Work, and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Identify and protect survey monuments on Project site discovered during construction, which are not referenced on Project Drawings. Tie out such monuments and notify Architect prior to aiiowing them to be disturbed. 3. Replace permanent boundary markers disturbed during construction with new permanent monuments and file required Record of Surveyor Corner Record per applicable State and County laws, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Upon request of Architect, submit: 1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering services. 2. Documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering Work. 3. Certification, signed by Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying in writing, that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or non-conformance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Project Record Drawings: Section 01785 - Project Record Documents. 3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Each trade is responsible for cutting and patching required for their portion of Work. B. Submit written request to Architect a minimum of 48 hours in advance of cutting or alterations that affect: 1. Structural integrity of elements of Project. 2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed eiements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and backfill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. E. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work. F. Beginning of cutting and patching means acceptance of existing conditions affecting performance of the Work. '"' Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, and devices and methods to protect \..:l. other portions of Project from damage. H. Provide protection from elements for areas that may be exposed by uncovering Work; maintain excavations free of water. I. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. J. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools are not allowed without prior written approval. K. Restore Work with new products per requirements of Contract Documents. L. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. M. At penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire- rated materials, full thickness of construction element per requirements of Section 07840 - Firestopping. 3.5 REPAIR/REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED WORK A. Protection of finished Work does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to repair or replace Work damaged by elements or by subsequent construction operations. B. Decisions on whether damaged Work will be repaired or replaced will be based on requirements that finished Work meets requirements specified for Work as covered in applicable Sections of this Specification; that is, if damaged Work cannot be repaired so that it matches new, undamaged Work, then replace damaged Work with new materials. C. In refinishing repaired or replaced Work, refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces: Refinish to nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly: Refinish entire unit. 3.6 EXISTING UTILITIES OR SERVICES A. Provide protection to prevent damage or interference to existing utility or service lines and mains. B. If there is damage to a known existing utility or service line or main, repair or have damage repaired as directed by utility or service company, without additional cost to Contract. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01700-30F4 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS - - - - - -- -- -TAPECANAVERA[COUlrrRYr~NS&SU1TES NEW FACILITY C. If an unknown utility or service line or main is uncovered, stop Work in that area and notify utility or service company, Architect and owner to obtain information on how to proceed. 3.7 INTEGRITY OF FIRE AND WEATHERPROOF ASSEMBLIES A. Seal, grout, fill, or otherwise protect spaces formed between fire or sound rated wall, floor, ceiling, or roof assemblies or penetrations through such assemblies by pipe, conduit, ductwork, other items, or voids provided for possible use of items in a manner to maintain fire or sound ratings. B. Where openings or penetrations are subject to moisture or weather, seal openings and penetrations with non-shrink grouts and elastomeric sealants intended for specific application 1. Seal floor penetrations during construction to prevent water from flowing through building. 2. Where safing and batt insulation are used, protect from moisture. Remove damp material and install new material before enclosing. 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate Work area to prevent damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects} by protecting 'vvith durable sheet materials. E. PiOhibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01740 CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspection: Conduct daily inspections, more often if necessary, to verify that requirements of cleanliness are being met. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to requirements specified herein, comply with pertinent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Use only a professional cleaning company experienced in commercial cleaning for final cleaning. D. Each trade is required to participate in clean-up procedures. 1.2 PAYMENT WITHHELD A. Architect reserves the right to withhold certification of payment requests for failure on part of Contractor to regularly clean Project per requirements of this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TRASH CONTAINERS A Provide a trash container service to remove rubbish from Project site. Determine locations of trash containers. B. Deposit rubbish in trash containers. Break down bulky materials (that is; crates, cartons, ductwork, and similar waste) to minimum volume before depositing them in trash containers. Segregate materials per requirements of trash container service. If materials aren't segregated per these requirements, then additional cost of non-segregated materials wili be back-charged to Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. C. Deposit rubbish per applicable laws and regulations of regulatory agency having jurisdiction. Perform disposal of waste materials not permitted in trash containers, such as tires, paints, and similar waste. D. Burning of refuge on Project site is not allowed. E. Remove, hammer in, or bend over flush protruding nails or screws in boards, planks, timbers, etc. 2.2 CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Provide required personnel, equipment, and materials needed to maintain the specified standard of cleanliness. 2.3 COMPATIBILITY A. Use cleaning materials and equipment that are compatible with surfaces being cleaned, as recommended by manufacturer of material to be cleaned. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01740-10F3 CLEANING . CAPECANAVERALCOtJNTRYINNS&StJITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: 1. Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not impeding drainage or traffic, and providing the required protection of materials. 2. Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material. and other items not required for construction of this Work. 3. Weekly, and more often if necessary, remove scrap, debris, and waste material from Project site. 4. Provide adequate storage for items awaiting removal from Project site, observing requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology. 5. Maintain Project site in a neat and orderly condition. 6. As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean structures, or pertinent portions thereof, to the degree of cleanliness recommended by manufacturer of succeeding material, using equipment and materials required to achieve required cleanliness. 7. Following installation of finish floor materials, clean finish floor daily, and more often if necessary, and while Work is being performed in spaces in which finish materials have been installed. a. Clean, for the purpose of this subparagraph, means free from foreign material that, in opinion of Architect, may be injurious to finish floor material (vacuum clean). 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A Perform final cleaning of Project site and structure. B. Clean, for the purpose of this Article, means the level of cleanliness generally provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quaiity building maintenance equipment and materials, (Scrub and polish clean). C. Genera!: Remove from Project job site tools, surplus materials, equipment, scrap, debris, and waste prior to completion of Work. Conduct final progress cleaning as described above. D. Site: Water and broom clean paved areas on Project site and public paved areas directly adjacent to Project site, unless otherwise directed by Architect. Remove resultant debris. E. Structures: 1. Exterior: Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste materia!, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by Work of this Contract. Remove traces of splashed material from adjacent surfaces. Hose down exterior of structure if necessary to achieve a uniform degree of exterior cleanliness. In event of stubborn stains not removable with water, Architect may require other cleaning at no additional cost to Owner. 2. Interior: Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove traces of soil, waste material, smudges, and other foreign matter in areas affected by Work of this Contract. Remove traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces. Remove paint drippings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished surfaces. Use only cleaning materials and equipment instructed by manufacturer of surface material. 3. Glass: Clean glass inside and outside. 4. Polished Surfaces: On surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish, apply polish recommended by manufacturer of material being polished. Clean and shine glossy surfaces as intended by manufacturer. 5. Carpet: Use only dry-chemical method for cleaning carpeting. Steam cleaning or water based cleaning is not allowed on carpeting. Use only dry-chemical materials and methods fully approved by carpet manufacturer, as instructed in manufacturer's published literature. F. Timing: Schedule final cleaning as accepted by Architect to enable Owner to accept a completely clean Project. CLEANING 01740-20F3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.3 CLEANING DURING OWNER'S OCCUPANCY A. Owner will perform progress and final cleaning of Project spaces occupied by Owner prior to Substantial Completion, completion by Contractor, and acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01740-30F3 CLEANING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prior to requesting inspection by Architect, use adequate means to assure that Work is completed per specified requirements and is ready for requested inspection. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following (List exceptions in the request): 1. In Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, date Substantial Completion is claimed, showing 100 percent completion for portions of Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to Contract Sum. a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, value of incomplete construction, and reasons Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3. Obtain and submit releases enabling Owner unrestricted use of Work and access to services and utilities; include occupational permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 4. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 5. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. 6. Discontinue or change-over and remove temporary' facilities from Project site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 1.3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. At Substantial Completion, submit written certification to Architect that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete per Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. 1 . Prepare a comprehensive and complete list of corrective items, and verify that these items have been corrected before notifying Architect of completion. Make available copies of Contractor's list(s) to Architect upon request B. Notify Architect in writing when Contractor feels Project is 100 percent complete and is ready to leave Project. Architect will then commence construction review and prepare a "Punch List", or list of minor corrective items to be issued to Contractor. For convenience, reviews may be phased for various portions of Work, as each distinct portion becomes 100 percent complete. C. Architect will arrange for consultants to make consultant's construction reviews. Contractor and principal superintendent, authorized to act in be half of Contractor, as well as principal Subcontractors that Architect may request to be present, shall accompany Architect, and possibly Architect's consultants, during construction reviews. D. Excessive amounts of corrective items, as judged by Architect, will be grounds to terminate construction review until Contractor is deemed sufficiently complete to once again start review. More than 4 minor items per typical room will be considered excessive. 1. Contractor has 30 calendar days in which to complete items after receiving "Punch List" from Architect. E. Notify Architect, in writing, at least 7 days in advance of time of acceptance inspection after completion of "Punch List" Work. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01770 - 1 OF 2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES CAPE CANAVERAL NEW FACILITY F Contractor, superintendent, and principal Subcontractors that Architect may request to be present, shall accompany Architect on acceptance inspection. 1. If Work has been completed per Contract Documents, and no further corrective measures are required, Architect will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion, and recommend that Owner accept Project and file Notice of Completion. G. Architect will develop Certificate of Substantial Completion Form (AlA Document G704), for signatures of i\rchitect, Contractor, and O\^lner'. 1. Date of Substantial Completion starts warranty period for entire Project. H. Owner will occupy entire Project and premises on date of Substantial Completion. I. Comply with requirements of Substantial Completion Document, and notify Architect in writing when punch list items have been completed, and a final inspection can be scheduled. J. Architect will accompany Contractor on Final Completion Inspection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01780 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. As a part of final Application for Payment, submit a lien waiver covering total amount of Contract. B. Submit lien waivers from every entity who may lawfully be entitled to file a mechanics lien arising out of Contract, including Suppliers, Subcontractors, and/or Sub-subcontractors. C. Execute "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims" (AlA Document G706), and "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens" (AlA Document G706A). D. Submit Final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. Execute "Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment" (AlA Document G707). E. Contractor Requirements Prior to Project Acceptance: 1. Deliver certifications to Architect that no new materials containing asbestos or other hazardous materials have been included in Work. 2. Remove temporary facilities and materials from site and building as specified in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. ') Thoroughly clean entire Project site of construction debris as specified in Section 01740. J. 4. Submit complete, signed Record Documents to Architect as specified in Section 01785. 5. Submit complete, signed Operation and Maintenance Data to Architect as specified in Section 01790. 6. Submit complete, signed Warranties and Bonds to Architect as specified in Genera! Conditions and in Section 01795. 1.2 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare paiis to Owner in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Deliver spare parts to Owner's designated area on or prior to date of Substantial Completion. Furnish Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of items delivered. 1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish maintenance materials to Owner in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Deliver maintenance materials to Owner's designated area on or prior to date of Substantial Completion. Provide Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of items delivered. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra products and materials to Owner in quantities specified in individual Specification Sections. B. Deliver extra products and materials to Owner's designated area on or prior to date of Substantial Completion. Furnish Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of inventory of items delivered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01780 - 1 OF 2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780-20F2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01785 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 SECTION !NCLUDES A. Requirements for Project Record Documents: 1. Throughout progress of Work of Contract, maintain an accurate record of changes and modifications in Contract Documents, as described below. 2. The purpose of Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding Work, both concealed and visible, which will enable future modification of design to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accuracy of Records: Thoroughly coordinate changes within Record Documents. Make adequate and proper entries in Specifications, Drawings, and other documents where such entry is required to properly show changes. Include as-built locations of site utilities shown on Drawings in a diagrammatic way. Accuracy of records shall be such that future searches for items shown in Contract Documents may reasonably rely on information obtained from accepted Record Documents. B. Timing of Entries: Make entries onto a job set, as described below, within 24 hours after receipt of information. tv1ake entries onto a Record Doeurnents Set, as described be!O\^l, at least \Neekiy. C. Architect will review record Documents at regular job meetings. Record Documents wil! be a regular agenda item. 1.3 PAYMENT W!THHELD A. Architect reserves the right to withhold certification of payment request for failure on part of Contractor to maintain Record Drawing in conformance with this Section. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330. B. General: Architect's review and approval of status of Record Documents wil! be a prerequisite to Architect's review of requests for progress payment and request for final payment under Contract. C. Progress Submittals: Secure Architect's review and approval of Record Documents as currently maintained before submitting each request for progress payment. D. Final Submittal: Submit final Record Documents to Architect and secure Architect's acceptance prior to submitting request for final payment. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING .A.. Maintain Record Documents in a secure place in Contractor's job trailer. Protect Record Documents from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of Work. B. In event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure data to Architect's acceptance. Such means may include, if necessary in opinion of Architect, removal and replacement of concealing materials and, in such case, replacements shall be to standards originally specified in Contract Documents. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01785-10F3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SU1TES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Contractor's Job Set: Secure from Architect at beginning of Work, at no charge to Contractor, 1 complete set of Contract Documents. Contractor's Job Set is for Contractor's own use to collect and record pertinent information on a daily basis. B. Record Documents Set: Secure from Architect at beginning of Work, at no charge to Contractor, i complete set of Contract Documents. Transfer information to this set in final form on a weekly basis. This Record Documents Set will also be turned in as Final Record Documents. 2.2 FINAL SITE SURVEY A. As a part of Field Engineering requirements, Section 01700, include the following licensed Land Surveyor information in Record Documents: 1. At appropriate times during Project, obtain current "as-built" data of licensed Land Surveyor's Work to Record Document Recorder, for inclusion into Project Record Documents. a. Clearly indicate differences between original Drawings and completed Work within c:n",,...ifi,,,r1 tnlpr::ln,...pc:: ~I'""~-"'~- --.-. -. .---. 2. Show "as-built" locations of site utilities with top-of-pipe elevations at major grade and alignment changes. 3. Clearly locate final locations of plumbing and electrical lines that are only shown on Drawings in a diagrammatic way. 4. Furnish required Engineering Survey information for utility easements for required document recording. B. Just prior to or on date of Substantial Completion, complete "as-built" transparencies, signed and certified as correct by licensed Land Surveyor. Provide Owner and Architect with a complete transmittal of information delivered. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MAINTENANCE OF JOB SET A. Identification: 1. Upon receipt of the Job Set, identify documents with the title "TEMPORARY RECORD DOCUMENTS: CONTRACTOR'S JOB SET". 2. Upon receipt of the Record Documents Set, identify appropriate to mylar media with title "RECORD DOCUMENTS" on each sheet of Drawings and on cover sheet of other documents. B. Preservation: 1. Devise a suitable method for protecting Job Set. 2. Do not use Job Set for purposes other than entry of new data and for review by Architect upon request. 3. Allow Architect to have access to Record Documents. Do not remove Record Documents from Contractor's trailer without expressed written permission of Architect. C. Making Entries on Drawings: 1. Job Set: Record information in a clear and legible manner. Maintain Job Set on an ongoing basis. Record pertinent information and changes as they occur. Subcontractors are responsible for making entries as may be required under supervision of Contractor. Subcontractors shall date and sign their entries. D. Making Entries on Other Documents: 1. Where directives issued by Architect cause changes, clearly indicate the change by note, and reference approved Addenda and Change Orders. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01785 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. Where Contractor originated causes changes proposals reviewed by Architect, including inadvertent errors by Contractor that have been accepted by Architect, clearly indicate change by note. 3. Make entries in pertinent documents as reviewed by Architect. E. Accuracy of Entries: Use proper instruments or tools for measurement as necessary, to determine actual locations of installed items. 3.2 FINAL RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit Job Set Drawings as supporting documentation to Final Record Document drawings. If Job Set drawings have been damaged during course of Work, secure a new copy of document from Architect. Carefully transfer change data to new copy and obtain acceptance of Architect. Additional copies of Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor at Architect's cost of reproduction plus handling. B. If documents, other than drawings, have been kept clean successfully during progress of Work, and if entries have been sufficiently orderly thereon and reviewed by Architect, these documents will be accepted by Architect as final portion of Record Documents. If such document is not so accepted by Architect, secure a new copy of that document from Architect at Architect's usual charge for reproduction and carefully transfer change data to new copy an obtain the acceptance of Architect. C. Review and Approval: Submit the completed total set of Record Documents to Architect as described above. Participate in review meeting or meetings as required by Architect, make required changes in the Record Documents, and promptly deliver final Record Documents to Architect. 3.3 CHAi\jGES SUBSEQUEf\.JT TO l\CCEPTAi'JCE A. Contractor is not responsible for recording changes in Work subsequent to acceptance of Work by Architect, except for changes resulting from replacements, repairs, and alterations made by Contractor as a part of Contractor's guarantee. No additional changes will be allowed without approval of Architect. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01785 - 3 OF 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01790 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QU,A,UTY ASSURA,NCE A. In preparing data required by this Section, use only personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of described items, completely familiar with requirements of this Section, and skilled in technical writing to extent needed for communicating the essential data. 1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submittal Procedures: 1. Initial Procedures: Prior to first Pay Application, submit a blank, tabbed binder in proper format for review and approval by Architect. Approved binder will be returned for collection of information during the course of construction. " n_.....I:~:___.. 1"""\____-1..____ Submit 1 copy of proposed manuais to Architect at least 15 days L.. rlt:::llllll1ldlY rIUl,;t:::UUlt::::>. prior to final inspection for acceptance. 3. Final Procedures: Following training and instruction of Owner's operating and maintenance personnel, review proposed revisions to manual with Architect. a. Submit 2 copies of accepted data in final form 10 days after final inspection. Approval of submittal is a pre-requisite for Substantial Completion. B. Format and Content of Manuals: -1. Binders: Submit 2 commercial quality, 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch size, 3-ring binders in portfolio form, neatly edited, with similar equipment grouped, tabbed, and indexed. Materials shali be printed or typewritten. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. " Covers: Prepare binder covers with printed titie "OPERATION AND MAiNTENANCE L.. iNSTRUCTIONS", title of Project, identity of separate structures as applicable, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. 3. Internally subdivide binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. /! Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system .... description identified, typed on 30 pound white paper. 5. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 6. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by Specification Section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. 7. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop Drawings and Product Data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01790 - 1 OF 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA . CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 8. Submit 1 copy of completed volumes in final form to Architect 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 9. Submit final volumes, revised within 10 days after final inspection, to Architect. C. Manual for Materials and Finishes: 1. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include Product Data with catalog number, size, composition, color, and texture designations, Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products. 2. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 3. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include Product Data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair. 4. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections. 5. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. D. Manual for Equipment and Systems: 1. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. ') t::J....."....\L:'t.ihrv~rrf {~lr,.....1 lit r'ir.o,.....tnriac. Provide e!ectrical service characteristics, contro!s, and L.. I CU IvUJV(:,(1 U '-'II V\,..IIl. '-'II ,",V\.VI I""""", communications. a. Include color-coded wiring diagrams as installed. 3. Operating Procedures: !nclude start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and special operating instructions. 4. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; dis- assembly, repair and re-assembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. r:: Provide servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required. '-I. 6. Provide rnanufacturer's printed operations and maintenance instructions. a. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. 7. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. 8. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. r. Provide Contractor's coordination dravvingsi\rvith color~coded piping diagrams as installed. ~. 10. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. 11. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.. 12. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01600. 13. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product Specification Sections. 14. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data. E. Submittals: 1. Comply with Section 01330. 2. Submit 2 copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before start of Work to Architect.Architect will review draft and return 1 copy with comments. 3. For equipment, or component parts of equipment, put into service during construction and operated by Owner, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01790 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 4. Submit to 1 copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection to Architect.Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. 5. Submit 2 copies of revised volumes of data in final form within 10 days after final inspection to Arch itect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01790 - 3 OF 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 01795 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties: Pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. B. Special Warranties: Written warranties required by or incorporated into Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties, or to provide greater rights for Owner. 1.2 WARRANTY AND BOND REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure, or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. B. Re-Instatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacements or rebuilding, reinstate warranty by written endorsement Reinstated warranty shall be equal to original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild \/Vark to an acceptable condition cornpiying with requirements of Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether Owner has benefited from use of Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, and remedies. 1. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on such Work, or part of Work, until evidence is presented that entitles required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. F. Performance Bond: Contractor is responsible for notifying Surety of material alterations to Project and present Owner with a Consent of Surety to significant changes to Bond scope. G. Payment Bond: Contractor is responsible for administration of second tier Subcontractors' payments and title transfer of Work completed in compliance with lien law statutes applicable to Project and surety Contract obligations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by Contractor, or Contractor and a Subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to Owner through Architect for approval prior to final execution. 1. Refer to individual Specification Sections for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 01795-10F2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS NEW FACILITY C. Form of Submittals: 1. Bind in commercial quality, 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch, 3-ring side binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. 2. label cover of each binder with typed or printed title "WARRANTIES AND BONDS", with title of Project; name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible principal. 3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in sequence of Table of Contents of Project Manual, with each itern identified with number and title of Specification Section in vvhich specified, and name of product or Work item. 4. Separate warranties and bonds with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing. Provide complete information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. D. Preparation of Submittals: 1. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item or Work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial Completion is determined. 2. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 3. Co-Execute submittals when required. 4. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal. E. Time of Submittals: 1 Submit vJarranties and bonds for equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service ,. during construction with Owner's permission, within 10 days arier acceptance. ., Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final "'-. Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, subrnit within 10 days after acceptance. List date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period. 4. Submit final and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted: a. AlA Document 707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." b. Satisfaction of municipal bonds such as street and landscape forfeiture bonds. c. AlA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." d. AlA Document GratiA, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 5. Deliver manufacturer's warranties, guaranties, and bonds required by Contract Documents, to Architect, with Owner named as beneficiary. Where manufacturer's warranty or guarantee extends for a longer period than Contractor's warranty or guarantee, deliver manufacturer's warranties and guaranties in same manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01795 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 03521 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place cellular-type lightweight insulating concrete for roof decks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Lightweight Insulating Concrete: Low-density concrete, with an oven-dry unit weight not exceeding 50 pounds per cubic foot, placed with or without embedded rigid insulation board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. !nclude mixing and application instructions for each type of lightweight insulating concrete. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details showing roof slopes, lightweight insulating concrete thicknesses, embedded insulation board, roof penetrations, roof perimeter terminations and curbs, control and expansion joints, and roof drains. c. Design ~iiixtures: For each IightvJsight insulating concrete mix. D. Qualification Data: For instaiier and testing agency. E. Material Test Reports: For lightweight aggregates, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements. F. Field quality-control test reports. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For lightweight insulating concrete. '1.4 QUAliTY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved by lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer. B. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Where lightweight insulating concrete is part of a fire- resistance-rated roof-deck assembly, provide lightweight insulating concrete identical to that used in assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory," from ITS's "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. C. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk containers. B. Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage. C. Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 03521 - 1 of 3 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE CAPFCANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUlTES NEW FACILITY 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete unless ambient temperature is 40 degrees F and rising. 1. When air temperature has fallen or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, heat water to a maximum 120 degrees F before mixing so lightweight insulating concrete, at point of placement, reaches a temperature of 50 degrees F minimum and 80 degrees F maximum. B. Do not place lightweight insulating concrete during rain or snow or on surfaces covered with standing water, snow, or ice. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I. B. Foaming Agent: ASTM C869. C. Water: Clean, potable. D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 1. Obtain written approval of insulating concrete manufacturer before using on Project. E. Joint Filler: ASTM C612, Class 2, glass-fiber type; compressing to one-half thickness under a load of 25 psi. F. Galvanized Plain-Steel itVeided itVire Reinforcement: ASTivi A185, 2 by 2 inches, itVO.5 by itVO.5, fabricated from galvanized steel wire into flat sheets. G. Molded-Polystyrene insulation Board: ASTM C578, Type i, O.90-pounds per cubic foot minimum density. 1. Provide units with keying slots of approximately 3 percent of board's gross surface area. 2.2 DESIGN MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of lightweight insulating concrete by laboratory trial batch method or by field-test data method. For trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs. B. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or cementitious material permitted by ACI 301. 2.3 CELLULAR LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE A. Produce cellular lightweight insulating concrete with the following minimum physical properties using cementitious materials, air-producing liquid-foaming agents, and the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Celcore Incorporated: Celcore Foam Concentrate Roof Insulation. 2. As-Cast Unit Weight: 36 to 49 pounds per cubic at point of placement, when tested per ASTM C138/C138M. 3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 175 psi, when tested per ASTM C495. 4. Dry Shrinkage: 0.20 percent to 0.40 percent. 5. Thermal Resistance: R=2.22 per inch thickness. 6. Preformed Foam Density: 3.5 to 4.5 PCF. LlGH1WEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE 03521 - 2 of 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical surfaces, including curbs, walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight insulating concrete. Fill control joints with joint filler. 1. Provide 1-inch- wide control joints for roof dimensions up to 100 feet in length; 1-1/2-inch- wide control joints for roof dimensions exceeding 100 feet. B. Welded Wire Reinforcement: Place steel welded wire reinforcement with longest dimension perpendicular to steel deck ribs. Cut reinforcement to fit around roof openings and projections. Terminate reinforcement at control joints. Lap sides and ends of reinforcement at least 6 inches. 3.2 MIXING AND PLACING A. Mix and place lightweight insulating concrete per manufacturer's written instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mixture and loss of air content. B. Install insulation board per lightweight insulating concrete manufacturer's written instructions. Place insulation board in wet, lightweight insulating concrete slurry poured a minimum of 1/8 inch over the structural substrate. Ensure full contact of insulation board with slurry. Stagger joints and tightly butt insulation boards. 1. Install insulation board in a stair-step configuration with a maximum step-down of 1 inch. C. Deposit and screed lightweight insulating concrete in a continuous operation until an entire panel or section of roof area is cornp!eted. Do not vibrate or \^lork mix except for screeding or floating. Piace to depths and slopes indicated. D. Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in condition to receive subsequent roofing system. E. Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than three days per manufacturer's written instructions. F. If ambient temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect lightweight insulating concrete from freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after placement. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to sample materials, perform field tests and inspections, and prepare test reports. B. Perform testing of samples of lightweight insulating concrete obtained per ASTM C172, except as modified by ASTM C495, per the following requirements: 1. Determine as-cast unit weight during each hour of placement, per ASTM C138/C138M. 2. Perform additional tests when test results indicate as-cast unit weight, oven-dry unit weight, compressive strength, or other requirements have not been met. a. Retest cast-in-place lightweight insulating concrete per ASTM C513 for oven-dry unit weight and compressive strength. 3.4 DEFECTIVE WORK A. Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight insulating concrete if surfaces are excessively scaled or too rough to receive roofing per roofing membrane manufacturer's written requirements. B. Remove and replace lightweight insulating concrete that fails to comply with requirements. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 03521 - 3 of 3 LIGHTWEIGHT INSULATING CONCRETE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 04810 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMM,L'..RY A. Section Includes: 1. Unit masonry assemblies consisting of Concrete masonry units. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For masonry reinforcing bars; comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. C. Material Test Reports: For each type of masonry unit, mortar, and grout required. D. Material Certificates: For each type of masonry unit required. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on each type of unit required per test method indicated. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C140. 2. Mortar: For properties per ASTM C270. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assembiies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by another means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Hot-Weather Requirements: When ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within 1 minute of spreading mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners, unless indicated as bullnose. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90 and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2800 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide Type I, moisture-controlled or Type II, nonmoisture-controlled units. 4. Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions: a. 4 inches nominal; 3-5/8 inches actual. b. 6 inches nominal; 5-5/8 inches actual. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 04810 - 1 OF 7 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES C.A.PEC.A.NAVERALCOONTRY INNS & SOlTES NEW FACILITY c. 8 inches nominal; 7-518 inches actual. d. 10 inches nominal; 9-5/8 inches actual. e. 12 inches nominal; 11-5/8 inches actual. 5. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS ^ Portland Cement AST~v4 C150, Type! or H, except Type HI may be used for Co!d-\^leather Mo. construction. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. C. Mortar Cement: ASTM C1329. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Blue Circle Cement; Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement. b. Lafarge Corporation; Lafarge Mortar Cement. D. Masonry Cement: Not Allowed. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. G. Water: Potable. 2.3 rviORT6A~R iv!iXES A. General: Do not use adrnixtures, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar nr nrnllt ....." ~I,",\..A". B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Proportion Specification. 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement, mortar cement, and lime. 2. For masonry below grade, in contact with earth, and where indicated, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications v"here another type is not indicated! use Type ~t C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply Wittl ASTM C476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured per ASTM C143. D. Mortar for Exterior (Above Grade) Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using Property Method. E. Mortar for Interior Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S, using Property Method. F. Mortar for Interior Non-load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type N using Property Method. G. Mortar for Exterior (Below Grade) Foundation Walls: ASTM C270, Type M using Property Method. H. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, using Property Method with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight. 2.4 MORTAR MIXING A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use per ASTM C270. B. Add admixtures per manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix. ONIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 2 OF 7 ISSOED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of mortar. D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper only within 2 hours of mixing. E. Use mortar within 2 hours after mixing at temperatures of 80 degrees F, or 2-1/2 hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F. 2.5 GROUT MIXES A. Bond beam and core fill grout: Comply with Section 03300. 2.6 GROUT MIXING A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use per ASTM C476 Coarse grout. B. Add admixtures per manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix. C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower freezing point of grout. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Prefabricated truss type reinforcement for horizontal mortar joints. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication per ASTM A 153, Class B (1.50 ounces PSF); standard class. Cold-drawn steel conforming to ANSI/ASTM A82, NO.9 side rods and NO.9 cross ties. Fabricate per ASCE/ACI 530. 1. ~v~anufacturers: a. Our-O-Wal Inc.: O/A 310 Truss. .... Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.: Lox All #120 Truss Mesh. u. c. I\tlRrLl.' ~orioc ~()() ? 'A1iro ~\Ictom '''''1 "..." \.. __II........, 'OJ""V -'- Y" 11'-' _YV\.VIII d. Approved substitute. B. Reinforcing Steel: Types specified in Section 03300; unprotected finish. C. Partition Wall Top Anchor: Galvanized steel dowel vertically welded to galvanized steel plate, designed to resist lateral loads to top of masonry walls. Provide with manufacturer's approved slip tube and compressible filler. 1. Our-O-Wallnc.: Masonry Wall Top Stability Anchor. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: PTAAnchor. D. Control Joint Anchors: Galvanized 1/32 inch sheet steel joint stabilization anchors with two 8 gauge galvanized steel wires for maintaining alignment of joints. Designed to be field-bendable to accommodate horizontal to vertical transitions. 1. Our-O-Wallnc.: O/A 2200. 2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Slip-Set Stabilizer. 3. Approved substitute. 2.8 MASONRY ANCHOR SYSTEMS A. Masonry anchor systems: Obtain Architect's approval for type, size, location, and finish for anchor systems. 1. Hilti, Inc. 2. ITW Ramset/Read Head. 3. The Rawlplug Company. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 04810 - 3 OF 7 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES NEW FACILITY 2.9 THRU-WAll FLASHING A. Thru-Wall Flashing: Fully self-adhering, self-healing, composite flexible flashing, total 40 mil membrane consisting of 36 mils of pliable, highly adhesive, rubberized asphalt, completely and integrally bonded to a 4 mil, high density, cross-laminated polyethylene film. lap flashing joints a minimum of 4 inches. Adhere flashing to substrate with a suitable product as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. \At R ~r"lrA In'" PArm_A_R"lrriAr .. .. . I ,. _, '-"__, .. ,"'.. . _... I II .. ............ . ._, . 2. Nicolon/Mirali Group: Miradri TWF. 3. W. R. Meadows: Air-Shield. 4. BarTech International: BAR-DRI634 5. Approved substitute. 2.10 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Filler: ASTM D994, asphalt expansion joint filler, 3/8 inch thick by maximum lengths, waterproof, flexible, permanent, and self-sealing. 1. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight. 2. AnnrovArl ~llh~tih ItA . or-r-' -. -- ----------. B. Column Wrap: 1/4 inch thick coated cellulose sheets, used continuously around structural columns and frames to keep separation from masonry units; 1. Williams Products, Inc.: Column Boxboard 2. Approved substitute. C. Nailing Strips: Softwood, preservative treated for moisture resistance, dovetail shape, sized to masonry joints. D. Cleaning Solutions: General purpose cieaning agent, not harmful to masonry 'v\lork or adjacent materials. 1. Sure-Klean No. 600, ProlSo/Co, Inc. 2. Approved substitute. E. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Grade 2A 1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neopiene. 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: #NS - Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge. b. Approved Substitute. F. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D2000, Designation M2AA-805. G. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt saturated organic felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1, 15 pound asphalt felt. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION, GENERAL A. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 4 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum. 3.2 I JI. VII\I0- ~A ^ ~r"l1\1 DV 1M ^' I ~ L-/'\.I 1''''-1 IVIr-\\..J'-'I'CI"-1 VYr-\.L.L-V A. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less- than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern: Lay masonry in running bond pattern unless indicated otherwise; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. D. Grouting for Frames: Includes frames indicated to be grouted plus hollow metal frames installed in concrete block walls. 1. Add water and mix grout per manufacturer's instructions. Do not add water after initial mixing. 2. Verify that surfaces of masonry and metal frames are sound, clean, and free of laitance, dirt, and other foreign materials. 3. Verify that plaster guards, as specified in Section 08110, are installed in hollow metal frames .........:_... .f._ ........_. ....:......_ fJllUI LV ~I UUlIIIY~ 4. Work includes the following: a. Hoiiow metal frames installed in concrete block walls. b. Elevator hoistway entiance door frame. 5. Grout for elevator hoistway entrance sills above support angles or blackout in structure. E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless othervvise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than the joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and 'T' sections. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: ~ Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, .. unless otherwise indicated. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 0481 0 - 5 OF 7 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CAPE. CANAVERALCOtJNTRYINNS&StJITES NEW FACILITY 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3.6 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown. Provide precast lintels made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. 3.7 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. Extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less than 2 inches to form a pan. 2. Install metal drip edges beneath flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flashing to top of metal drip edge. 3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION JI. Temporary FormvJork and Shores: Construct form\^Jork and shores to support reinforced masonry ~. elements during construction. 1. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. n Placing Reinforcement Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 61T~v1S 602. D. C. Grouting' Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in AC! 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 1. Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in these subparagraphs will be performed during construction for each 5000 square feet of wall area or portion thereof. 2. Mortar: Properties will be tested per ASTM C780. 3. Grout: Sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C1019. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean unit masonry by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints, as Work progresses. B. After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. ..., Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. "-. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied per manufacturer's written instructions. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 04810 - 6 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Masonry Waste Disposal: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including broken masonry units, waste mortar, and excess or soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. 2. Remove excess, clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 04810-70F7 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1-1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Interior load-bearing wall framing. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. n Shop Drawings: Include iayout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal D, framing, fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 1. Submit Shop Drawings that have been engineered and certified by professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida. Include seal and signature of pmfessional engineer on Shop Drawings. C. Design Data: Connection calculations for loading and stresses, bearing seal and signature of professional engineer licensed in the State of Florida. 1 Provide design calculations for exterior walls, canopies, soffit systems, and lateral bracing walls, Design wind loads and latera! bracing loads are indicated on structural Drawings. (N ofp.' Calculate loading requirements and satisfy standards established by structural \" .---. Drawings.) D. Mill certificates or test reports. E. Welder certificates. F. Research/evaluation reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with AISl's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data, licensed in the State of Florida. B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS 01.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS 01.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet SteeL" ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05400 - 1 OF 4 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING CAPEGANAVERAt.conNTRY.INNS&SUITES NEW FACILITY D. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Clark Steel framing Systems. 2. Dale/lncor, Inc. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Unimast, Inc. B. Approved Substitutions. C. Supply products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel. G60 zinc coating, Grade 33 for minimum . ...........__........~ ,..A.__I .f.hi_l....r."..,.....ro _.f (1 nil ')0 ;n,...h '"\t""\rI il""\t"'~. r2r'..."A~ ~n +l"'\.r" n..dnln"'\IIr"Y'\ Iln......n~t.o.ri c-f.t:::)..o.i +hi,...L--nac-c ^f UIIlr..,UOlCU ;:)lOCI 1l1l\..of\.1 n::;;,:);:) VI V.V""'tL.U IIlvll ell IU l'Vuv, '-JI au'V vv IVI 1lIIIIIIIIUIII UllvVC;U.vU .;.:J\.\.i\.il U IIVI'\.llv..;JI..;;J VI 0.0538 inch and greater. B. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs of sizes indicated on Drawings, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM eg55, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch. 2. Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with ASTM C955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated- steel thickness matching steel studs. 2.3 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process per ASTM A123. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process per ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. F. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21 035. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY H. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INST ALLA TION A. Preparation: Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, per ASTM C1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. '=> Install framing members in one-piece lengths. v. 4. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. 5. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing Work. 6. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. C. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as foilows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. D. Load~Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks. Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. 1. Align studs vertically where wall-framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 2. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. 3. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. 4. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 5. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. 6. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. 7. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten at each stud intersection. 8. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, blocking, bracing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05400 - 3 OF 4 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING CAPECANAVERA.LCOUNTRYINNS&SOITES NEW FACILITY E. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint per ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing. 1. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection. 2. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. END OF SECTION COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior and elevator pit ladders. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3. Metal bar grating. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Prefabricated building columns. 2. Metal nosings and treads. 3. Grout. 4. Extruded-aluminum plank gratings. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. '"' Ternp!ates: For anchors and boits. l___. 1.3 QUAliTY ASSURANCE A. Metal Bar Grating Standards: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual." B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of Work, provide new materials selected for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variation in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. Provide steel tubing and plates with sharp edging, unless noted otherwise. B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. C. Steel Tubing: Cold-Formed, ASTM A500-93, Grade C. D. Plates: ASTM A283. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53-93a, Grade B. 1. Galvanized: Exterior locations and other areas where indicated. 2. Interior Type F, standard weight (schedule 40), unless noted otherwise. F. Anchors-Inserts: 1. Threaded Type: ASTM A27; hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A153. 2. Slotted Type: ASTM A283; hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05500 - 1 OF 5 METAL FABRICATIONS CAPECANAVERALCOUNTRYTNNS&SUlTES NEW FACILITY G. Fasteners: Zinc coated, galvanized for exterior use or when used in exterior walls, per ASTM A 153. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required for installation of miscellaneous metal items. 1. Standard Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon type, ASTM A307-94, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Plain Washers: Round, general assembly grade carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 5. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 6. Other Fastener Types: As required to suit application. H. Welding Electrodes: Appropriate type for metal to be welded. Comply with AWS 01.1. I. Rough Hardware: 1. Bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring and securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6. 2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required to complete Work. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections. Furnish steel washers elsewhere. J. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated on Drawings, or which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete Work. 2. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated on Drawings and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connections. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardvJare, hangers, and similar items. 3. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units are to be installed after concrete is placed. 2.2 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A 17.1. 3. Space siderails 16 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches on center with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder. 0 Steel Ladders: w. 1. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel fiat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 1-inch- diameter steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung by a proprietary process. a. Acceptable Products: 1) IKG Industries, a Harsco company; Mebac. 2) W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT. 5. Prime interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer. 2.3 METAL BAR GRATING A. Pressure-Locked, Stainless-Steel Grating: Fabricated by either pressing rectangular flush-top crossbars into slotted bearing bars or swaging crossbars between bearing bars. 1. Bearing Bar Spacing: 7/16 or 1/2 inch on center. 2. Bearing Bar Depth: As required to comply with structural performance requirements. 3. Bearing Bar Thickness: 1/8 inch. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 4. Crossbar Spacing: 2 inches on center. 5. Traffic Surface: Plain. 6. Aluminum Finish: Mill finish. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select per AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer CM18/19. b. Carboline Company: Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings: Catha-Coat 313. d. International Coatings Limited: Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer. e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.: Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670. f. Sherwin-Williams Company (The): Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g. Tnemec Company, Inc.: Tneme-Zinc 90-97. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM 01187. E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, non gaseous grout complying with ASTM C11 07. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior appiications. F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structuial value of joined pieces. 1. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. 2. Weld corners and seams continuously. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended. 3. Form exposed connections v.Jith hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 4. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 5. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, not less than 24 inches on center. B. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts. 2.6 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. B. Steel and Iron Finishes: 1. Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A153/A153M as applicable. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05500 - 3 OF 5 METAL FABRICATIONS NEW FACILITY 2. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC- SP 6/NACE No.3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification NO.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting," for shop painting. C. Painting: After cleaning and before leaving shop, apply 1 coat of primer paint of specified type, applied per manufacturer's instructions, to uniform dry film thickness specified in Section 09900. 1. Surfaces To Be Painted: Clean, dry, and free of deleterious substances that would impair Work. 2. Use application methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, and open spaces. 3. Do not apply primer when surface temperature of steel is below dew point of atmosphere. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in ioeation, vv'ith edges and surfaces level, plumb: and true. 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together. \Neld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in form\,vork for items that are to be built into conciete, masonry, or similar construction. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on cleaned surfaces using wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts and pack solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. C. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. 1. Painted Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up paint with same material as used for shop painting. 2. Field Welding: Touch up welds in shop prime painted Work with same primer. 3.2 INSTALLING METAL BAR GRATINGS A. General: Install gratings to comply with recommendations of referenced metal bar grating standards that apply to grating types and bar sizes indicated, including installation clearances and standard anchoring details. B. Attach removable units to supporting members with type and size of clips and fasteners indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by grating manufacturer for type of installation conditions shown. C. Attach nonremovable units to supporting members by welding where both materials are same; otherwise, fasten by bolting as indicated above. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.3 CLEANING A. After installation, touch up field welds and scratched and damaged prime painted and galvanized surfaces. Use primer consistent with shop-applied coat or as recommended for galvanized surfaces as applicable. B. Clean and touch-up painting of field welds, bolt connections, and abraded areas of shop paint with same primer as was shop applied. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05500 - 5 OF 5 METAL FABRICATIONS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS PART 1 - GENERAL .... ,of C'I UAft.A^n'/ 1.1 vUIVIIVIMr- I A. Section Includes: 1. Steel stair frame of structural sections with closed risers and formed metal pans to receive concrete fill at stair treads and landings. 2. Associated steel pipe and tube railings, posts, perforated metal risers, brackets, fittings, and related accessories. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Fabricate stair assembly to support the following loads: a. Live load: 100 pounds per square foot minimum. b. Concentrated load: 300 pounds minimum. c. Deflection of stringer or landing framing: Do not exceed L/240 of span. 2. Fabricate railing assemblies to withstand a minimum concentrated load of 250 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the top rail, or 50 pounds per lineal foot, whichever is greater. .... Design requirements specified herein are in addition to applicable building code requirements. .::L The more stringent requirements will govern. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ,A.. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in this Section. 8. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate detailed fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication. .... Indicate profiles, sizes, plans, elevations, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, 4t.. sizes and types of fasteners, and accessories. 3. indicate bearings, anchors, and other products required for construction activities of this Section. indicate products not furnished by manufacturer of products of this Section. 4. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Design Data: Connection calculations for loading and stresses, bearing seal and signature of Professional Engineer licensed in State of Florida. D. Mill Certificates for each type structural framing member and bolts, indicating the following information: 1. Bare metal thickness of steel, measured to 1/1000 inch. 2. Yield strength of steel. 3. Tensile strength of steel. 4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gauge length. 5. Chemical analysis of steel. 6. Thickness of galvanized coating, measured to 1/1000. E. Welder's Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on Work, verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05510-10F4 METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS NEW FACILITY 1.4 QUALITy ASSURANCE A. NMMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NMMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Florida. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certificates certifying welders employed on Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." D. SSPC, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, "Steel Structures Painting Manual". 1. Metal primers: Chromate free and low VOC. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials on site in a location and in a manner to avoid damage. Stack in a manner that prevents bending. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ^ rv1etal Surfaces: For illetai fabrications exposed to vie\^/ upon completion of \^Jork, provide nevv 1"1.. materials selected for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, rolier marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variation in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet. Provide steel tubing and plates with sharp edging, unless noted otherwise. B. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. C. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Steel Pipe Raiiings: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter by 13 gauge. Profiles as indicated on Drawings. 1. Interior Type F, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless noted otherwise. E. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wali brackets, escutcheons; machined steel. F. Mountings: Adjustable brackets and flanges with steel inseris for casting into concrete. Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall construction. G. Pan Stair Treads: Minimum 10 gauge steel pan, 2 inches deep, concrete filied. H. Pan Stair Landings: Minimum 10 gauge steel pan, 3 inches deep, concrete filied, with 3 inch by 3-1/4 inch steel angle reinforcing under landings to meet structural requirements. I. Concrete Fill for Treads and Landings: Portland Cement Type 1, 4000 PSI at 28 days compressive strength, 2 to 3 inch slump. J. Landing Concrete Reinforcement: Unfinished welded wire mesh per Section 03200. K. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325. L. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts consistent with design of stair structure. M. Welding Materials: AWS 01.1; type required for materials being welded. N. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide. METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS 05510 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY O. Safety Stair Nosing: For application at concrete filled stairs. 1. Nosing size: 1-7/8 inch wide, 1/4 inch thick, and 1-1/8 inch underside. Bolt to steel pan return at 12 inches on center with bolt maximum 3 inches from ends. 2. WOOSTER Products, Inc.: Supergrit Type 122 or approved substitute. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Provide complete stair assemblies including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding, unless otherwise indicated. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing Work. D. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously, unless otherwise indicated. h Stair A: At exposed connections} finish exposed \^/eids and surfaces smooth and blended so v. no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or boits unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. 2.3 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Meta! Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal stairs after assembly. B. Hot-dip galvanize items indicated to be galvanized. Comply with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M as applicable. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below for environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification NO.1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wood blocking is in place and properly installed, including stair railings at metal stud partitions. Cl \/n.,.,if\l +h~+ ,.4 irY\ an co int'"\ ":':I I tl""\lnr.-::an.......o.C" C"'llr....."\r\rfco nrH'~ ~::H"'\J""hl""\rco "'::101"0. ......1""\,..1"0.,...+1\1 r\.nc--ifir\norl LJ. VvlllY I.IIQ\. UUJIVII>.;JIVIIUl LVlvlUIIVvvJ ~UppVI \.u, ~IIU UllVllVlu 1(,..('''"' VVIIVVI..IJ PVulLtVI n......u. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05510 - 3 OF 4 METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS CAPFCANAVERALCOUNTRY TNNS&SUlTES NEW FACILITY 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install in-fill panels by methods detailed in approved Shop Drawings. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. .., Remove welding flux inlrnediateiy. 0, 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Place and finish concrete fiU for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03310. 1. Instal! abrasive nosings vIlth anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. H. Install perforated metal and components at metal stair railings as indicated on Drawings. Instal! plumb and level, accurately fitted, and free from distortions and defects. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-testing and inspection will be performed by independent testing agency as specified herein and per Division 1. B. Conventional testing and inspection services herein describe those items not specifically required by applicable building code, but are considered essential to proper performance of building systems. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace with new Work, and retest at no cost to Owner. D. Provide testing and inspection of miscellaneous metals, inserts, and prefabricated components for field welds previously specified. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION METAL STAIRS AND LADDERS 05510-40F4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 05712 ORNAMENTAL STAIRS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 CII~A~A^OV ... '-''-'IVIlYII~I'' I A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled radiused steel stairs with concrete-filled treads ready to receive tile finish. 2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Prefabricated (Drop-In Stairs) metal stair system complete with factory-fabricated stair treads and landings. Horizontal header and landing channels including vertical supports. (steel angle struts, hanger rods and connectors, columns, or welded embedment plates); factory- assembled stair railing for top mount installation on channel stringers. 2. Stringer mounted railings include brackets and bolts and fasteners for a complete and proper installation. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Fabricate metal stair assembly to support a minimum uniform live load of 100 pounds per StliiRrA foot or concAntmted load of 300 Dounds minimum. with deflection of strinaer or landina - , -. _u _ - _ - - _ - - - - - - - - . __ __ - - __ - - __ -- - - - - - 1- - _u - -- - - - - -- - -- - - -- - - - 1 - - - -- - -- -- - - - - -- - - - - - - -- -- - v - - -. . - -. - ...., framing not to exceed L/240 of span. 2. Railing assembly: Design to withstand a minimum concentrated load of 200 pounds applied in any direction at any point on the top raB, or 50 pounds per iineai foot. 3. Design requirements specified herein are in addition to applicable building code requirements. Comply with more stringent of these requirements. 4. Prepare and certify structural calculations for entire stair assembly and railings by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature for products specified in this Section. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate detailed fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication. 2. Indicate stair and railing profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, sizes and types of fasteners, and accessories. 3. Indicate profiles, sizes, plans, elevations, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, sizes and types of fasteners, and accessories. 4. Indicate bearings, anchors, and other products required for construction activities of this Section. Indicate products not furnished by manufacturer of products of this Section. 5. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. C. Design Data: Connection calculations for loading and stresses, bearing seal and signature of Professional Engineer registered in State of Minnesota. D. Mill Certificates for each type structural framing member and bolts, indicating the following information: 1. Bare metal thickness of steel, measured to 1/1000 inch. 2. Yield strength of steel. 'J T_,..,,~il_ ~f....._,..,,_+h _f C"o+n._1 oj. I GI1.,;,:)lIG .,;,:)1I vll~1.I1 VI vlvV"l. 4. Total elongation of steel in 2 inch gauge length. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05712 - 1 OF 4 ORNAMENTAL STAIRS BAPECANAVERAI::.BOUNTRYtNNS&SHtTES NEW FACILITY 5. Chemical analysis of steel. 6. Thickness of galvanized coating, measured to 1/1000. E. Welder's Certificates: Manufacturer's certificates, certifying welders employed on Work, verifying AWS qualifications within previous 12 months. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 10 years documented experience. B. Tolerances: Coordinate fabrication and installation with systems and verify governing or related dimensions to insure an accurate, precise installation. C. Regulatory Requirements: Meet or exceed OSHA and appropriate building code requirements for components. D. Shop Drawings: Prepare Shop Drawings under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Florida. E. Welders' Certificates: Certifying welders employed on Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials on site in a location and in a manner to avoid damage. Stack in a manner that Oievents bendinG Rnd ORnlRnlnn 1-. - - ----- -- -----n.v _n._ ----..-<=}...>=/" PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. American Stair Corporation. 2. The Sharon Companies. 3. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Drop-in stairs by Sharon Companies, Ltd. or approved substitute. ')':1 COMPONENTS L...v A. Stringers: 3/16 inch, A36, flat steel plat or 11 gauge formed channels. B. Landing Channels: C6 x 8.2 and 11 gauge formed steel channels. C. Tread Pans and Risers: Minimum 14 gauge formed steel or heavier gauge when required by design or performance requirements. 1. Tread type: Field poured concrete, 1-1/2 inches thick, 3,300 PSI compressive strength furnished per Section 03300. D. Landings 1. Pans: 12 gauge steel plate for concrete fill. 2. Concrete fill in compliance with Section 03300. E. Railings: 1-1/2 inch outside diameter steel tubing with 1/2 inch round pickets. ORNAMENTAL STAIRS 05712 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory assembled stair unit (drop-in stair) for delivery to site per manufacturer's requirements. B. Pre-fabricated steel plate and support channels; factory-assembled components with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Provide continuous welds. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds smooth and blended. E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts, unobtrusively located, consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. G. Accurately form components required for anchorage of stairs and landings to each other and to building structure. H. Provide steel channel stringers to profiles as detailed on Drawings. I. Provide hardware, wall railings and brackets, inserts, and fasteners. 2.5 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. 1 shoo r.o~t of hi-solirls rArl oxielA chrom8tA orimAr oer TTP 636. TTP 664. and SSPC 1364. . -"-, ---- -. .-. --"-'- ---. -.-.-- -----...-..- I~'---'-- ;--- - -- -- -, - ... -.... -, - --- ...- D. Touch-up primer and field finish per Section 09900. 1. Color: Dark Green per Owner's requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that dimensional tolerances, supports and anchors are correctly positioned. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTAllATION A. Establish centerline and wall lines in each stairwell before beginning stair erection. Due to field variations, align stairs with wall from these established lines. Do not make adjustment to stair location except where approved in writing by Architect. B. Field check and verify that structural framing, enclosures, weld plates, blocking, size, and location of pockets are as called for on approved Shop Drawings. C. Do not proceed with installation until stairwell is cleared. D. Install stairs square, plumb, straight, true to line, and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. E. Make welds in area of travel smooth. F. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 05712-30F4 ORNAMENTAL STAIRS CAPE CMJAVERALCOUNTRYINNS.&SHHES NEW FACILITY G. Allow for erection loads and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. H. Field weld components indicated on approved Shop Drawings. Perform field welding per AWS 01.1. I. Field bolt and weld to match shop bolting and welding. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. J. Mechanically fasten joints butted tight, flush, and hairline. Grind welds smooth and flush. K. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove debris, containers and excess materials resulting from Work specified herein from Project site. END OF SECTION ORNAMENTAL STAIRS 05712-40F4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL A ... ('"'\,.1 Il\Al\A^ _"J 1.1 0UIVIIVIMr<. I A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking. 2. Wood nailers. 3. Wood sheathing. 4. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product indicated. 1. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that materials comply with requirements. B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following: 1. Treated wood. 2. Engineered wood products. 3. Pov/er-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. c Expansion anchors. v. PART 2 - RODUCTS ,.., A MATERIALS L.I A. General: 1. IlImhpr Stanrlarrls' Manllfar.tllrp IlImhpr tn r.nmnlv with liPS ?O... AmArir.an SnftwoorllllmhAr -.................... -....................--. ...-.........--.............. .............-. .- --"'r-OJ ....... . - -- ,. ...._.._~.. --.-..--- --...--. Standard graded per established grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC); maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, and moisture content at time of surfacing and mili. 3. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as 4r.- required by PS-20, for moisture content specified for each use. B. Concealed Wood Blocking: 1. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 Western Hemlock, sound, fire-retardant treated, and thoroughly seasoned with maximum 19 percent moisture content at time roofing is installed. C. Roof Blocking: 1. Lumber: Standard light framing grade, Douglas Fir, #3 Southern Pine or #2 Western Hemlock, sound preservative treated, and thoroughly seasoned with maximum 19 percent moisture content at time roofing is installed. 2. Plywood: APA Graded Plywood, Structural I, C-D grade, Exposure 1, exterior glued and untreated. Thickness as indicated on Drawings. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06100-1 OF 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY PROJECTTITtE PROJECT DESCRIPTION D. Miscellaneous Lumber: 1. Maximum 19 percent moisture content for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. 2. Provide wood for support or attachment of other Work, including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated on Drawings, and work into shapes shown. 3. Grade: Standard grade light framing size lumber of species or board size lumber as required. No.3 Cornmon or Standard Grade boards per 'vVCLiB or 'vVWPA ruies or No.3 boards per SIB rules. 4. Interior fire-retardant wood blocking and furring, including 1 by or 2 by members: Treated wood with a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION PLYWOOD AND SHEATHING A. Plywood Backing Panels: Mounting electrical, computer, and telephone equipment. Fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation APA C-D Plugged INT. Exterior type moisture resistant glue 1. Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inches unless noted otherwise. B. Roof Sheathing (SHTG-5): APA rated Structural 1 sheathing, EXP-1. Contractor has option to use either of the following. 1. Plywood sheathing: APA rated (plywood) sheathing, span index of 32/16. a. Thickness: 23/32 or 3/4 inch depending upon availability. b. Edge detail: Standard square edges. .... Oriented strand sheathing: .A~P.A.. rated (oriented strand) sheathing, span index of 32i16. L. a. Thickness: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. b. Acceptable manufacturers and product: A \ Georgia-Pacific: Oriented Strand Board (OS B). I) 2) Louisiana-Pacific: L-P Oriented Waferwood. 3) Weyerhauser: Structurwood. 4) Potlatch Building Products: Oxboard. 3. Exposure: Exterior. C. Video Monitor Blocking: 1. Blocking at areas indicated on Drawings for Video Monitor Brackets. Verify exact locations with electrical. 2. 2 layers of 3/4 inch thick concealed plywood backing. Bolt between metal studs with sheet metal angle brackets. Size plywood sheet widths to fit tight between studs and 24 inches high. 2.3 LUMBER SEASONING A. Allow lumber to attain a state of equilibrium with local atmosphere prior to incorporatingi'~to Work. B. If wood treatment specifications state maximum percentage of moisture content at time of treatment, comply with those requirements. 2.4 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated on Drawings as "Treated Wood" or "Treated Plywood", or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood), and of APB Standards listed below. Mark each treated item with the APB Quality Mark Requirements. 1. Pressure-Treated Above Ground Items: Provide with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively of 19 and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the fo;;owing~ ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-20F4 PACKAGE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY a. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. b. Interior wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. d. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 8. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Chemical that provides protection against termites and fungal decay, and is registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 2. Fire retardant chemicals free of halogens, sulfates, and ammonium phosphate. 3. Provide fire retardant wood with flame spread of less than 25 when tested in an extended 30 minute tunnel test per ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 4. Kiln dry lumber to maximum moisture content of 19 percent after treatment. Kiln dry plywood to maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment. 5. Comply with requirements of AWPA Standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood for fire retardant wood. 6. Carbon steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, copper, and red brass in contact with fire retardant treated vv'ood shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil per year vvhen tested per FS rv1IL-L- 19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2. 7. Testing on fire performance, strength, and corrosive properties of fire retardant treated wood shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report. C. Interior blocking, shim material, and plywood: Performance rated. Indicate grade and species. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Rough Hardware - General: Furnish rough hardware required, including nails, screws, anchor bolts, J-bolts, lag screws, cinch anchors, strap anchors, toggle bolts, shot and-lars, and sirnilar items. 1. Rough hardware required to be of proper size and type for use intended and for materials to be fastened. Install adequate hardware to insure substantial and positive anchorage. 2. Use hot dip galvanized or aluminum at exterior \^Jork. 3. Nailing into wood plugs is not acceptable for Work. Where shot anchors are used, use type and size recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use. B. Bolts: Coarse thread, not plated, with washers and nuts. C. Anchor Bolts with Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307, 1/2 inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated, threaded 1 end with 1-1/2 inches right angle bend opposite end. Determine bolt length by the following embedment requirements: 1. Not less than 7 inches embedment into horizontal rnasomy joints. 2. Not less than 15 inches embedment into vertical masonry joint. D. Expansion Bolts: 1. Masonry conditions: Parasleeve by Emhart Corporation/Molly Division. E. Adhesive Anchors: Heavy-duty vinylester resin adhesive anchors sized by manufacturer for specific application and substrate. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Hilti Corp. HVA Anchor Series. b. Comparable products by The Rawlplug Company Inc. F. Nails: Bright finish steel for interior and galvanized steel for exterior. G. Membrane Flashing: Non-reinforced 45 mil uncured EPOM flashing material in 12, 18, and 24 inch widths, as determined by application. Provide complete with bonding adhesive recommended by f)",c:hinrl m",nllf",,,h Ir",r .._""'....~ ...-..-.-....""-. -.. 1. Bonding adhesive: As recommended by flashing manufacturer. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06100-30F4 ROUGH CARPENTRY PROJECT DESCRIPTION 2. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Carlisle SynTec Systems: Sure-seal Uncured EPDM Elastoform Flashing. b. Firestone Building Products Company: Rubbergard EPDM Formflash. c. GenFlex Roofing Systems: GenFlex Flex Flash E. H. Plywood Clips: Simpson Company, PSC; size to match plywood thickness. /. Building Paper: 15 pound asphalt saturated felts conforming to ASTM 0226 with a vapor perm rate of 5 perms (non-perforated). J. Air Infiltration Barrier: Polyethylene, olefin fibers spunbonded into a flexible, tear-resistant 6 mil fabric specially designed to prevent air infiltration without developing a vapor barrier. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. Dupont: TyVek Housewrap. K. Construction Adhesive: Conform to APA Specification AFG-01. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Apply field treatment per AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and p!)^Nood. C. Securely attach rough carpentry Work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as required by local jurisdiction. D. Use finishing nails for exposed Work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. E. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. F. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products per manufacturer's written instructions. G. Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. H. Apply building paper horizontally with 2-inch overlap and 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails. Cover upstanding flashing with 4-inch overlap. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 4 OF 4 PACKAGE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ C'11~d~d^DV I. , uUIVIIVIr-\I'\.1 A. Section Includes: 1. Finish carpentry items, other than shop prefabricated casework, indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Includes related hardware, attachments, and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component elevations and dimensions, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories, and finishes. B. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions. C. Samples: Submit Samples of pre-finished items illustrating specified finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work per AWl Premium Quality Standard Requirements. 0 Qualifications: u. i. Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. C. Factory mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill, and grading agency identification, except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish. Submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded per requirements. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code applicable building code for fire retardant requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver shop fabricated carpentry items until site conditions are adequate to receive Work. Protect items from weather while in transit. B. Store finished items indoors, in ventiiated areas, with a constant, minirTlum temperature of 60 degrees F, maximum relative humidity of 25 to 55 percent. C. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. D. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. General: Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed, or worked and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to actual sizes as required by PS-20 or to actual sizes and pattern as shovv'n, unless otherNise indicated. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06200 - 1 OF 5 FINISH CARPENTRY GAPEGANAVERALCOlJN'fRYfNNS&StJITES NEW FACILITY B. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacturer until time of installation not greater than values required by applicable grading rules of respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product indicated. C. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having a moisture content from time of manufacturer until time of installation within ranges required in referenced woodworking standard. D. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock. E. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; Graded per AWl Premium Standards. 1. Moisture content of 6 to 8 percent. 2. Stage Flooring (Room Name & Number): Sub-floor shall be 1 x 4 wood sleepers attached to the concrete floor, 1 by 4 T&G Yellow Pine boards attached to sleepers and sanded, stained black, and sealed per Section 09900. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. Hardwood Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): Clear, kiln-dried, red oak finished lumber (S4S), selected for compatible grain and color. B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln-dried stock graded under WMMPA WM 4. Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade red oak. a. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. Corridor Base Pattern: BCB 400 Other Base Pattern: BCB 500 Shoe-Mold Pattern: 127 Door Casing Pattern: C352 Crown Mold: 2-piece, CM48+8PG325 Chair-Rail Pattern: 2-piece, CR290+50C Acceptable Manufacturer: Cox Interiors, Inc. or approved substitute. 2.3 INTERIOR FRAMES A. Non-Rated Window Frames: Solid hardwood lumber, profiles and sizes as indicated on Drawings. 1. Species: Red oak. 2. Finish: Field transparent finish per Section 09900. 2.4 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATES ^ Manufacturers: Subject to compiiance, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: K. 1. Forbo Arborite 2. Formica Corporation 3. Laminart 4. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces 5. Pionoite Decorative Laminates 6. WilsonArt International 7. No substitutions. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD-3. 1. Thickness: 0.050 inch. 2. Color: Pattern and gloss as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. C. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD-3, BK20 unfinished backing sheet 1. Thickness: 0.020 inch. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.5 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Plastic Laminate Window Stools: Medium Density Fiberboard of width and length indicated on -Drawings, 3/4 inch thick, 1-1/2 inch by 3/4 inch vertical nosing. Cover exposed surfaces with plastic laminate finish, and other surfaces with laminate backing sheet. 2.6 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive: Non-soivent; type recommended by iaminate manufacturer to suit application. 2.7 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized finish in concealed locations and plain finish in exposed locations. B. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 2.8 WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES A. Fire Retardant (FR-S Type: Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of less than 25 per AST~v~ E84. B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Wood Repellent Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: NWWDA I.SA, with 0.25 percent retainage D. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear type, manufacturer's standard to suit appiication. 2.9 SHOP TREATMENT OF 'vVOOD MATERiALS A. Shop pressure treatment to wood materials requiring preservatives to concealed wood blocking. B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting. 2.10 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWl Premium Quality Standards. B. Shop-assemble Work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching veneer edging. Use 1 piece for full length only. D. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. E. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. F. Apply plastic laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand Work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06200 - 3 OF 5 FINISH CARPENTRY . CAPE..CANAVERALCOtJNTRVfNNS&SUlTES NEW FACILITY C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Finish Work: Comply with AWl Premium Quality standards. 2.12 FIELD FINISHING A. Apply painting or transparent finishes per Section 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting Work of this Section are placed and ready to receive this Work. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Condition wood materials to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas prior to installing. "':l .:l ii\iQT^i i ATlni\1 V.V ,,"v I F""U_L..r\ I ''-II'' ^ Instali VVork per AWl Premium Quality Standard. ,... B. Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly treated, not adequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate Work with minimum of joints or optimum joining arrangements, or which are defective with respect to surfaces, sizes, or patterns. C. Instali Work plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level countertops, with 1/16 inch rnaxirnurn orr-set in flush adjoining 1/8 inch maximum off-sets in revealed adjoining surfaces. D. Carefully scribe Work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. E. Install components and trim with fasteners of type and size to suit application. F. .~void exposed nailing as far as possible. \^Jhen necessary to naiJ. use blind nailing methods and set nail heads. G. Install running woodwork in single lengths whenever material is obtainable in required lengths, otherwise install in as long lengths as obtainable with joints between adjacent members staggered. Make joints only where solid fastening can be provided. H. Cope molded Work at returns and interior angles. Miter at corners. l. Kerf backs at wide flat members. J. Anchor finish carpentry Work to anchorage devices or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping, and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. K. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with finished surface, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.4 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment per manufacturer's instructions. B. Brush-apply 1 coat of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, and roofing and related metal flashing. Treat site-sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.5 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand Work smooth. B. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. 3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean and remove temporary coverings and stickers from finish materials. B. Clean and polish glass materials and surfaces. END OF SECTiON ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06200 - 5 OF 5 FINISH CARPENTRY CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 C'II~A~A^DV 1.1 v\.JIVIIVIM.I" I A. Section Includes: 1. Interior woodwork including for the following applications: a. Pre-finished wood cabinets and front desk. b. Plastic-laminate cabinets. c. Plastic-laminate countertops. d. Shop finishing of woodwork. B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Cabinet hardware and accessories. 2. Finishing materials and processes. 8. ~h()n nr;:twinn~' inr:h IriA In~~ji()n ()f A~~h itAm ni::ln, ;:lnn Aipv;:1iinn, i~r(lA_c::r~iA rlAt~iI~ ~tt~rhmpnt -"-, -.-.....v...... ....................... ............_~....... ....... ....--....... ............, t"'............... .............. ......-.-................., ._.~...... ................- ............................, ...........-...........-.... devices, and other components. C. C::"'mnl~",' ~~.. .t"~~' 1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. -1 ."2 QUAliTY ASSURANCE I.v A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork. B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWl's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural v.Joodvv'ork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWl certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with custom grade. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet Work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Wood for Transparent Finish: 1. Species and Cut: Stain grade birch premium veneer unless indicated otherwise. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06400 - 1 OF 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK CAPECANAVERACCOUNTRYINNS&SOTftS NEW FACILITY B. Wood Products: 1. Hardboard: AHA A 135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPV A HP-1. C. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Forbo Arborite b. Formica Corporation c. Laminart d. Nevamar Decorative Surfaces e. Pionoite Decorative Laminates f. WilsonArt International 2.2 HARDW ARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials for a complete installation of architectural woodwork. 1. Hinges: Frameless, self-closing, concealed type, BHMAA156.9, B01602, self-closing. 2. Knobs: Back-mounted, "mushroom" shaped, satin chrome finish. a. Location: Provide at wood veneered cabinets. .... \lifire Pulls: Back-mounted, 4 inches long by 5/16 inch diameter, satin chrome finish. .J. a. Location: Provide at plastic laminate cabinets. 4. Catches: Magnetic, BHMA A156.9, B03141 5. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: KV No. 255 Steel standards and KV No. 256 Supports by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing or approved substitute. D Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steei baii bearings D. and rated for the foilowing loads: 1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 Ibf. 2. File Drawer Slides: 200 Ibf. 3. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 Ibf. 4. Acceptable manufacturers: Knape & Vogt Manufacturing or approved substitute. C. Locks: KV No. 986 by Knape & Vogt Manufacturing or approved substitute. D. Exposed Hardware Finishes: Complying with BHMA A 156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base unless indicated otherwise 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom complying with the referenced quality standard. 2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 3. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width. 4. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished Work. 5. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Wood Cabinets for Transparent Finish: 1. AWl Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame. 2. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch unless indicated otherwise. 3. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Slip match. 4. Semiexposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Match species and cut indicated for exposed surfaces. a. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber, stained to match species indicated for exposed surfaces. b. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. 5. Species for Exposed Lumber Surfaces: Any closed-grain hardwood. 6. Panel Product for Exposed Surfaces: Medium-density fiberboard. C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: 1. AWl Type of Cabinet Construction: Reveal overlay on face frame. 2. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch unless indicated otherwise. 3. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative of grade indicated. a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGL. b. Postformed Surfaces: HGP. c. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. d. Edges: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. 4. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops: 1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS or HGP. If HGP, do not provide non-drip raised edges. ? ~()I('jrs PRttArns Rnrl FinishAS' Arc:hitAd will SAlAd from mRnl jfRdi IrAr's fi III rRnfm -. - -.-. -, . --.---..-! -..-. ....-..--. ... -...---- ..... --.---.. -... ...-..-.----. -. - .-.. ._..~_. 3. Edge Treatment: Post-formed. a. Provide hardwood bullnose edge at registration desk, breakfast buffet, and meeting rooms. 4, Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue, E. Door Styles: Provide the following door styles where indicated: 1. Wood Cabinets: Raised 2, Plastic-Laminate Cabinets: Flush 2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation, B. Backpriming: Apply 1 coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply 2 coats to back of paneling. C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with sheen measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM 0 523: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. AWl Finish System: TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. 4. Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply paste wood filler to open-grain woods and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match stained wood. 5. Sheen: Satin, 30-50 gloss units. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06400 - 3 OF 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK . .. CAPECANAVERALCOtJNTRY1NNS&SUlTES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete Work as required, including removal of, packing and backpriming before installation. B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork per AWl grade specified for type of woodwork involved. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Shim as required with concealed shims. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining Work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Cabinets: !nstall without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. 1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches on center with NO.1 0 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and 'vvall with sealant specified in Section 07920 -Joint Sealants. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06400 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 06600 CAST PLASTIC FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMM,A.RY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-structural cast plastic fabrications indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Includes related accessories and attachments. a. Cultured marble vanity top and attached bowl. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Interior finish materials shall meet or exceed requirements of applicable building codes. B. Provide solid and homogeneous materials composed of high performance acrylics. C. Do not use cracked, chipped, broken, stained, or defective materials. D. Minimize color match differences between adjacent sheets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for product characteristics and specifications, fire, fuel and smoke characteristics, joinery to substrate, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of materials, dimensions, elevations, sections, details of termination, and attachment to substrate. C. Samples: Minimum 12 inch by 12 inch Samples of components illustrating material color, texture, and finish. D. Installation Instructions: Provide complete manufacturer's instructions. E- Maintenance Data: Provide complete maintenance instructions for specified products. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installer: Advise Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for installation areas. Do not instal! until required temperature and relative humidity conditions have been stabiiized and will be maintained in installation areas. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Lippert Corporation. 2. Lehigh Cultured Marble, Inc. 3. Craig Baker Marble Company, Inc. 4. Vermax, Inc. 5. Approved Substitutions. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06600 - 1 OF 2 CAST PLASTIC FABRICATIONS GAPEGANAVERALGOUNTRYINNS&SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturer: 1. Cross Industries, Inc. 2. Flex Trim Industries. 3. Fypon Ltd. 4. Mid-America Building Products; a Tapco International Corporation company. 5. Architectural Accents by Style-Mark, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Molded Millwork: Molded high-density polymer compound with factory applied prime finish. 1. Flame Spread: Provide fire rated formulation that will provide flame spreads specified. B. Flexible Moldings: Flexible composite moldings with paint grade finish. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Exterior Window Casings: 6-1/4 inch wide casings with smooth finish. 1. Acceptable product: Standard Casing by Fypon Ltd. or approved substitute. B. Lattice: Extruded polyvinyl-chloride, impact-modified and UV stabilized, meeting the following requirements. Provide fasteners, trims, and other materials for a complete system. 1. Qtrinc' 1_1 iA in,....h h" "~iQ in,....h .....,\,I tp~. I - II. IIlvll ""'y VJU IIlv'l 2. Opening: 2-1/4 inch 3. Pattern: Diagonal 4. ,A,cceptab!e prodUct: V!!'JYLattice by Cross Industries, Inc.or approved substitute. 2.4 FABRiCATiON A. Profiles: Manufacture molded millwork and flexible molding components to profiles indicated on Drawings. B. Provide internal metal reinforcement, anchor clips, brackets, fasteners and connectors as required for structural support. C. Fabrication Tolerances: D. Dimensional: Face profile shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch. <:: Thickness: Thickness shall not vary by rnore than 1/16 inch. 1::. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate is ready to receive Work. B. Verify that measurements are as shown on approved Shop Drawings. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 INST ALLA TION A. Molded Millwork: 1. Install molded millwork and flexible molding components per manufacturer's instructions and final approved Shop Drawings. MOLDED MILLWORK 06620 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. Install molded millwork and flexible molding components, plumb and square, true to lines, levels, and elevations. 3. Install moldings using adhesive recommended by molded millwork manufacturer. Nail moldings in place a minimum of 16 inches on center. 4. Install moldings under tension by springing into place. Use an end block or other recommended method to ensure that joints are as tight as possible. Use adhesive recommended by molded millwork manufacturer at joints. Wipe off excess adhesive immArli<=ltAhl <=lftAr ind<=llbtirm .......~~.~.~.J ~..~. ...~.~..~..~... 5. Fill and finish nail holes resulting from installation and other imperfections per molded millwork manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTAllATION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Plus 1/8 inch in 10'-0", non-cumulative. 3.4 CLEANING A. Patch countersunk fasteners. B. Restore surface of oroducts damaaed durina installation. Reolace units where damaoe is so I ...,... - -- v -- -- -------...----- -,- - - - - -- --.-- - --- -v- -- -- extensive as to require a new structure. C. Clean soiled units per manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.5 PROTECTION .A.. Protect joint seaiants and final finishes until cured or fuiiy dried. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 06620 - 3 OF 3 MOLDED MILLWORK CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07112 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL -t -t C'11l\41.4^r"'l\1 1.1 ..:lUIVIIVI/""\r..1 A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied, cut-back asphalt dampproofing at exterior face of unit masonry foundation walls and over top of concrete footing surface where indicated on Drawings and specified herein. 2. Related accessories and protective cover. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. 8. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan showing complete location of dampproof and termination details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the specified manufacturers: -1. Cold~Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Dampproofing: a. Karnak Corporation. b. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. c. Tamms industries. d. W. R Meadows, Inc. 2. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: a. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. b. W. R. Grace & Co.; Construction Products Div. c. W. R. Meadows, Inc. 2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOF!NG A. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back (Solvent-Based) Asphalt Dampproofing: 1. Trowel Coats: ASTM D4586, Type I. 2. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D4479, Type I. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D1668, Type I. B. Protection Course, Asphalt-Board Type: Premolded, 1/8-inch- thick, multi-ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral-stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt-saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07112 - 1 OF 2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPRooFING . . .. . CAPECANAVERALCOUNTRYlNNS&SUlTES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to Work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls from finished-grade line to top of footing, extend over top of footing, and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 1. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat required for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls. D. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on interior face of above grade, exterior single-wythe masonry walls unless walls are indicated to receive direct application of paint. 3.2 COLD-APPLIED, CUT-BACK ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not less than 1.25 gallons per 100 square feet for first coat and 1 gallon per 100 square feet for second coat, or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gallons per 100 square feet. B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and' trowel coat at not less than 4 gallons per 100 square feet. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. Support protection course "vith spot application of trowel-grade mastic where not otherNise indicated. END OF SECTION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07112 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 C'II~A~A^DV I. f VUIVIIVI/""\I'\. I A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill). 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Vapor retarders. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Product test ieports. C. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. VVarrant materiais and vv'orkmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of \lv'ork. 1. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into Work include the following: 1. CertainTeed Insulation Systems. 2. BPS. 3. Dow Chemical Company. 4. DiversiFoam Products. 5. Owens-Corning Company. 6. United States Gypsum (USG). 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (INSUL-1): Rigid, cellular, polystyrene thermal insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin; formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process. ASTM C578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Type IV, 1.60 PCF . unless otherwise indicated, typically used for perimeter and cavity wall insulation. a. Thickness: 2 inches unless indicated otherwise Indicated on Drawings. b. Thermal Resistance: R-5.0 per inch. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07210 - 1 OF 3 BUILDING INSULATION CAPECANAVERACCOUNTRYTNNS&SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Mineral-fiber blanket insulation consisting of fibers manufactured from glass (INSUL-30). 1. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A, Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim- kraft, foil-scrim, or foil-scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass. a. Thickness: Indicated on Drawings. b. Thermal Resistance: R-4.35. c. Maximum Flame Spread: 25. d. Maximum Smoke Developed: 50. 2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm. B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and \u:::J.ntari a~:H/.o.C' Vvlll.VU "'uvv~. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of filings and irregularities. 3.2 INST ALLA TION A. General: Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated~ Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. B. Install perimeter insulation on vertical surfaces by setting units in adhesive. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line. 2. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection board set in adhesive. C. Install foamed-in-place insulation with cores of concrete masonry units indicated on Drawings and per manufacturer's instructions. D. Installation of General Building Insulation: Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 1. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, nr co.o'-=ll-:1nf tl"'\ odn,o,C' nf a~l"h Ilnif fn fnl"'rY'\ ""=l fi,..,h+ C"a.~1 ""=l.C" IlnitC" "i....n C"h,.\\II"\...... it""\+_ _1_......_ Cill \I_i~t" i_ VI ...;1vUH...U I\. \.V vu~v~ VI ,,",U,",I J UIIII. I.V IVIIII Lt 1I~11\. UVCU 0.,;) Ulll\." 01 v .:JIIVVV;U III\.V pIO'VO. I III VVIU..;;)o III completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-20F3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 3. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members. 4. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets per ASTM C 1320 by stapling flanges to sides of framing members. 5. Place loose-fiii insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown by machine blowing to comply with ASTM C1015. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but do not compact excessively. 6. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft.. E. Installation of Vapor Retarders: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. 1. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wal! studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches on center. 2. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape per vapor- retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor- retarder tape. Locate joints over framing members or other solid substrates. ') Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with adhesives as recornrnended by vapor-retarder v. manufacturer. 4. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. 5. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other Work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.3 PROTECTION " Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders frmn harmful weather exposures, possible physical ,...,. abuses, where possible by non-delayed installation of concealing Work or, where that is not possible, by temporary covering or enclosure. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07210-30F3 BUILDING INSULATION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07240 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ C"lllAI\AAn,/ I. I QUIVIIVI......" , A. Section Includes: 1. Site-applied exterior soffit finish system installed over gypsum sheathing and cold-formed metal framing and concrete unit masonry as indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Include related insulation, meshes, attachments, and accessories. 2. Installation of perimeter and control joint backing and joint sealers. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Exterior Insulation Finish System: Externally reinforced exterior insulation finish system consisting of insulation board mechanically attached to a substrate, base coat with reinforcing meshes, and factory-mixed acrylic finish. B. Exterior Soffit Finish System: Exterior assembly comprised of insulation board, base coat, reinforcing meshes, and finish. C. Class PB Systems: EIMA designation for a protective finish coating system in which base coat varies in thickness depending upon numbei of layers or thickness of reinforcing. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Deflection of substrate systems: Maximum deflection not to exceed L/240. 2. Slope of inclined surfaces: Not less than 6:12. 3. The length of inclined surfaces: Not to exceed 12 inches. 4. Dimensional tolerances of all substrates shall be flat within 1/4 inch within a 4 foot radius. 5. Expansion Joints: Install where indicated on Drawings, but as a minimum, place at the fnlir\\Alinn 11'\,....<:1finnc-. I .....,,"-',)I.w II I~ IV,-,U\.IVI Iv. a. Where expansion joints occur in substrate. b. Where building expansion joints occur. c. Where pre-fabricated panels abut one another. d. Where system abuts dissimilar materials. e. Where substrate changes. f. In continuous elevations at intervals not exceeding 75 feet. g. Where significant structural movement occurs, such as changes in roofline, building shape, or structural system. 6. Termination: a. Hold system back from adjoining materials a minimum of 3/4 inch for sealant application. b. Terminate insulation board a minimum of 8 inches above finished grade. 7. Sealant: a. Comply with Section 07910 for sealant, closed cell backer rod, bond breaker tape, primer, and accessories. b. Provide sealant and accessories that are compatible with finish system. B. Performance Requirements: Design system to meet or exceed the following standards when tested per the following methods: 1 Impact Resistance: E!!\.~A Standard 101-86. 2. Moisture Resistance: FS 141A, Method 6201; 14 day exposure. No adverse effects. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07240 - 1 OF 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM .. .... . . ... CAPECANAVERACcoDN'fRYINNS&sDTfES. NEW FACILITY 3. Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor, and Roof Construction to Impact Loading: ASTM E695, 60 pounds Impact Mass: No cracking from a drop height of 6 feet. 4. Accelerated Weathering: ASTM G23-81 or ASTM G53-81; Testing period of 2,000 hours. No cracking, flaking, or adverse effects. 5. Wind Driven Rain: FS TTC-555B. No visible leaks or dampness throughout to rear face and less than 90 gram increase. 6. Mildew Resistance: MIL Standard 810B, Method 508. No mildew growth supported after 28 days. 7. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM 0968-81, Method A. No cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after 500 liters of sand. 8. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 or UL 723. Test specimen consists of base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. Flame spread and smoke development less than 25. 9. Full Scale Diversified Fire Testing: Modified ASTM E108 for Vertical Walls. No significant contribution to vertical or horizontal flame spread and no fall-off of coating and fire involvement of insulation core. 10. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: ASTM C67-81. No visible damage and negligible weight gain after 50 cycles. 11. Negative Wind Load/Full Scale Testing: ASTM E330 Positive and Negative Air Pressure; Withstand wind loads required by Uniform Building Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on system materials, product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and durability. B. Test Reports: Submit current (vv'ithin 1 year) test reports from Independent Testing ,lI.,gency that stipulates that system meets or exceeds Peiiormance Requirements of Specification. .- Shop Drawings: Indicate wal! joint pattern and details, connections, expansion joints, installatiOn) (r. ~. -.. sequence, details for accessories, flashing, and sealing. D. Samples: Two 24 inch by 24 inch Samples of complete system illustrating finish, texture, and coloi. E. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions. F. Applicator Certification: System'product manufacturer's written certification that system applicator has been trained and approved to insfall specified products. ~ 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Trained by product manufacturer, and certified in writing by manufacturer that applicator ;....,. ........... ....................... ~......-I _..........I:...........~......... I;:) al! OfJfJ! vvc:u afJfJ!!L<alVI. B. Field Samples: Prepare Field Samples for Architect's review and to establish requirements for finish texture and joint detailing. 1. Correct areas, modify method of application/installation, or adjust finish texture as directed by Architect to comply with specified requirements. 2. Maintain Field Sample accessible to serve as a standard of quality for this Section. 3. Construct Field Sample to leave exposed a "cut-away" view of each EIS system, including joint details, to allow revie'N and discussion of base coat thickness, embedment of reinforcing mesh, and joint preparation and detailing. 4. Sample Panel: Consists of not less than a 4 foot by 8 foot panel with the following components. a. Substrate. b. Installed system. c. Color and texture. d. ~",,,,,I""nt joint<=: ---.-.... J-" ...-. e. Typical condition at adjacent construction. EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM 07240 - 2 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Mock-Ups: Prior to starting EIFS Work, construct a 3 foot by 3 foot mock-up wall panel, including metal studs, gypsum sheathing, complete EIFS system, and related accessories. Represent proposed EIFS system and workmanship. Locate mock-up panel on site at location directed by Architect. Leave mock-up panel in place until EIFS system has been completed, then remove mock- up panel Project site. D. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01310 - Project Management and Coordination. 1. Schedule a pre-installation meeting at Project site and convene 1 week prior to commencing Work of this Section. 2. Review preparation and installation procedures, and coordinate and schedule related Work. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A Deliver materials to Project job site in manufacturer's original packaging, containers, and bundles with manufacturer's brand name and identification intact and legible. B. Inspect products upon arrival to site for physical damage, freezing, or overheating. C. Store and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, exposure to weather, breakage, and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials. 1.7 SITE CONDITIONS A Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not appiy EiFS in ambient temperatures belovv 40 degrees F. Piovide supplernentary heat during installation and drying period when temperatures less than 40 degrees F prevail. 2. Do not apply system on frozen surfaces. 3. Maintain ambient temperature at or above 40 degrees F during and at least 24 hours after system installation and until dry. 1.8 COORDINATION A Coordinate Work of this Section with other construction trades that affect Work. B. Coordinate and schedule installation of trim, flashing; and joint sealers to prevent water infiltration behind system. 1.9 WARRA,NTY A Provide 5 year manufacturer's '.witten warranty warranting system against conditions listed below. When notified in writing by Owner during warranty period, promptly correct said deficiencies without inconvenience or additional cost to Owner. 1. Faulty materials or workmanship. 2. Water infiltration. 3. Sealant failure, either cohesively or adhesively. 4. Failure of finish, including peeling, cracking, crazing, discoloration, or excessive fading. B. If exploratory Work is required to determine cause or causes of defects, cost of such exploratory Work shall be responsibility of party ultimately deemed responsible for said defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. BonsaI. W. R. co~ ~it Systems,~ric. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07240 - 3 OF 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM n.. nGAPEGANAVERALCOUNTRYINKlS-KSUITES NEW FACILITY 3. Parex, Inc. 4. Senergy Inc.; SKW-MBT Construction Chemicals. 5. Sto Corp. 6. TEC Inc.; An H. B. Fuller Company. B. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630. C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for EIFS with drainage is based on Oustsulation System by Dryvit Systems, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I; gray color, fresh, and free of lumps. B. Water: Clean, potable, and free of foreign matter. C. Mechanical Fasteners: Type recommended by manufacturer to suit application. D. Base Coat: Factory pre-mixed water-based acrylic adhesive consisting of a blend of Portland cement and acrylic additives, vvith no more than 33 percent cement by v.Jeight. 1. Provide material compatible with reinforcing meshes. E. Reinforcing Meshes: Balanced open weave, glass fiber fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials and conforming with the following: 1. Standard Mesh: Normal impact resistance. ~ j\Jlin.i~llt"'Y'\ 'AI~ll""fht. t::': r\lln~.t:':'lC" nor C"rlll-::t.I'"'.o. \/!'::I;rri O. IVIIIIIIIIUIII VV'CiI~II\.. V VUll\..rvu pvl ,;n...p,..It;..uv Yf;..AIV. b. Minimum tensiie strength: 200 pounds per inch of width. c. Impact resistance: Relative impact of 2.5. 2. intermediate Mesh: Moderate impact resistance. a. Minimum weight: 12 ounces per square yard. b. Minimum tensile strength: 300 pounds per inch of width. c. Impact resistance: Relative impact of 5.0. 3. Corner Mesh: Impact resistance at corners. a. Minimum weight: 7.2 ounces per square yard. b. Size: 9-114 inches wide c. Tensile strength: 540 pounds per inch of width. 2.3 COMPONENTS ,A,. !nsulation Board: Expanded polystyrene board, CFC-free, conforming to ASTM C578, Type I, with Kraft paper bonded to insulation. 1. Thickness: 1 inch unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Density: Nominal density of 1.0 PCF. 3. Configure back of insulation board with drainage channels per manufacturer's design. B. Tapes: 1. Grid Tape: Open weave fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. 2. Flashing Tape: High density, polyethylene backed tape with a rubberized asphalt adhesive. 3. Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner: Water-based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for flashing tape. C. Drainage Systems: 1. Starter Strip: System manufacturer's UV treated PVC J-type channels with bottom weep holes. Provide tracks with drip-edge unless indicated otherwise. 2. Drainage Strip: System manufacturer's corrugated plastic sheet material used for drainage of EIFS. 3. Adhesives for Drainage Strips: System manufacturer's moisture cure urethane-based adhesive for use in adhering manufacturer's drainage strips to substrate. EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM 07240 - 4 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant and Joint Backing: Material types specified in Section 07920. B. Provide related fasteners, barrier tape, head flashing, starter track, furring lath, control joints, casing beads, and trim components necesary for a complete and proper installation. 2.5 FINISHES A. Pre-mixed water based, integrally colored and textured, 100 percent acrylic finish coating. 1. Colors: Where indicated, provide the following colors: a. Field: Manor White, No. 108 b. Sign Gable: Prairie Clay, No. 111 c. Trim: China White, No. 310 2. Textures: Where indicated, provide the following textures: a. Field: Quartzputz b. Trim: San blast 2.6 MiXING A. General - Strictly follow manufacturer's written instructions for mixing tools, mixing techniques, and addition of water or other substances. Do not over-mix materials. Do not mix more materials than can be used during 1 day's operations. B. Cement-Based Adhesives: Strictly follow EIFS manufacturer's directions and prepare only enough material for immediate use. Maintain proper cement/adhesive ratios. ')7 FABRICATION L.. , A. insulation Board: Cut, rout, shape, and similarly fabricate insulation board into designed shapes as required. Employ precision fabricating equipment and methods to ensure accurate, matching profiles and similar details between insulation units. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Obtain system manufacturer's review and approval of exterior sheathing, verifying that correct side is facing exterior. Q Examine sheathing substrate for soundness, such as tightness of connections, crumbling or LJ. loosening of surface, voids, and projections. C. Make certain that sheathing substrate surface is free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, paint, wax, frost, etc. O. Tightly butt sheathing at joints. E. Make certain that substrate is free from crumbling or loose material, voids, or projections. F. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Prepare sufficient materials and assemble sufficient manpower to insure a continuous application process. B. If mechanical fasteners are used, perform fastener-to-substrate attachment strength tests on each substrate type to conforrn to correct fastener type requirements. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07240 - 5 OF 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM CAP E CANAVERAL GOONTRYINNS &SUlTES NEW FACILITY C. Prepare substrate to be free of foreign materials such as oil, dust, dirt, form release agents, efflorescence, paint, wax, water repellents, moisture, frost, and other materials that inhibit adhesion. 3.3 INST ALLA TION A. General: 1. Provide temporary support for bottom row of insulation boards. 2. Pre-cut insulation boards for corners and openings in surfaces. 3. Layout insulation boards to minimize cutting and to ensure that insulation board joints and substrate joints are staggered. 4. Install insulation board pieces in running bond pattern with long edge horizontal. 5. Interlock board pieces at corners "log cabin style". 6. Use "L"-shaped insulation board pieces at corners of openings. 7. Use stainless steel or plastic tools. 8. Execute details as indicated on Drawings. B. Starter and Drainage Strips: Install strips per system manufacturer's written instructions at appropriate timing with insulation installation. C. Adhesive Only Method: 1. Using "Ribbon and Dab" pattern or "Notched Trowel" method, apply prepared adhesive to backside only of insulation board. 2. Apply insulation board to substrate by pressing onto substrate and sliding into corner of adjacent insulation boards. Tamp board to achieve full contact with substrate. Line up outside face of board \^/ith outside face of adjacent pieces. 3. Allow adhesive to cure a minimum of 24 hours. 4. Protect insulation from weather and physical damage until cured. D. Scrape entire surface of insulation board to remove weathered material and rough-up surface for bond just prior to application of base coat. E. Tapes: Apply tapes at locations and in manner recommended by system manufacturer. 3.4 BASE COAT APPLICATION ^ t'::_....'.r\.r'Cll. 1""\. "\..JV'IIQIOI. 1. Verify flatness of insulation layer. If not within manufacturer's tolerances, sand until boards meet tolerances. 2. Correct deficiencies, such as gouges, gaps, and leftover adhesive on surface, before proceeding. 3. Cut grooves and other design features into insulation surface as indicated on Drawings. 4. Install foam shapes where indicated on Drawings. 5. Install heavy mesh base coat at areas indicated on Drawings. B. Install Base Coat: 1. Apply continuous layer of prepared base coat adhesive to outside surface of insulation boards at thickness equal to first layer of reinforcing mesh. 2. Embed reinforcing mesh into wet adhesive, lapping mesh at all sides and corners at least 2- 1/2 inches. Do not lap layers of heavy mesh. 3. Back wrap or edge wrap terminations of boards as indicated on Drawings. 4. Apply diagonal mesh to corners of openings. 5. Apply additional adhesive to the wet base coat and smooth the surface to give a final thickness of at least 1-1/2 times the thickness of reinforcing mesh. 6. Cure base coats a minimum of 24 hours. Protect from weather and physical damage until cured. 7. Install additional base coat layers where indicated. EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM 07240 - 6 OF 7 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.5 FINISH COAT APPLICATION A. Inspect base coat for defects and repair prior to proceeding. S. Apply finish in continuous operation without cold joints or scaffolding lines. C. Apply finish using same techniques and tools as used for approved sample. Texture finish to match approved sample. Keep finish out of joints or returns as required by manufacturer. D. Apply finish colors and textures to areas indicated on Drawings. E. Allow finish to dry a minimum of 24 hours. Protect from weather, dust, and physical damage until fully cured. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Schedule product manufacturer's representative to visit Project site during installation phase in order to certify that products being installed meet or exceed Specification requirements. B. Inspect Work and certify in writing to Architect that Work conforms in every way to these Specifications. 3.7 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials left over after installation is complete. S. Clean adjacent materials, surfaces, and Work area of foreign materials. END OF SECTiON ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07240 - 7 OF 7 EXTERIOR INSULATION FINISH SYSTEM CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 141 SU~v1~y1ARY A. Section Includes: 1. Factory-formed and field-assembled, standing-seam metal roof panels. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance class indicated. 2. Structural Performance: Capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses, based on testing according ASTM E330: a. Wind and Snow Loads. See Structural. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of metal roof panel and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of metal roof panels, including plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Include details of edge conditions, joints and joint types, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, trim, flashings, ciosures, and accessories. C. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating metal roof panel installation with penetrations and roof-mounted items. D. Samples: For each exposed finish. E Material certificates. F. Field quality-contro! inspection reports. G. Product test reports. H. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities include fabricating and installing metal roof panel assemblies and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. 1.5 WARRANTY l:!J.'l. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include the following: a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07411-10F5 METAL ROOF PANELS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Fluoropolymer Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. AEP - Span. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Company. 3. ColorKlad by Vincent Metals. 4. Merchant & Evans, Inc. 5. MM Systems Corporation. 6. Pac-Clad - Peterson Aluminum Corp. 7. Smith Steelite. 8. Copper Sales, inc. 2.2 BATTEN-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. General: Provide factory-formed metal roof panel assembly designed to be field assembled by covering vertical side edges of adjacent panels with battens and mechanically attaching panels to ................................... .......i__ ......................__1......,..1 .....Ii.....,... 1...........I.lrl...... h.....+.._........... .....I'""t,... ,,___......r-.........i_...... ...__111...._....1 +rt.t- \A1_~+h_r'+lrth+ ;:'UflflUll;:' U;:'III\:l vUllvCClICU Vllfl". IllvlUUC:; uall'c;ll~ OIIU a\.."""o~~VI n::;;-o I v\.fUII 'VU IVI VVV;Cl.l.lIVCI LI~II\. installation. S. Snap-on-Satten-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Formed with vertical ribs at panel edges and flat pan between ribs; designed for independent installation by mechanically attaching panels to supports using concealed clips located under one side of panels and engaging opposite edge of adjacent panels, and installation of 3/8-to-1/2-inch- wide, snap-on battens over panel joints. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. AEP - Span. b. ColorKiad by Vincent Metals. c. i\linJi '\Icromc f:f'\rni"\r!J:tinn IVIIVI ....., ,Vl.._1 i IV ',...n..."I P""'I ..........n..1f I. d. Pac-Clad - Peterson Aluminum Corp. e. Smith Steelite. f. Copper Sales, Inc. 2. Panel Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.0269 inch thick. a. Exterior Finish: Fluoropolymer. b. Color: Hartford Green or Forest Green. 3. Batten Material: Same material, finish, and color as roof panels. 4. Clips: 2 piece, 0.0625-inch- thick, stainless-steel sheet. 5. Panel Coverage: 16 inches nominal. 6. Batten Size: 1.75 inch high by 2.0 inches wide. 7. Uplift Rating: UL 90. 8. Acceptable Product: Batten Seam Roof System by Berridge Manufacturing Company or approved substitute. 2.3 UNDERLA YMENT MATERIALS A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM 04397. B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, minimum 5 pounds per 100 square feet, rosin sized. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING A. General: Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C645 requirements for metal and with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating. B. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated. 2. Depth: As indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head, with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws with hex washer head. ,., Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 0. B. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. C. Panel Sealants: Provide specified materials below as recommended by panel manufacturer. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release- paper backing; 1/2 inch \^Jide and 1/8 inch thick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920; as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C1311. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly inciuding trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide at eaves and ridges, fabricated of same metal as metal roof panels. 2. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips wtlere indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from O.0179-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include eaves, rakes, corners, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07411-30F5 METAL ROOF PANELS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.i PREPARATiON A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Section 07620. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Polyethylene Sheet Underlayment: Install polyethylene sheet on roof sheathing under metal roof panels. Use adhesive for anchorage. Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches. B. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. 3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge, unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations. Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting of metal roof panels by torch is not permitted. ') Dirtlrlh, fl'.:!o~tnn n"~H/n. nnri nf m.nt<'::lli rl"'\nf Y'\~n.o.iC' "=1nrf !':IIilt"'\\A1 rinrto. .o.nri fro.a r"n1"\\Io.rno.nt rfllO tn L.. 1"~l\.UY IO.;:llQII V"OVV' vllU VI Illv\'CU IVUI tJOllvlv t;;A11\.A c;.AIIVYV 'IU~V '-'IIU 11'-'''' 11IVYVlI.IVII\. "-"1\.."'... ,,_ thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Provide metal closures at peaks, rake edges, rake walls, and each side of ridge and hip caps. 4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end laps to avoid a 4-panellap splice condition. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal roof panels to allow moisture to run over and off the material. B. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the inter!or. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized- asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of aluminum roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. D. Joint Sealants: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07920. 3.4 FIELD-ASSEMBLED METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self-tapping fasteners. 2. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool so t""lin l""Y\.o.f--:t.1 Yr'\.l"\f r"\",="n.ol ":::Inri f~t""tnn'-"=,,n.nJj.orl conl~nt -nro ,...nrYH'\I.oto.l\I o.nrl~rt.o.rI vup, 111"-'\.0.1 IVVl PUII",""l, UllU lUV\.Vl J--UPpIlVU\JVU1\,..nll. VI V' VV1111""'''''\.''-''lJ V'l~U~::p"'-U. METAL ROOF PANELS 07411 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.5 ACCESSORY INSTAllATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. 2. Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07411 - 5 OF 5 METAL ROOF PANELS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Exposed Grid Suspension System (SUSP-1): 1. Material: ASMT C635, hot dipped galvanized steel with baked polyester paint finish 2. System: 15/16 inch exposed Tee grid. 3. Rating: Non-fore-rated. 4. Color: White. 5. Acceptable Products: a. Armstrong World Industries: Prelude 15/16". b. USG Interiors, Inc.: Donn OX. c. Chicago Metallic, Inc.: 200 Snap-Grid. B. Metal Edge Molding: 1. Manufacturer's metal or extruded aluminum standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system specified. 2. For acoustical tile screwed to suspension system, provide edge moldings at ceiling perimeters and where indicated. 3. For lay-in suspension systems, provide suspension system manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PANEL SYSTEMS A. ACP-1: Provide this ceiling panel for corridors and other common areas. 1. Suspension System: SUSP-1 " Acoustical Panels: Type iii, wet-formed minerai fiber panel with factory-applied vinyl latex L.. paint finish a. Size: 2 foot by 4 foot by 5/8 inch b. Edges: Reveal Lay-In c. NRC: 0.60 d. CAC: 40 e. Class A per ASTM E1264 f. Color: White g. Pattern: BET-154 h ~v1anufacturer: BPS America inc. or approved substitute. " . ACP-2: Provide this ceiling panel for guest bathrooms. 1. Suspension System: SUSP-1 2. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264, Type XX, gypsum board-based with membrane-faced overlay; Form 1, nodular, with washable vinyl-film overlay. Clean room and USDA approved, humidity resistant, without visible sag. a. Size: 2 foot by 4 foot by 5/8 inch. b. Edges: Sealed. c. NRC: NA. d. CAC: 45 to 49. e. Class A per ASTM E84. f. Color: White. g. Pattern: Fine texture. h. Finish: 0.002 inch thick vinyl face and back. i. Manufactured Units: 1 ) Clean Room ClimaPlus by USG Interiors, Inc. or approved substitute. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times desian load indicated in ASTM C635. Tahle 1 "Oired Hllnn " ..... .- ..- - ~. - ~--_. - . 1 - -- - - - . --- .01 unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ C'11l\AI\AAn"\/ 1.1 ",UIVIIVIM.r\. I A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Samples: For each acoustical panel, for each exposed suspension system member, for each exposed molding and trim, and for each color and texture required. D. Product test reports. E. Research/evaluation reports. 1.3 QUAliTY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory. 1.4 EXTRA MATERiALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Suspension Systems: Subject to conformance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. BPS America Inc. 3. Chicago Metallic Corp. B. Acoustic Units: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. BPB America Inc. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09510 - 1 OF 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY J. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor finish. K. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. L. Apply grout sealer to grout Joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09310 - 5 OF 5 TILE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Beginning of installation means installer accepts condition of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding Work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. E. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowel able leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material manufacturer's written instructions. F. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. G. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing. H. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tiie surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A 108 Series "Specifications for installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. r> Extend tile Work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete v. covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate Work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Layout tile Work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. F. Layout tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. H. At showers, tubs, and where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11. I. Install waterproofing per ANSI A 108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce \^/ate-rproof membrane of un~fcrm th{c-kness bonded securely to substrate. 1. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. TILE 09310 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Standard Latex-Portland Cement Mortar or Bond Coat: ANSI A 118.4. 1. Water emulsion acrylic latex additive: Add at Project site to prepackaged dry mortar mix recommended by latex manufacturer. C. Special tile setting mortars will be considered by Architect when complete technical data is submitted in advance. 2.5 GROUT MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in Tile Council of America, latest Edition, "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", in colors selected by Architect from standard colors available from approved manufacturers. B. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: 1. Materials: a. Portland cement: Comply with ASTM C150, Type I or II. b. Sand complying with ASTM C144. c. Hydrated lime: Comply with ASTM C206. d. Water: Clean, potable, free of foreign matter. 2. Where this grout is indicated on Drawings, or is otherwise directed or required, provide a job- mix consisting of: a. Joints less than 1/8 inch wide: 1 part cement to 1 part fine graded sand. b. Joints 1/8 to 1/2 inch wide: 1 part cement to 2 parts fine graded sand. c. Joints wider than 1/2 inches: 1 part cement to 3 parts fine graded sand. d. Up to 1/5 part lime may be added. C. Polymer-Modified (Latex) Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7: Commercially prepared polymer type acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 1. Unsanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and narrower. 2. Sanded grout mixture for joints 1/8 inch and wider. 3. Secure Architect's written approval of proposed material prior to use. D. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to approval of Architect. '" '" ""rl H,rC""loI 11"""\1 nC" '::.0 In~CQnVLI..JQ A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 12 per ASTM C1353 or ASTM C241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining unless indicated otherwise. C. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials. D. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, nickel silver exposed-edge material. E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09310 - 3 OF 5 TILE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. 2. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. ') I _..f'........... 1.......1,..,................."':_....._( I.......... v. L-QUIt:;;11 IIllClllOUUllQl, III\". 4. U.S. Ceramic Tile Company. 5. Substitutions: No substitutions allowed. B. Mortars, Adhesives, and Grouts: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. C-Cure. 2. DAP, Inc. 3. Hydroment from Bostik Findley. 4. Laticrete International, Inc. 5. Mapei Corporation. 6. \AI n n____1 "'_____.. VV.". DUII::Sdl vUlllfJdllY. 7. Substitutions: No substitutions allowed. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Ceramic Floor and Wall Tile: ANSI/TCA A 137.1. Conform to the following: ~ Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent I. 2. Size: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full size options. 3. Edge: Cushioned 4. Surface Finish: Unglazed 5. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. B. Ceramic Base Tile: ANSI/TCA A 137.1; match floor tile for size, moisture absorption, surface finish, and color at locations except match wall tile in public restrooms. Conform to the following: 1. !nternal Corner: Caved. 2. External Corner: Coved. 2.3 WATERPROOF AND ANTI-FRACTURE MEMBRANES A. Waterproof Membrane: Thin, load-bearing waterproofing system. Cold-applied, self-curing, liquid rubber polymer, with integral reinforcing fabric that forms a seamless waterproof membrane with a minimum uniform thickness of 1/16 inch. Non-flammable, non-toxic, and compatible with thin~set or mortar-set application methods. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane. b. Laticrete International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. c. Mapei Corporation; PRP M19. d. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; S-9000. B. Anti-Fracture Membrane: Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous-Sheet Product: Self-adhering SBS-modified-bituminous sheet with woven reinforcement facing for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 36 inches wide by 0.040-inch nominal thickness. 1. Acceptable Product: a. National Applied Construction Products, Inc.; Strataflex or approved substitute. 2.4 SETTING MATERIALS A. Comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of Tile Council of America (TCA) "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation". TILE 09310 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09310 TILE PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ SUrviiViARY 1.1 A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic and porcelain floor, wall, and base tile. 2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 3. Waterproof membrane for thin-set tile installations. 4. Crack-suppression membrane for thin-set tile installations. 5. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints. C. Samples: 1. Each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type, composition, color, and finish of tile. ':l Stone thresholds in 6~inch lengths. v. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to "Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines" (ADAAG) criteria for the following: a. Static Coefficient of Friction: Appendix to ADAAG, in Section A4.5 defines slip-resistant as a static coefficient of friction of 0.6 for floor areas and 0.8 for ramps. Use ASTM """AJ"'\.I"'\O ''''-1.-_ (""'-1:_ llAl_.L__\ L__.L _____-1..___ L__ L_LL. ..._.1. __-I -1__ ___-':___ \." IVLO ~ 1111:: vllJJ IVll::ll::l), ll::::;l JJIV\,;I::UUII::::; IVI UVlII Wl::l ClIlU UlY II::ClUIIIY::;. 1 ) Manufacturers: Certify that products meet or exceed these requirements. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work. Obtain ingredients for setting and grouting materials of a uniform quality from 1 manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component, and from 1 source or producer for each aggregate. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Replacement Materials: After completion of Work, deliver not less than 2 percent of each type, color, and pattern of tile and base, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation. Provide accessory components as required, and replacement materials from __...____ ....._......-1. .._+:............. _. '._ _._ ___..1.__:__.1._ :......._.L__.I.I._..J n___II___ __._I___~_._J. __,1.__:__1._ ...:J.L ___,L__J.:.._ ;:)alln::; jJl UUUl..,llUll 1 Ull a;:) lllal1:::lIal;:) II l;:)ldll1:::U. r dI..,Kd~1::: 11:::fJldLJ1:::III1:::111 Illdl1:::1Idl;:) WlU I fJl Ul1:::\,;llV1::: coverings, identified with appropriate labels. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09310 - 1 OF 5 TILE CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish per manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 4. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish per manufacturer's written instructions. C. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish per manufacturer's written instructions. D. Gypsum Board Finish levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, per ASTM C840, for locations indicated: 1. level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicatedf,. 2. level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. 4. level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. 5. level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. 3.6 APPl YiNG TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage per texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations. r=i\li""\ Ai Qr-r-""rif"\.f\i CI"LJ LJr Qcc\-..! IV!\! GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 6 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Partition and Soffit Framing: 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall. 2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. ':! c~.......""""'_ rl.____ __.......____.("'0 +_ ....."n"'._h, \,ui+h ~^ aon ""'H""I,.rt \,.I.Il..h r'l\U""".("II~ h___l"',.I n""Io"'rt..llf..."......+.U..,.H..'("' v. I lalllv UVVI Vpvlllll~.:l LV vVlllfJlY VVIU I '-,JI\-VVV OIIU VVU.II ~YfJ"UIII UVOI U IIIOIIUIO\JLUI 'Cil v applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for Cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install 2 studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. 4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. D. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Section 07210 - Building Insulation. 3.4 PANEL PRODUCT INSTAllATION A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches on center for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches on center. ':i On ceilings, appiy gypsum panels before \Nail/partition board appiication to the greatest extent v. possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 4. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than 1 framing member in alternate courses of board. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 5. _ __ -... r .. _' _ _ ___ _ ___.1_ _ _.. _ _ _I __.. __ _. ..._ __ __ _ I ". . II f II" r . '\ "II I' . . { In / _Tllrnnn mprnnpr<::. ::::Innl\l n\ln~llrn n~nPI<;;: \/prnr::ul\! I n~r:;:UU::11 Tn Tr;:::lrnlnnl \AllIn nn pnn Inlnrc:. _'I - ..........~ ...........~..."....,' -t"t"'J ;::JJt'............... t"-..-.", ........................J \,......................... L"", .._......~I .......L.. ....... .......""" J-........... locate edge joints over furring members. 6. Single-layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 7. laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporariiy brace or fasten gypsum panels untii fastening adhesive has set. B. Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Instal! with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 3. Cementitious Backer Unit Application: ANSI Ai 08.11. 3.5 FINISHING A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim per manufacturer's written instructions. B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. 1. Prefill open joints, beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09260 - 5 OF 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY K. Vapor Retarder Materials: 1. (VR-1) Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07210. l. Building Paper: 15 pound, non-perforated, asphalt saturated felt complying with ASTM 0226, Type I. M. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect. 2.5 SPRAY TEXTURE FINISH A. Provide multi-purpose texture finish. 1. USG Light-Stipple or approved substitute. B. Texture Finish: Non-aggregated, non-asbestos powder producing light to medium-light textures on drywall or other interior surfaces. Dries to a soft-tone white finish. Over-paint walls per of Section 09900, but ceilings may be unpainted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board construction attaches or abuts. Verify pre-set hollow metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of gypsum board construction. n Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate conditions. D. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ceiling Anchorage: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling anchors in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacing required to support ceiling. 1 Provide concrete inserts and steel deck devices indicated to other trades for installation well in .. advance of time needed for coordination with other construction. 3.3 NON-lOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTAllATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C754, and ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing: 1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit. 4. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 4 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY F. Gypsum Sheathing (GYP.BD-25): Manufactured per ASTM C1177, glass mats both sides and long edges, water resistant core, non-combustible per ASTM E136, Type X per ASTM C36 when tested per ASTM E119. 1. Maximum framing spacing is 16 inches on center. 2. Size: 5/8 inch thick by 48 inches wide. 3. Edges: Cut square. 4. Acceptable products: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation: Dens-Glass Gold Sheathing. b. USG: Fiberock Sheathing. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 1 O-by-1 0 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Joint Compound: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. " Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 0. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-drying, non-skinning, non-staining, non-bleeding, gunnable type as recommended by manufacturer for use in conjunction with gypsum board. E. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; formed galvanized steel angle, minimum base steel 0.014 inch thick, sizes as required to suit substrate. F. Casing Bead: ASTM C1047; formed galvanized steel trim, minimum base steel 0.014 inch thick, sizes as required to suit substrate. G. Control Joints: ASTM C1047; extruded vinyl formed with V shaped slot covered with removable flexible vinyl strip. H. Jointing System: 1. Provide a jointing, including reinforcing tape and compound, designed as a system to be used together and as recommended for this use by the manufacturer of the gypsum board approved for use on this Work. 2. Jointing compound may be used for finishing if so recommended by its manufacturer. I. Fastening Devices: 1. For fastening gypsum board in place on metal studs and metal channels, use flat-head screws, shouldered, specially designed for use with power-driven tools, not less than 1 inch long, with self-tapping threads and self-drilling points. J. Laminating Adhesive: Compound specifically recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for laminating gypsum board to unit masonry substrates. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09260 - 3 OF 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645, 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. a. Framing at Fire Rated Doors: 0.0312 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated. C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track. D. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak [attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip]. E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 2.3 GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of the core and surfaced with paper on front, back and long edges; Type X, UL rated. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness, 2. I=rlnA~' ~nll"'rA {'lit t",nArAd --""";:I........... -'"1.....-....... ....,.....~1 .._t""_1 -_. C. Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C630; gypsum core wail panel with additives to enhance the water resistance of the core. Surface with water repellent paper on the front, back, and long edges. Provide fire-rated where required by design or by applicable building code. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Square cut, tapered. D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C36; gypsum core ceiling panel with additives to enhance the sag resistance of the core. Surface with paper on the front, back, and long edges. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch thickness. 2. Edges: Square cut, tapered. E. Cement Board: Cement board formed in a continuous process of aggregated Portland cement slurry with polymer coated glass fiber mesh completely encompassing edges, back, and front surfaces. Type X, UL fire-rated. 1. Maximum framing spacing is 16 inches on center. 2. Size: 5/8 inch thick by 36 inches wide by 5 feet long. 3. Edges: Cut square. 4. Product: USG DUROCK: SA932. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - 2 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 C'I I~^~^ ^ DV 1.1 VUIVIIVIr\I'\.1 A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum wallboard. 2. Tile backing panels. 3. Non-load-bearing steel framing. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated per ASTM E90 and classified per ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Interior Metal Framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the roiiowing manuracturers: 1. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 2. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 3. Gold Bond Building Products. 4. Unimast, Inc. 5. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630. B. Gypsum Materials: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. G-P Gypsum Products. 2. Gold Bond Building Products. 3. United States Gypsum Company (USG). 4. Substitutions: Comply with Section 01630. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A653/A653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09260 - 1 OF 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Glazing 1. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located 1/4 of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6 inches from corner unless otherwise required. Set blocks in this coarse of sealant that is acceptable for heel bead use. 2. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing, to preserve required face clearances except \^Jhere gaskets or glazing tapes 'vvith continuous spacer rods used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 3. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. 4. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers. 5. Force sealant into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 6. Tool exposed surface of sealant to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slight!y out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect giass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If despite such protection, contaminating ", substances encounter glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. END OF SECTION GLASS AND GLAZING 08810 - 6 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Preformed Butyl-Polyisobutylene Glazing Tape: Manufacturer's standard solvent-free butyl- polyisobutylene formulation with a solids content of 100 percent; complying with AAMA A-804.1; in extruded tape form; non-staining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; packaged on rolls with a release paper on 1 side; with or without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape and glass for application indicated. 2.7 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Extruded Type II silicone rubber, ASTM 02240, Type A, 80-90 Shore A Durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing, or minimum 4 inch by width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. Black color. D. Spacer Shims: Silicone, 50 to 60 Shore A Durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long by 1/2 the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on 1 face. E. Edge Blocks: Silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required limiting lateral movement (side-walking) of glass. PART 3 - - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Clean glazing channels, stops, and rabbets to receive the glazing materials, making free from obstructions and deleterious substances that might impair Work. 1. Remove protective coatings that might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealant. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately prior to application of primer and glazing compounds or tapes. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 HANDLING A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealant, gaskets, and other glazing materials, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. Use a foiling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings. Do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Remove from Project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealant. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08810 - 5 OF 6 GLASS AND GLAZING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Insulated Tinted Glass Units (GL.10A): Performance Classification per ASTM E77 4, Class CBA, exterior pane tinted float glass, annealed; interior pane Clear float glass, annealed: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch each pane, 1/2 inch air space, overall unit thickness 1 inch. 2. Evergreen by Pilkington Building Products or approved substitute. O. Insulated Tinted Low-E Glass Units (GL.12A): Performance Classification per ASTM E774, Class CBA; exterior pane tinted float glass with low-E coating on No. 2 surface; interior pane clear float glass, annealed: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch each pane, 1/2 inch air space, overall unit thickness 1 inch. 2. Evergreen by Pilkington Building Products or approved substitute. E. Insulated Tinted Low E Safety Glass Units (GL.13A): Performance Classification per ASTM E77 4, ASTM C1048, ANSI Z97.1 and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Class CBA; exterior pane fully tempered tinted safety glass with Low E coating on NO.2 surface; interior pane clear safety glass, fully tempered: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch each pane, 1/2 inch air space, overall unit thickness 1 inch. 2. Evergreen by Pilkington Building Products or approved substitute. F. Aluminum Door Glazing: 5/8 inch insulated consisting of 3/16 inch tempered, clear, FS, 00-G-451, ~ . - ~.. . - . -. . ... <( - - . ... ._. --- . .. . . . . ~raae Ij, ~tYle 1, Iype I, Glass 1, quality q-, Tree OT tong marks, AN~I L8f.1, extenor and Intenor boards, 1/4 inch air space. Purge air space with dry, hermetic air. Low-E coating on interior board surface number 2, ASTM E 774. 1. For use in aluminum exterior doors. 2.5 MIRRORS A. NO.1 quality, minimum 1/4 inch thick float glass mirror, beveled edges, guaranteed for 10 years against silver spoilage. 1. Sizes and locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Backing: Shatter-proof mirror backing tape, ASTM 01709, ANSI Z97.1; applied full width of mirror without gaps. 3. Mounting: Full length mechanically fastened J-tracks, top and bottom, and adhesive. ,)Co ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANT AND GLAZING TAPES L..U ^ Genera!: Provide products of type indicated and complying \^Jith the foiic\.^Jing requirements: A. 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealant and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealant and tapes that have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C920 requirements, including those for type, grade, class and uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealant indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. 1-Part Non-Acid Curing Silicone Glazing Sealant: Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and as applicable to uses indicated, and 0; and complying with the following requirements for modulus and additional joint movement capability. 1. Medium Modulus: Tensile strength of not less than 45 nor more than 75 PSI (0.5 M Pa) at 100 percent elongation when tested per ASTM 0412 after 14 days at 77 degrees F and 50 percent relative humidity. ') Additional Capability: Test per ASTM C719 for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic It... movement, to withstand maximum 40 percent increase and decrease of joint width, measured at time of application, and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C920. GLASS AND GLAZING 08810 - 4 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3. Guardian Industries. 4. Interpane Glass Company. 5. Pilkington Building Products. 6. PPG Architectural Glass. 7. Nippon Electric Glass Company. 8. Monsanto Company, Inc. 9. Viracon. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C1 036, Type 1, transparent flat, Class 1 Clear, quality q3 glazing select. 1. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch overall. B. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT fully tempered Condition A, non-coated, Type 1 transparent flat, quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1. 1. Thickness: Minimum 1/4 inch overall. C. Interior Fire-Rated Glass: Laminated, fire-rated glass polycarbonate, with 20 minute UL label. 1. Thickness: 0.88 inch nominal. 2.3 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS A. Laminated Glass: Provide 9/16 inch and 1 inch insulated glazing units for exterior openings from manufacturers specified in Section 08520. ,.., A SEALED It~SULATlt~G GLASS tv1ATERIALS L.Ll- A General: 1. Pre-assembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass enclosing a hermetically sealed, dehydrated air space, and complying with ASTM E774 for performance classification indicated, as well as with other requirements specified for glass characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design, and desiccant. 2. Heat-treated panes of kind and at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, heat- strengthened panes where recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated, and tempered \'vhere indicated, or where safety glass is designated or required. " f""\_-S:_______ _L..____J.__:_J.:__ -'__!___J._-' __ ___.1._-' :____1_1.:__ _1___ ___ ____=__1 ___1____ L___-I 0. r-~IItJl((II_1II(:~ r:rli-:lli-H:U-!IISIIt:S (J~SI(IIIr1IH(J {H 1:{)nIH(l IIISIII.....IIIUJ (Jli-iSs. ;..tIH IlCHllHlril Vi-iIlIHS ()I-iSHII . -..-....-..-- -..-.----..--.-- ---.>:;1.----- -- ------ "'--'-."';;:;;1' 0'--- -.- ...,........-. .----- ----- on manufacturer's published performance values for units with 1/4 inch panes of glass and 1/2 inch thick air space. 4. U-values indicated are expressed in the number of Btu's per hour per square foot per degree F difference. 5. Sealing System: Dual Seal: a. Primary sealant = polyisobutylene. b. Secondary sealant = silicone. 6. Spacer Material: Aluminum. 7. Desiccant: Low Nitrogen Absorbing. 8. Corner Construction: Bent/Soldered. B. Insulated Glass Units (GL.10): Performance Classification per ASTM E77 4, Class CBA; exterior pane clear float glass, annealed; interior pane clear float glass, annealed: 1. Unit requirements: a. Visible Light Transmittance: 79 percent b. Shading Coefficient: 0.83 c. Winter U-Value: 0.48 BTU. d. Summer U-Value: 0.55 BTU. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch each pane, 1/2 inch air space, overall unit thickness 1 inch. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08810-30F6 GLASS AND GLAZING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY D. Certification: Submit certificates from respective manufacturers attesting that glass and glazing materials provided for Project comply with requirements. 1. Separate Certification will not be required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program involving a recognized certification agency or independent testing laboratory acceptable to Architect. E. Compatibility and rt....dhesion Test Report: Submit 'vvritten statement from sealant manufacturer indicating that glass and glazing materials have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant and interpreting test results relative to material performance, including recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Glass Association of North America (GANA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual", except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards. B. Safety Glazing Standard: \^Jhere safety glass is indicated Oi required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide type of products indicated which comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units permanently marked, either on spacers or at least 1 component pane of units, with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing organization indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC), or Associated Laboratories, Inc. (All). D. Single Source Fabrication Responsibility: To ensure consistent quality of appearance and performance, provide materials produced by a single fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source for each type and class required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. During storage and handling of glass products, provide cushions at edges to prevent impact damage. B. Protect glass and glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions, and as required to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide 10 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship provided are guaranteed against defects; including coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure, inter-pane dusting or misting, and replacement of same, after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS OR FABRICATORS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers or fabricators: 1. CardinallG 2. Falconer Glass Industries. GLASS AND GLAZING 08810 - 2 OF 6 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 08810 GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ ClII\AI\.t^DV 1.1 vUIVIIVIr'\I,\ I A. Section Includes: 1. Glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: a. Windows. b. Doors. c. Glazed entrances. d. Mirrors. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Design glass and glazing materials of this Section to provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier: a. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. b. To utilize inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for continuity of air and vapor seal. c. tv1::iint;:Iin c:nntini iCli is ;:Iif ~nd V::lnCl( h::irriAf thrni iCihni it nl~7Ad ::iSSAnlhlv frnnl nl::lss n~nA .~.~...w~... --......---- ~.. -..- '-r--' --...-. ....--v..--. v'---- ----...-'J "-'" v'--- i-"- to heel bead of glazing sealant. 2. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated per applicable building code. 3. Limit glass deflection to flexure iimit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 4. Provide glass and glazing that has been produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealant or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glass and glazing materials, and other defects in Work. '" f'.Jormai Thermal ~y~ovement: nofinori noroin !:lC: th!:llT rocllitinn Trnm ~n !::Irnhiont ~. L...o'_.III......._ 11_1_111 'l.AV \.11'l.A\. .......".n....IUII:::;1 "......111 l"AII 11",..(111....,1...,11.. temperature range of 120 degrees F and from a consequent temperature range within glass and glass framing members of 180 degrees F. b. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Defined herein as failure of hermetic seal due to other causes than breakage which results in intrusion of dirt or moisture, internal condensation or fogging, deterioration of protected internal glass coating, if any, resulting from seal failure, and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Glass Types: Provide structural, physical, and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements. 2. Glazing Compounds: Provide chemica!, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, and special application requirements. Identify available colors. B. Samples: 1. Minimum 12 inch square Samples of each type of glass indicated (including assembled insulating glass types) illustrating color and finish. 2. Minimum 12 inch long bead of glazing sealant andlor gasket, illustrating color as selected. C. M::lnllf::ldllrl:~r'<::: In<:::t::lll::ltinn In<:::tn Idinn<:::' Inrli(,::ltA <:::nAI"i::l1 nrA(,::llltinn<::: rAOIlirArl ..--. .------. -. - .. .___n__._". o. .___ _____" .-- o. '-'--'"_ -r------ r- -____.._.._ . _...,_.. ___. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 0881 0 - 1 OF 6 GLASS AND GLAZING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Qualified independent testing and inspecting agency will perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Testing Services: Perform testing and inspecting of installed windows as follows: 1. Testing Methodology: Perform testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance per AAMA 502, by applying same test pressures required to determine compliance with ^ AIlAA'.....t\AI\A''"'^ ..,0...11 C'to 1"'\. =_ M._-J.'" nn.....-&.....______........._ n......_..:_....._____....4......" ^....4:......I...... J-V-'I.IVII-VI\lVVVVUM IV II!.v.L III rail I rt::llVllllallvt:: n.t::LjUIlt::IIIt::IIl;) f"\llIvlc;. 2. Testing Extent: 3 windows as selected by Architect and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. Test windows immediately after installation. 3. Test Reports: Prepared per AAMA 502. C. Remove and replace windows where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional 'Nork with specified requirements. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08520 - 5 OF 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY E. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units, complete with anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections, as indicated. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design loads of window units. F. Subframes: Provide subframes with anchors for window units as shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than 0.062-inch- thick extruded aluminum. Miter or cope corners, and weld and dress smooth with concealed mechanical joint fasteners. Finish to match window units. Provide subframes capable of withstanding design loads of window units. G. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Section 08810 and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 3-Coat System: ~.~anufacturer's standard three=coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2605. 2. Color: White. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ^ Install windows level, plumb, square, true to iine, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, 1-\. anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction. B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction. ,-. Install 'vvindows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture 'J. migrating within windows to the exterior. D. Metal Protection: Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials by complying with requirements specified in "Dissimilar Materials" Paragraph in Appendix B in AAMAJNWWDA 101/I.S.2. E. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. F. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. G. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. H. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period. ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by window manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish, but not less than 22,000 PSI. Ultimate tensile strength, a yield of 16,000 PSI complying with ASTM B221. 1. Minimum wall thickness: 0.062 inch. 2. Frame Dimensions: 2-1/2 inch face and 5 inch depth. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non- corrosive and compatible with aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components of window units. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners on exterior, except where unavoidable for application of hardware. Match finish of adjoining metal. 2. Provide non-magnetic stainless steel Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, where required, or special tamper-proof fasteners. 3. Locate fasteners so as not to disturb the thermal break construction of window units. D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Depending on strength and corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate units of aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or hot-dip zinc coated steel or iron complying with ASTM A386. 2.2 GLAZING A. Glass: Clear, insulating-glass units complying with Section 08810 - Glass and Glazing. B. Glazing: Factory glaze with manufacturer's minimum 9/16 inch heat-strengthened safety glass. 1. Set glass on two 1/4 inch thick, 1 inch wide, and 3 inch long neoprene setting blocks and against a minimum 1i8 inch thick glazing tape, bedded in a seaiant that is compatibie to the edge sealant on the insulated glass. Hold glass in place by extruded aluminum glazing stops containing a minimum of 1/8 inch thick neoprene gaskets. Place perimeter bead of silicone at exterior, sealing glass to glazing leg. 2. Glazing leg and beads: 3/4 inch minimum in height. Install glass with nominal 1/4 inch edge clearance from metal frame. 3. Test insulated glass units, certify, and carry the respective IGCC-CBA level certification number on glass spacer. 2.3 iNSECT SCREENS A. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. ~ Locate screen on outside of window unit. I. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard. B. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.011-inch- diameter, coated aluminum wire. 1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Charcoal gray. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum windows, in sizes indicated, that comply with requirements and that meet or exceed AA.MAlNWWDA 101/1.8.2 performance requirements for the following window type and performance class. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows. 1. Single-Hung Windows: HC. 2. Fixed Windows: HC. B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing. C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and ventilator. D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08520 - 3 OF 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of units resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, distortion, opening of joints, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads and stresses on glazing and connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. H. Specific Product Performance Requirements: Comply with Section 2.2 of AAMAlNWWDA 101/I.S.2 as applicable to types of aluminum windows indicated. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of aluminum window indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other Work, and operational clearances. 1. Include structural analysis data indicating structural test pressures and design pressures from basic wind speeds indicated and deflection limitations of glass framing systems, signed and sealed by licensed professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Product test reports. Submit with Shop Drawings. E. Maintenance data. 1,4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMAiN\/VWDA 101/I.S.2, 'Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with the Florida Building Code: 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows that fail in materials and workmanship within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. S. Provide warranties for the following periods: 1. Metal Finishes: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Glass: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 II C ^llll"'V'\il""'lII~. c+......\l'.t"'V'Il C'..._n'" I~r;.nn/l~c.nf\ co_.....;......,.. I. V. v. ~lU)1.ln.1U'JI-I. VtVllllJIVlll lU....:JVVJ1\.,;JVVV vCllC.\:). 2. PGT Industries, Inc. Series SH-701 WinGuard single hung aluminum window ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ C'11~nA^DV 1.1 '..HJIVIIVIr\I'1 A. Section Includes: 1. Single-hung, impact-resistant windows. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size required by AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2. B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the following, including \^Jind loads based on passing AST~v1 E330, at basic \vind speed indicated: 1. Deflection: Based on passing AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2, Uniform Load Deflection Test or on glass framing system designed to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on structural computations. 2, Dade County Protoco! PA 220-94 a. Safety Factor: 1.65. b. Design 65 PSF (159 mph) c. Structural plus or minus 97.5 PSF (195 MPH) 3. Large Missile Impact Test: Test per Dade County Protocol PA 201-94 with a 9 pound 2 by 4 traveling at 50 FPS. 4. Forced Entry Resistance: Test with 300 pound force applied to active door panel simultaneously with 150 pound force applied in both perpendicular directions to 300 pound force. a, Dade County Protocol PA 220-94 5. r."rl"" I ,,;:,rl T""",t. Tact nOr n;:,rla r.", mhl Prf"\tf"\l'nl PL\. ':>fl1_QA ff"\r Q fIfIfI """lac -J""'- ---....... . -........ ,-....... t"-. ......--- --"""""y I ._..___. I '" 4_ I ....,...,. ._1 V,VVV VYVlvv. C. Air Infiltration: Comply with ASTM E 283 band the following: 1. Storefront: 1.00 cfmlft2 @ 6.24 psf = (5.08 L1s/m2) 2. Pair of Doors: 1.00 cfmlft2 @ 6.24 psf = (6.10 L1s/m2) " Closed and Locked Operating Sash: Maximum rate not more than to 0.10 CFM per minute ,). per lineal foot of sash perimeter when tested at 6.24 per square foot pressure difference per ASTM E283. 4. Fixed Window: Closed and Locked Operating Sash: Maximum rate not more than 0.6 CFM per minute per square foot when tested at 6.24 per square foot pressure difference per ASTM E283. D. Water Resistance: No water leakage per AAMA/NWWDA referenced test methods at a water test pressure equaling 12 foot-pounds per square foot when tested per ASTM E331/ASTM E547. 1. Dade County Protocol PA 202-94 E. Condensation-Resistance Factor: Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 52. F. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with conductive thermal transmission (U-Value) not more than 0.60 BTU/HrlSF/O degrees F when tested per AAMA 1503. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08520 - 1 OF 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY G. Signage: Provide caution signs on each automatic entrance door, visible from both sides of door. Mount caution signs with centerline 58 inches above finished floor. 1. Emergency Breakaway Panels: Provide emergency breakaway sign visible to egress side of each automatic entrance door that has emergency breakaway capability. Mount signs adjacent to lock stile with centerline between 36 and 60 inches above finished floor. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspector: Owner will engage a certified inspector to test and inspect automatic entrance doors and prepare test and inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Certified inspector shall test and inspect each automatic entrance door to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards. 1. Inspection Report: Certified inspector shall submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. C. Repair or remove Work where test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, wi!! be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional Work with specified requirements. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation, for weathertight closure, and complying with requirements in BHMA A 156.10. 8. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts. C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. END OF SECTION SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08461 - 8 OF 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. r. Hinh-PArfnrmrmC:A Ormmic: Finish (3-C08t FllJoronolvmer): AA-C12C40R1 x {Chemical Finish: -- "'0" - ---- -.---- -'0,;}- - - ,- --- -----t---J --, - - - - ----- --- ---- ,--.- ..---- - - ..- cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 3-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluoropolymer color coat, and clear fluoropolymer topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: White. D. Concealed Steel Items: Prime with iron oxide paint. E. Liquid strippable coating: Apply in shop to prefinished surfaces to protect finish during fabrication, shipping, and fie!d handling. F. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting r.ontRd sllrfRr.AS with hitllminolls nRint --..---- --..---- ...-.. -.--......--- ,--'--- B. Entrances: Install automatic entrance doors plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 16 Sections. D. Activation and Safety Devices: Adjust devices to provide detection field and functions indicated. E. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08810 - Glass and Glazing. F. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07920 - Joint Sealants to provide weathertight installation. 1. Set framing members, thresholds, bottom-guide track system, and flashings in full sealant bed. ;f") Co__1 __...:.........._+_... _.; f..._..........:......_ .........._..........h_...'" ..,;.J.h .....__l_.......~ L.. ""-''COl pCJlIll'Ot.vl Vl llCUJlII1H lllCJIIU'Vl;:t 'iVIUI ;;)COlo.lll. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08461 -7 OF 8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY D. Sliding Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components complying with AAMA 701; made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing. E. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard nylon brush sweep mounted to underside of door bottom. 2.8 FABRICATION A. General: Factory-fabricate automatic entrance door assembly components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. 1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. 3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, fabricated from stainless steel. a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices. b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. B. Framing: Provide automatic entrance doors as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other vVork before shipment to Project site. 1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies v/ith manufacturer's standard- \tvelded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads. ') Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces. L.. 3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. e; Fabricate exterior cornponents to drain \^Jater passing joints and condensation and moisture u. occurring or migrating within system to exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units. C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware. D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing. E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, per GANA's "Glazing Manual." F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory- installed hardware before applying finishes. 1. Provide sliding weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of sliding doors. G. Activation and Safety Devices: Factory install devices in doors and headers. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08461 - 6 OF 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Electromechanical Operators: Self-contained overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation including spring closing with power off. 1. Operation: Power opening and power closing. 2. Features: a. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. b. Adjustabie backcheck and iatching. c. Adjustable hold-open time between 5 and 20 seconds. d. Obstruction recycle. e. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator. f. Energy conservation switch that reduces door-opening width. 3. Mounting: Concealed. 2.6 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Combination Motion/Presence Detectors: Self-contained units; consisting of both motion and presence detectors in a single metal or plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection field sizes and functions requiied by BHMA A 156.10. 1. Motion Detector: K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds. a. Provide capability for switching between bi-directional and uni-directional detection. b. For 1-way-traffic entrance doors, deactivate detector on egress side when doors are fully closed. 2. Presence Detector: Infrared-scanner units; with relay hold time of not less than 2 to 10 seconds, Keep detectors active at all times. B. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed. C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. D. Opening-Width Control Switch: 2-position switch that in normal position allows sliding doors to travel to full opening width and in alternate position reduces opening to a selected partial opening width. 2.7 HARDW ARE A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance door and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish. B. Emergency Breakaway Hardware: Provide release hardware that allows panel to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any position in sliding mode. Maximum force to open panel shall be 50 foot-pounds per BHMA A156.10. Interrupt powered operation of panel operator while in breakaway mode. C. Deadlocks: Manufacturer's standard deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn; with minimum 1-inch- long throw bolt; BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1. 1. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08710 - Door Hardware." a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system. 2. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A 156.5, Grade 1. 3. 2-Point Locking: Mechanism in stile of active door leaf that automatically extends lockbolt into threshold. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08461 - 5 OF 8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125- inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch nominal width. 3. Rail Design: 6-1/2-inch nominal height. C. Sidelites: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- deep sidelites with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. D. Glazing: As specified in Section 08810 - Glass and Glazing. E. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance door units to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller tracks. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access. 1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 pounds per leaf over spans up to 14 feet without intermediate supports. a. Provide sag rods for spans exceeding 14 feet. F. Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nyion- or delrin-covered baU=bearing=center steel v"heels operating on a continuous ro!!er track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly. 1. Rollers: Minimum 2 ball-bearing roller wheels and 2 antirise ro!!ers for each active leaf. G. Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and bottom-guide track system, with stainless-steel ball-bearing-center roller wheels. 1. Configuration: No threshold across door opening and surface-mounted, roller-guide track system at sidelites. H. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. J. Caution Sign: BHMA A 156.10; 6 inches in diameter, with minimum 1/2-inch- high, black lettering on a yellow background with words "CAUTION AUTOMATIC DOOR." K. Emergency Breakaway Sign: BHMA A 156.10; red background with 1-inch- high contrasting letters with words "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." 2.5 DOOR OPERATORS A. General: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1. Door Operator Performance: Provide door operators that will open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind pressures. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08461-4 OF 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Design for sliding automatic entrance doors is based on Model Unislide OC-S by Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide named product or a comparabie product by one or the roiiowing: 1. Biparting-Sliding Units: a. DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America. b. Dor-O-Matic, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. c. EFCO Corporation. d. Gildor, Inc. e. Horton Automatics; Div. of Overhead Door Corporation. f. KM Systems, Inc. g. Nabco Entrances Inc. h. Sierra Automatic Doors, Inc. I. Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B221. ..., Sheet and Plate: ASTM 8209. L. 3. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. B. Sealants and Joint Fillers: Refer to Section 07920 - Joint Sealants. C. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C11 07; of consistency suitable for application. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. " " AI ....,...,.....A A A"'T'"I"-" r-l\.I-rr"'t.A Po.I,..,.r- r-'\.r"\.r'\.1\ A C"C'r-'1li.IInl I.,..... L.0 r\U I LlIV;!-\. Ilv CI'II rtj-'d'lLrC UVVf\ !-\00CIV!DLIC0 A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrance door assemblies including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance Door: 1. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelite on each side. a. Traffic Pattern: 2 way. b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only. c. Mounting: Between jambs. 2. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence detector. 3. Activation Device: Motion detector mounted on each side of door header. 4. Safety Devices: Presence detector mounted on each side of door header. 5. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), sidelite(s), and header with high-performance organic finish (3-coat fluoropolymer. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. i. Nominai Size: i -3/4 by 6 inches. 2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08461 - 3 OF 8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project and who employs a certified inspector. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADM. C. Certified Inspector: Certified by AAADM. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel per AWS 01.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum." E. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10. F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. G. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress. H. Pre-Installation Meetings: Conduct meeting at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01310 - PiOject Management and Coordination. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete floors for recessed sliding tracks. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3. B. Templates: Obtain and distribute, to parties involved, templates for doors, frames, and other Work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic entrance doors. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide 2 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects, inciuding coverage for electrical motors and transmissions, after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or repiace VJith neVi materials, at no expense to Ovvner. C. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrance door assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS 08461 - 2 OF 8 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 08461 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ QIIUUADV I.' V\JIVIIVU""'"\I" I A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior biparting-sliding, automatic entrance door assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08710 - Door Hardware. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide automatic entrance door assemblies capable of withstanding structural loads based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. B. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Windborne-Debris-Impact-Resistance- Test Performance: Provide automatic entrance door assernblies that pass large and small missile-impact tests and cyclic-pressure tests per ASTM E1996. D. Operating Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 130 degrees F. E. Opening-Force Requirements: 1. Egress Doors: Not more than 50 foot-pounds required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 foot-pounds required to open door to minimum required width. 2. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 foot-pounds. F. Closing-Force Requirements: Not more than 30 foot-pounds required to prevent door from closing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Inciude plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other Work. 1. Include wiring diagrams. 2. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. D. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance door. E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and certified inspector. F. Field quality-control test and inspection reports. G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. H. Maintenance Data: For door operators and control systems. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08461 - 1 OF 8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood doors as recommended by door manufacturer to assure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION WOOD DOORS 08210-40F4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHi Al "IS-iN series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire- rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. ')g \^JOOD DOOR FINISH!NG L...oJ A. General: Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWl System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. ':; Staining: Selected from manufacturer's fuB range. v. 4. Effect: Open-grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. 6. Painted Doors: Comply with Section 09900. 2.7 PREFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE A. Verify requirements of Section 08710 for templates and proper clearances. B. Back bevel doors where gaskets are used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. B. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTAllATION A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames per NFPA 80. B. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08210 - 3 OF 4 WOOD DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Provide the following warranties during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. b. Hollow-Core Interior Doors: 2 years. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Buell Door Company. 3. Fenestra Corporation. 4. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 5. Vancouver Door, Inc. 6. VT Industries, Inc. 7. Weyerhaeuser Company. 2.2 SOLID CORE WOOD-FACED DOORS A. Description: 1. Interior door, rated as required (See door schedule). '1 Face Veneers: Stain grade birch premium veneer or pre-finished veneers as indicated. L. 3. Finish: Factory-applied finish as indicated on the drawings. a. Color: Mohawk premium "red" 2000 standard color. 4. Grade: Premium Closed Grain. 5. Construction: 7 ply. 6. Cores: B. Particleboard core for doors with up to a 20 minute fire rating. b. Mineral core for doors with up to a 1 1/2 hour fire rating. ')~ HOLLOW CORE DOORS L..V A. Description: 1. Guest closet and guest bathroom doors face finish veneers: Colonist textured per Mohawk. 2. Finish: Factory-applied finish as indicated on the drawings, L-4000 - off white (by Mohawk) 3. Grade: Paint grade 4. Construction: Standard hollow core. 7 ply, hollow ladder, mesh, or cellular core. 5. Frame and trim color to match - off white L-4000. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops (Non-Rated): Manufacturer's standard flush wood molding glazing stops; prepared for flush finish nails and adhesive. B. Glazing Stops (Fire-Rated): Rolled metal type designed to conform to UL 10B requirements; prepared for countersunk style tamper proof screws. WOOD DOORS 08210-20F4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL .. .. C'llf\Af\A^DV 1.1 0UIVIIVI/'"\I'1 A. Section Includes: 1. Solid- and hollow-core doors as follows: a. Doors with wood-veneer faces and factory finishing. b. Doors with hardboard faces. 2. Factory fitting wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: indicate iocation, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details; location and extent of hardware blocking; mortises, holes, and cutouts; factory finishing; fire ratings; and other pertinent data. C. Samples: For each face material and finish. .; ..:t '-li ii\i iTV fiC:C:i iOLif\ir-r:: ,.v '-XVr-\L.1 I I r-\\.JV\.JI '\.Fl.' ~"""'I- i\ Quality Standard: Comply with AWl's ",,\rchitectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated." ". B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40 inches or less above sill. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ^ Do not deliver 'vvood doors to Project site untH v.Jeatherproof storage space is avaiiabieJ and building M. is enclosed, warm, and dry. B. Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of WDMA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in wet or damp areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than 1 week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. D. Identify each wood door with individual opening numbers that correlate with designation system used on Shop Drawings for wood doors, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environment: Do not deliver or install wood doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized, and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWl Quality Standard, including Section 100-S-11 "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content". ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08210 - 1 OF 4 WOOD DOORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY J. Frame Construction: 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide temporary spreader bars. 2. Provide terminated stops where indicated. K. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied hardware may be done at Project site. L. Locate hardware as indicated or, if not indicated, per ANSi A250.8. M. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- thick steel sheet. 1. Provide non removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. N. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.6 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANS I A250.1 0 for acceptance criteria. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 iNST ALLA TiON A. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SOl 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Wall Anchors: Provide at least 3 anchors per jamb. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. 2. Fire-Rated Frames: Install per NFPA 80. B. - .... ," .- . '.1. AI.'_I ^_....""" Shim as necessary to cornpiy \^!!U-l SO! 122 and uoor !nS1:an8l!On: ( ~nrnnl\l 'AllYn our\.L....... IJ. /~II 1"\ ~~...t-'.J ...... ... .-. . -~~.~. ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. C. After installation, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames and touch up prime coat with compatible air-drying primer. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08110 - 3 OF 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A653/A653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. 2.3 DOORS A. Interior Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical- endurance level indicated. 1 Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B, Mode! 2 (Seamless). 2. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A, Model 2 (Seamless). B. Exterior Doors: Complying with ANSI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical- endurance level indicated. 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A, Model 2 (Seamless). 2.4 FRAMES A. General: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. B. Frame Steel Sheet Thickness: 1. O.053-inch- for !eve! 2 stee! doors. 2. 0.067-inch- for level 3 steel doors. C. Door Silencers: 3 silencers on single-door frames and 2 silencers on double-door frames. D. Plaster Guards: 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings. E. Supports and Anchors: Not less than O.042-inch- thick zinc-coated steel sheet. 1. Masonry Wall Anchors: O.177-inch- diameter, steel wire complying with ASTM A510 may be used in place of steel sheet F. inserts, Boits, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Zinc-coat items that are to be built into exterior walls per ASTM A 153/ A 153M, Class C or 0 as applicable. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI.A250.8 free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. B. Exterior Doors: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of O.053-inch- thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors from cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces a door complying with SOl standards. E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Door-Edge Profile: Beveled edge. H. Tolerances: Comply with SOl 117. I. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware per final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSi A 115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY DOCUMENT 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL A A ("\1lt\..~A.^rn./ 1.1 0UIVIIVIMf'\ , A. Section Includes: 1. Steel doors and frames. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include door designation, type, level and model, material description, label compliance, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. B. Door Schedule. Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings. ~ '} QUALITY ASSURANCE I .oJ A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing per NFPA 252. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 1 year written warranty, including replacement, re-finishing, and re-hanging. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. 2. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. 3. Curries Company. 4. Kewanee Corporation (The). 5. Pioneer Industries Inc. 6. Republic Builders Products. 7. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand. B. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A366/A366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A620/A620M, Drawing Steel (OS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A569/A569M, Commercia! Steel (CS), Type 8; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 08110 -1 OF 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. B. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Acoustical sealants are specified in Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. f"' I_",.f......ll .....__1__+ h..........I....i.__..... .,...f h(ru"" ;_~i......"'+_rl for'\. ......l U"'\.i""-_"'+ ~^_l_nfl'" rl. u..inn .....nnli......~+i.r\n .....t""\,rt .....+ nr'\~ai.("'\n V. 111"'1.011 O:>'C:'ClIQII\. uavT\.III~.." VI "YfJ'CI 1I1\..lI\,.rCl\.'GU \.V ,;;)utJtJV11. .::>V;ClICllll.:;:J UUIIlI~ OtJtJllvOllVl1 OIIU en t-'V..:lII.IVII required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. c Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing I. begins, tool sealants per requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193, unless otherwise indicated. G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07920 - 5 OF 5 JOINT SEALANTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY I. Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal, Vehicle Traffic Construction/Control Joints) (SLNT-23): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; multi-component, self leveling, pourable, moisture curing polyurethane joint sealant. 1. Use for horizontal surface joints; such as concrete floor and paving joints, slab/wall junctions, etc. 2. Hardness: Shore A Hardness 37 minimum after 14 day cure at 70 degrees F. 3. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 5. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.: Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.: NP 2. c. Tremco: Vulkem 227. d. Tremco: Vulkem 322 OS. e. TREMCO: HPL High Point Load. f. Approved Substitutions. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, as recommended by joint sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. B. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by manufacturer to suit application. ,-, Joint Backer Rod: Soft, round, closed ceil polyethylene rod designed for use with cold applied joint '-' . sealant passing ASTM C1253. Provide backer rod of size required for joint design. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by joint sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARA,TION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil- free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY E. Silicone Building Sealant HP: Medium modulus, non-staining 2-part silicone, eleastomeric joint sealant formulation that requires mixing prior to use. 1. Use at exterior locations of metal panels. 2. Movement: Extension/compression capability of up to plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Warranty: Special 20 year limited warranty. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 5. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 756. b. Approved Substitutions. F. Silicone Building Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; 1 part silicone formulation. 1. Use for structural and non-structural glazing of glass, metal, EIFS, and concrete; adhering stiffeners to building panels, perimeter sealing of doors and windows, etc. 2. Movement: Plus or minus 50 percent. 3. Hardness: Shore A of 30. 4. Warranty: Special 20 year limited warranty. 5. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 791. b. Dow Corning Corporation: 795 c. GE Silicones: SilPruf NB SCS9000. d. GE Silicones: UltraPruf II SCS2900. e. Pecora Corporation: 865. f. Pecora Corporation: 895. g. Pecora Corporation: 898. h. Approved Substitutions. G. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; non-sag, medium-modulus, low modules, chemical curing, non-staining, 2-cornponent polyurethane joint sealant. 1. Use for exterior joints exposed to view where norma! movement is anticipated; such as masonry control joints, window and door perimeters, louvers, relief angles, slip joints, copings, joints in wall sheathing, etc. '1 Movement: Plus or minus 25 percent. "-. " '"""_1_____ '-"_I__.L_--.I L__ ^~_L!.L__.J. ,c___.__ ________E__L.____'_ _.L__.-I__.-I __1___ .w. vu!ur~: veH~{;lf:HJ uy .I-\[r;,;flnet;!. HUn! H!af!U!cH":;lurer ::s ~tcH!UarU t.;u!ur~_ 4. Products: a. Pecora Corporation: DynatrollL b. Sika Corporation, Inc.: Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.: NP 2. d. Tremco; Vulkem 227. e. Tremco; Vulkem 322 OS. f. Approved Substitutions. H. Polyurethane Sealant (Horizontal, Except for Vehicle Traffic Areas): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50; 2-component, non-sag, self-leveling, pourable, moisture curing polyurethane joint sealant. 1. Use for horizontal surface joints such as concrete floor and paving joints, slab/wall junctions, etc. 2. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 3. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 4. Movement: Plus or minus 25 percent. 5. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 6. Products: a. Pecora Corporation: Dynatrolll-SG. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.: Sikaflex - 2c SL. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.: SL 2. d. Approved Substitutions. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07920 - 3 OF 5 JOINT SEALANTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Joint Sealants: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Bostik Findley. 2. ('",,.li,,,l,,, nc:::(' ~UIII...:lI""'" '.at'-J"-J. 3. Dow Corning Silicone Sealant. 4. GE Silicone Sealant. 5. Morton Industries - Thioko!. 6. Pecora Corporation. 7. Sika Corporation, Inc. 8. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc. 9. Tremco. 10. MAMECO International, Inc. - VULKEM. B. Joint Sealant Backers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the follovving manufacturers: 1. Sof Rod by Nomaco 2. Soft Backer Rod by Sonneborn. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834, non-sag, gun-grade, single component acrylic latex sealing compound, mildew-resistant, white. 1. Use for sealing interior joints at countertops, vanities, backsplashes, tubs, plumbing fixtures, and other joints not otherwise listed herein. 2. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones: Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco: Tremsil 200 White. d. Bostik Findley: Chern-Calk 600. e. SONNEBORN: Sonolastic SONOLAC. f. Approved Substitutions. D. Butyl Sealant: FS TT-S-001657, Type I; single component, gun-grade butyl rubber joint sealant. 1. Use at concealed spaces; such as under thresholds, flashing, etc. 2. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Products: a. Bostik Findley: Bostik 300. b. Fuller: H. B. Company; SC-0296. c. Fuller: H. B. Company; SC-0288. d. Pecora Corporation: BC-158. e. Polymeric Systems Inc.: PSI-301 f. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.: Sonneborn Multi-Purpose Sealant. g. Tremco: Tremco Butyl Sealant. h. Approved Subsiiiutions. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL -1: -1: CIII\AI\.AADV 1.1 \J\.JIVIIVU'''\I'I A. Section Includes: 1. Joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: a. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. b. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. c. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. d. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ^ Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. r\. B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Pre-construction field test reports. D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. E. Product test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURAt-~CE A. Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing per manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 1. A minimum of 10 days prior to starting Work of this Section, submit test reports to Architect including results of test failures and passes. B. Pre-construction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates per method in ASTM C1193 that is appropriate for types of Project joints. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects. Include coverage for installed joint sealant and accessories, which fail to achieve airtight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure, after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period at no expense to Owner. 2. Acrylic Latex and Butyl Sealant: 1 year warranty. ') ca:__r"l_ C__l...........+ __~ ^....Ih......,...i..,_. ,,{'\ ".1__'" ,.._......_........., V. VIIl\"VIIG VOOIOIIl QIIU r\UIIC..:.:>IVV'. LoV yea} VVOII 01 It y. 4. Polyurethane Sealant: 5 year warranty. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07920 - 1 OF 5 JOINT SEALANTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. Clean porous joint and opening substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods, to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces and other surfaces not scheduled for firestopping and equipment from damage by fall-out and dusting. B. Close off and seal ductwork in areas where firestopping is being applied. 3.5 INST ALLA TION A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniforrn surfaces that are flush with adjoining finistles. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect through- penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop instaliations comply with requirements. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean off excess firestopping and firestopping smears as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of products in which firestopping occurs, and leave finished Work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillover or damage to adjacent surfaces. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect firestopping during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce firestopping installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original Work. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Dam Material: Mineral fiber matting permanent, or other type recommended by manufacturer. 1. Retainers: Clips to support mineral fiber matting. B. Primer, Sealant, and Solvent Cleaner: Types recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify with mechanical and electrical for openings and penetrations required to be sealed. B. Examine penetrations, surfaces, and openings to receive firestopping, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for configurations, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting firestopping performance. Do not proceed with installation of firestopping until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A. General: 1. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and, if indicated, whether such material is designated as insulation, safing, or otherwise. 2. Do not install insulation types specified in other Sections in lieu of firestopping material specified herein. B. Penetrations: 1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, pipe, duct, or other elements that pass through 1 or both outer surfaces of a fire-rated floor, wall, or partition. 2. Provide firestopping to fill spaces, except for floors on grade, where a penetration occurs through a structural floor or roof and a space would otherwise remain open between surfaces of penetration and edge of adjoining structural floor or roof. Comply with ASTM E814 and UL 2079 for dynamic movement. 3. Provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around penetration where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of solid type construction. Comply with ASTM E814. 4. Provide firestopping to completely fill spaces around penetration where penetrations occur at fire-rated walls or partitions of hollow type construction, on each side of wall or partition. Comply with ASTM E814. 5. Penetration requirements apply whether or not sleeves have been provided, and whether or not penetrations are to be equipped with escutcheons or other trim. If penetrations are sleeved, firestop annular spaces between sleeves and wall of opening. C. Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and openings in fire-rated construction in a manner essentially the same as specified herein before. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Firestopping: Clean out joints and other areas of application immediately before installing firestopping to comply with recommendations of manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove foreign material from joint and opening substrates which could interfere with adhesion of firestopping, including dust and paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by manufacturer; old joint sealants; oil; grease; waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt, and frost. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07840 - 3 OF 4 FIRESTOPPING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG per FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors ." B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems in Project to a single qualified installer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, OPL ITS, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed per specified requirements. E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Bio Fireshield, Inc. 2. 3M Fire Barrier Systems and Sealant. 3. Hevi-DutyiNeison Firestop Systems and Sealant. 4. Hilti Firestoo Svstems and Seal;:mt - - .. - 1- - J - - - - - - - --.. -" - - -.. --- --- 5. International Protective Coatings (lPC). 6. Isolatek International - Cafco TPS. 7. TREMCO Firestopping Systems. 8. USG Firestop Systems and Sealant. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealant: i-part elastomeric sealant formulated for use as part of a through-penetration firestop system for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes, and similar penetrations through rated walls and floors. TCA listed by UL. 1. Use at penetrations through floors and other fire-rated assemblies where voids are 1 inch or less in size. 2. Use at construction joints at fire-rated walls and partitions at concrete masonry unit walls and gypsum board partitions. B. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces. C. Provide firestop mortars, sealants, putties, collars, mastics, and wrap strips necessary to complete Project in an approved manner. FIRESTOPPING 07840 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07840 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL .. .. SUtv1tv1ARY 1.1 A. Section Includes: 1. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire per requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 2. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E814: a. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. b. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through~penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: 1) Penetrations located outside wall cavities. 2) Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures. 3. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. a. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture- resistant through-penetration firestop systems. b. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. c. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration fires top systems not requiring removal of insulation. 4. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E84. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire- protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07840 - 1 OF 4 FIRESTOPPING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip c-hoot i'"'\r toe-tooll ~ l"'rUI.TC-.o. of t"'\f"'\.I\l.o..th\llan.a. 1 tonarl-:l.\Im.a.nt ~11'-"'-"\.7 VI III";',"UII U VVUlvv VI PVIJ'VUIJIVII"" ull'Uvln..,(J111V'U.. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Seal joints with sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07720 - 3 OF 3 ROOF ACCESSORIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.2 METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting. B. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Steel sheet metallic coated by hot-dip process and prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A755/A755M. 2.3 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Load Requirements: Verify with manufacturer or roof top equipment. 2. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. a. Finish: Prime painted. 3. Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 4. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 5. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 ROOF HATCHES /J.\,. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches \.vith insulated double-vvafl lids and insulated single-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware. 1, Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-foot-pounds per square foot external and 20- foot-pounds per square foot internal loads unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. 3. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick, 4. Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid board-type insulation. 5. Interior Lid Liner: ~Aanufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. 6. Exterior Curb Liner: Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 8. Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INST ALLA TION A. General: Install roof accessories per manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. ROOF ACCESSORIES 07720 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07720 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 C'II~A~A^DV 1.1 VUIVIIVIr\I" I A. Section Includes: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Roof hatches. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required clearances and tolerances, and other affected Work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory-applied finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. D. Certification from roof curb manufacturer stating that coordination with manufacturers of roof top units and equipment has been performed and that roof curbs will be manufactured per each specific piece of root top equipment. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1.4 'vVARRANTY A. Provide 2 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Curbs: 1. Custom Curb, Inc. 2. Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 3. ThyCurb. B. Roof Hatches: 1. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc. 2. J L Industries, Inc. 3. Nystrom Products Co. 4. Wasco Products, Inc. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07720 - 1 OF 3 ROOF ACCESSORIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SHEET METAL WARRANTY Owner: Owner's Address: Proiect: Proiect Address: Proiect No. Date of Final Acceptance: Sheet Metal Contractor: Sheet Metal Contractor's Address: Sheet Metal Contractor's Phone No.: Roofinq Contractor: This warranty stipulates that above-named Contractor(s) shall, during a period of 5 years from date of final acceptance of Work, maintain sheet metal flashing systems and repair defects that result from faulty work- manship or defective materials, without further cost to Owner. Excluded from this warranty may be any and all damage to said roof, buildings or buildings contents caused by acts or omissions of Owner; fire, lightning, winds with peak gust speeds of 72 mph or higher, hailstorm, or other unusual phenomenon of elements; movement or failure of supporting building structure that causes membrane or flashing failure; or vapor condensation beneath roof. Exclude from this warranty damages to building or contents. Before expiration of above warranty period, Contractor(s) shall inspect sheet metal in presence of Owner and make necessary correction of deficiencies not considered normal. The warranty shal! remain in force until necessary repair ilVork has been completed. SHEET METAL CONTRACTOR ROOFING CONTRACTOR Siqned: Siqned: Title: Title: Date: Date: SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07620 - 3 OF 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. 1 . Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized paper, minimum 3 pounds per 100 square feet. C. Membrane Flashing: Fully self-adhering, self-healing, composite flexible flashing, total 40 mil membrane consisting of 36 mils of pliable, highly adhesive rubberized asphalt, completely and integrally bonded to a 4 mil, high density, cross-laminated polyethylene film. D. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless=steef rivets. E. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. F. Sealant: Comply with Section 07920. {~ Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound. ...... I-i Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mii dry fiim ". thickness per coat. 2.4 FABRICATiON, GENERAL A. Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop-fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. ,.., Seams for Other Than Alurninurn: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock L. seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpanding but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. D. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal, and in thickness not less than that of metal being secured. 2.5 FABRICATED UNITS A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 10-foot- long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and[ interior leg. Miter corners, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Fabricate copings from 0.050 inch thick aluminum. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL ~ ~ l"".l u...~.. ^ r-nJ 1.1 ..:> U IVIIVIJ-I.ri. I A. Section Includes: 1. Formed roof flashing and trim for low-slope and steep-slope roof conditions. 2. Formed wall flashing and trim. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: Two 6-inch sections for each type of sheet metal flashing and trim. ~ '"' QUALITY ASSURANCE I.';:> A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. .. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Integris Metals. 0 Hickman Construction Products. "-. 3. Pac-Clad by Peterson Aluminum. 4. Metal-Era Roof Edge Systems. 5. ~v1~v1 Systems Corporation. 6. Una-Clad by Copper Sales, Inc. 2.2 SHEET METALS A. General: Use pre-finished metal for items exposed to view in finished Work. Use unfinished galvanized metal for items not exposed to view in finished Work. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. Mill Finish: Standard 1-side bright. 2. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat, thermocured system containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 2604. a. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Sheet Metal: Flashing and trim not exposed to view: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper, ASTM A526, except ASTM A527 for lock-forming, G90 hot-dip galvanized, minimum 24 gauge except as otherwise indicated. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07620 - 1 OF 4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY E. Install modified bituminous roofing membrane sheet per roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 degrees F. F. laps: Accurately align roofing membrane sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. G. Install roofing membrane sheets so side and end laps shed water. 3.3 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTAllATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates per roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. D. Install roofing membrane cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on membrane roofing per roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. ') A \IV ALK'vV A Y INST ALLA !iON .J.'+ ^ \"Valkway Pads: Install walkway pads using units of size indicated or, if not indicated, of /'\. manufacturer's standard size per walkway pad manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 4 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.7 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C728, perlite insulation board. ~ Woocl N;::jilAr Strins' ~omnlv with rAOIlirAmAnts in SAdion OR100 - ROlloh ~;::jrnAntrv -. -._-- .------ ----r-- -----r-,; ------ --,------------ n_ -------- -- "-- - ---'3'- ---r-----J" 2.8 W All0N A YS A. Walkway Pads: Mineral-granule-surfaced, reinforced asphaltic composition, slip-resisting pads, manufactured as a traffic pad for foot traffic and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer, 3/8 inch thick, minimum. 1. Pad Size: 24 inch square. 2. Granule Color: Gray. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSULATION INSTAllATION A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. B. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at junctures of roofing membrane system \,AJith vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 1-1/2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges or roor that do not terminate at vertical surfaces. F. Mechanica!!y Fastened Insulation: Instal! each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mp("'h,::mi("'::I1 f::lc::tpnprc:: c::nprifi("'::Ilh, npc::innpn ::Inn c::i7pn for f",c::t",ninn cn",rifipri 'hn::lrri_hln'" rnnf ................-........-. .-......-........-....... -,....-..............-..J ......_.......~.._..... -........ .....--- ........ .-........-.....::J .....,....--...-- ...,......-...... "Jt""- .--. insulation to deck type. 3.2 ROOFiNG MEMBRANE INSTAllATION A. Install roofing membrane system per roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and appiicabie recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guideiines for the Appiication of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." B. Coordinate installing roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing membrane system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. C. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. D. Install 1 lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Attach base sheet as follows: 1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07552 - 3 OF 4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING CAPE CAN A VERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Firestone Building Products Company. 2. Johns Manville International, Inc. " Sipiast, inc. 0. 4. TAMKO Roofing Products, Inc. 5. Tremco, Inc. 2.2 SBS-MOOIFIEO ASPHALT-SHEET MATERIALS A. Roofing Membrane Sheet: ASTM 06163, Grade S, Type I or II, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; smooth surfaced; suitable for application method specified. B. Roofing Membrane Cap Sheet: ASTM 06163, Grade G, Type I or II, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS- modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: Gray. 2.3 BASE-SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Sheet: ASTM 04897, Type II, venting, nonperforated, heavyweight, asphalt-impregnated and _ coated, glass-fiber base sheet with coarse granular surfacing or embossed venting channels on bottom surface. 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS A. Flashing Sheet: ASTM 06163, Grade G, Type I or Ii, glass-fiber-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: 1. Granule Color: Gray. 2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible vvith roofing membrane. B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM 041. C. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM 0312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application. O. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM 04586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate, tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C1289, Type II, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to siopes indicated. MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07552 - 2 OF 4 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 07552 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Three-ply SBS-modified bituminous membrane roofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03521 - Lightweight Insulating Concrete. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mop-applied roofing asphalt and 75 centipoise for mechanical spreader-applied roofing asphait, within a range of plus or minus 25 degrees F, measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. C. Samples: For each product included in roofing system. D. Research/evaluation reports. E. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from or approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects, or replace with new materials, faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period at no expense to Owner. C. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation and signed by manufacturer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. Failure includes roof leaks. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 07552 - 1 OF 4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Nickel-Copper-AlIoy Wire: ASTM B164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch O.135-inchdiameter wire. C. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMiNATION A. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with o'ther Work. A'<', . ' !; - 3.2 INSTAllATION ^ ,....._____1: Instal! acoustical panel ceilings to comply witrl ASTivi C636 and seismic requirements 1-\, ~.;Jt::! !t::! a!. indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiiing plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. 1. Do not suppori ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not more than 16 inches on center and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09510-30F3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09620 SPECIAL TY FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL A A SUiviiviAR'{ 1.1 A. Section Includes: 1. Woodgrain laminate flooring indicated on Drawings and specified herein; including related accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicating floor joint pattern and termination details, provisions for expansion and contraction, thresholds, miscellaneous trim, and details. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for flooring material characteristics, sizes of materials, "'.::Inri flJ"'\.J"'\r" finic-h rnl'":!;+J""'J.ri~ll" UII\..l IIVVI 11I1l~11 IIICU."VIICHv C. Samples: 1. Wood Grain Laminate Flooring: Two 24 inch by 24 inch Sample panels for each type and color of woodgrain laminate flooring material required illustrating floor material, finish, color, and finish. 2. Reducer Strips and Accessories: T\^JO i 2 inch long Samples for each type of reducer strip and accessory items required. D. Manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Maintenance Data: 1. Submit maintenance data including recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, polishes, and waxes. 1.3 QUALlFICA TIONS ^ F!ooring fv1anufacturer: Company speciaiizing in manufacturing products specified in this Section J4u with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Flooring Installer: Company specializing in installing Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver laminate flooring and adhesives a minimum of 72 hours before installation materials to permit materials to stabilize to ambient conditions. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install laminate flooring until wet construction Work is completed, and overhead mechanical and electrical trades, and painters have finished in wood floor areas, and ambient air at installation space has moisture content stabilized. 2. Provide permanent heat, light, and ventilation prior to installation. 3. Maintain room temperature of minimum 65 degrees F nor more than 85 degrees for period of 72 hours prior to, during and 72 hours after installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written warranty. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09620 - 1 OF 3 SPECIALTY FLOORING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ') of ~&^"III1=^{,TIIDI::DC .&..., IVI.r-\I'CVI r\V I VI '-L-I'\.u A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Wilsonart International, Classic Estate. 2. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Woodgrain Laminate Flooring: High pressure decorative laminate, wear resistant surfaces, and high pressure balancing backers. Bond laminate sheets to wood core material using a moisture resistant adhesive to form a composite panel. 1. Size: Manufacturer's standard sizes and thickness. 2. Colors: Provide the following where indicated by Architect: a. 3001-72 Pioneer Oak b. 3010-72 Natural Aged Cherry. B. Wood Floor Species and Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Recommended by laminate flooring manufacturer. B. Reducer Strips: Furnished by laminate flooring manufacturer for transitions from laminate flooring to other floor finish materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EX,8,~v4!(\J,6,T!Ot~ A. Inspect subfloor surfaces to determine that they are satisfactory to receive laminate flooring. Make certain that subfloors are clean, dry, free from dust, grease, wax, soap, and other foreign materials. Make certain that concrete subfloors are dry, cured, and free from crazing, dusting, spalling, and not coated with curing compounds, hardeners, or sealers. B. Verify substrates are free of substances that may impair adhesion of new adhesive and finish materials. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat, with a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 10'-0", noncumulative. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Leveling and Patching Compounds: Patch and level minor imperfections in substrate using leveling and patching compounds acceptable to laminate flooring manufacturer and compatible with required adhesives. B. Broom clean and vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect subfloor. Do not use sweeping compounds that contain oil. SPECIALTY FLOORING 09620 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.3 INST ALLA TION A. Laminate Flooring: 1. Install laminate flooring with adhesive per laminate flooring manufacturer's installation instructions. 2. Ensure each plank is firmly seated in adhesive. Roll entire floor with a 150 pound roller. B. Accessories: 1. Provide thresholds at center line of door openings and where flooring terminates with other floor areas. 2. Install hardwood molded base and trim to cover expansion space in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Miter inside corners. 3. Install laminate flooring with expansion space as recommended by laminate flooring manufacturer at room perimeter and other vertical obstructions. 4. Close area to traffic for a minimum of 24 hours following installation. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Upon completion of laminate flooring installation, instruct Owner's individuals in charge and responsible for upkeep of building, by laminate flooring installer, with regard to care and maintenance instructions for laminate flooring system. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect laminate flooring and against damage during construction period to comply with laminate flooring and base manufacturer's directions. B- Cover laminate flooring with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection for Substantial Completion. 3.6 CLE,LI..NING A. Clean adjacent surfaces that may have been abused or marred by Work of this Section. B. Remove cartons and debris from site. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09620 - 3 OF 3 SPECIALTY FLOORING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1 CI I~A~A ^ DV 1.1 VVIVIIVIf""'\I'\1 A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete floor preparation and leveling for resilient flooring. 2. Resilient flooring as indicated on Drawings and specified herein including related accessories and adhesives. 3. Resilient vinyl base. 4. Resilient vinyl reducer strips. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F! in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide 5 percent of extra materials of each type of resiiient flooring and store where directed by Owner for maintenance stock. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. VeT Flooring and Base: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries. 2. Mannington, Inc. 3. Tarkett, Inc. 4. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 5. Johnsonite, Inc. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09650 - 1 OF 3 RESILIENT FLOORING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.2 MATERIALS A. VCT Flooring: Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): FS SS-T-312, Type IV; composition 1. 1. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches by 1/8 inch. 2. Colors: Grey or beige to match to match other finish colors. 3. Feature Strips: Of same material as VCT, 1 inch wide. R RAsiliAnt R~sA' FS SS-W-40 TvnA ? vinvl r.ontinllolls Use premolded external and internal -. . ___n._.._ ____. . - -- ow --, -Jr- - ----J-} --------------- corners. 1. Resilient Flooring locations: Use top set, coved type base. 2. Carpet flooring locations: Use top set, toeless type base. 3. Height: 4 inches high, 1/8 inch thick. 4. Colors: Grey or beige to match floor tiles. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to be compatible with adhesive, and VOC compliant. 8. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof types recommended by fiooring manufacturer to suit application, and VOC compliant. C. Vinyl Resilient Reducer Strips: 1. Transition Between Resilient Flooring and Carpet: Roppe #177 or approved substitute. 2. Transition Between Resilient Flooring and Ceramic Tile: Rappe, Inc. #183 or approved substitute. 3. Transition Between Resilient Flooring and Wood Flooring: Rappe, Inc. #182 or approved substitute. 4. Colors: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates per manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resiiient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare per ASTM F710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 pounds of water per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before instaiiation. After cieaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install resilient flooring, base, adhesives, and compounds per manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Layout tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Scribe, cut, and fit resilient flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. c Extend resilient flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. r. G. Adhere resilient flooring to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. H. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09650 - 3 OF 3 RESILIENT FLOORING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL . . C'I U,AI\.AAf""\'J '.1 QUIVIIVIMrI. r A. Section Includes: 1. New concrete floor leveling and preparation to receive carpet. 2. Installation of carpet installed with Glue-Down application method. a. Adhesives and Accessories. 3. Installation of carpet installed with separate cushion underlay. a. Adhesives and Accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering !nstallation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CR1104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." . A I'lr\r"\ I '-"""'T'" """""Il tf""'\ I-r-'''''''.. I_ I .'"t rrl.VJCIv I IvVI~UIIIVI~" A. General: Comply with CRI1 04, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet and cushion until wet Work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer. 1.5 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Service: 1. Submit manufacturer's complete maintenance data. 2. ~Aaintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instiUctions for maintenance of installed Work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods that may be detrimental to finishes and performance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet and carpet cushion material will be furnished by Owner for installation under this Contract. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer to suit application. D 1"'_.........._'- r"_.:..-.o-......._. Type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application with attachment LJ. va'l-'Cl '-.:>I'I-'I-'CI. devices. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09680 - 1 OF 2 CARPET CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant. non-staining type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, compatible with carpet material, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. D. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile loss at seams. E. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. F. Provide other materials not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, subject to the approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and are ready to receive Work. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting. C. Beginning of Work means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. !mmediately prior to installation of Work of this Section, thoroughly clean substrates and remove oil, grease, paint, varnish, hardeners, and other foreign matter that would adversely affect the bond of adhesive. B. Make substrates level and free of irregularities. Assure 1 constant floor height after carpet is installed, filling low spots and grinding high spots as required. C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler. D. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. E. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.3 iNSTALLATION A. Comply with CRi 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down." And 11, "Stretch-in Utilizing Tackless Strip." B. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. C. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. END OF SECTION CARPET 09680 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09720 WALL COVERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUi'virviAR'y' A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation and Priming of new substrate surfaces. 2. Installation of nterior wall covering indicated on Drawings and specified herein. Also includes related accessories, adhesives. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies. 2. Section 10260 - Wall and Corner Guards. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qual ifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial wall fabrics with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Applicator: Company specializing in installing commercial wall fabrics with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. inspect roll materials on site to verify acceptance. 8. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.4 PROjECT CONDiTIONS ^ Environmental Requiiements: M.. A Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and ambient I. temperatures above 60 degrees F unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is below 60 degrees F or relative humidity is above 40 percent 3. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive wall covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carpet and carpet cushion material will be furnished by Owner for installation under this Contract. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Non-staining type containing mildew inhibitors, recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application. B. Pre-Wall covering Primer: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application. C. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for a complete and proper installation, approved in writing by Architect. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09720 - 1 OF 2 WALL COVERING CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive Work, and conform to requirements of wall covering manufacturer. B. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet or vary at a rate greater than 1/16 inch per foot. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply coverings unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Wash surfaces with trisodium phosphate, rinse with water, neutralize; and wipe dry. 8. Sand glossy surfaces. Sea! marks which may bleed with Shellac. C. Remove electrical, telephone, and television wall plates and covers. D. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. 3.3 INST,l'.,LLl\TION A. Apply primer, adhesive, and vinyl wall covering per manufacturer's instructions. B. Apply adhesive to fabric surface immediately prior to application of wall covering, Let contact adhesive set tack free. C. Use wall covering in roll number sequence. D. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. E. Apply wail covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight. F. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. G. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. H. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. I. Where wall covering tucks into door frame reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. J. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Replace wall plates and accessories removed prior to Work of this Section. END OF SECTION WALL COVERING 09720 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09775 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1 .1 SUiviiviAR'y' A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of substrates surfaces. 2. Reinforced plastic p~nels as indicated QD DrawinQs and sQecifie~therein. Includes related accessories and attachments. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on product characteristics, fasteners, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate wall elevations, dimensions, and joint and termination details. C. Samples: Submit line of Samples illustrating color, texture, and sheen. D. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Certification: Submit manufacturer's written certification that products and components specified and furnished meet or exceed required tests for requirements of ASTM E84 and have written approval of USDA. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. S, Applicator: Company specializing in the installation of products specified in this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: 'I. Conform to applicable building code for smoke/flame rating requirements of jess than 25 in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. USDA approved and certified panels and components. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect products upon delivery to site and replace broken and damaged panels B. Store products in a dry place free of moisture. C. Store panels flat on supported surfaces free of warpage. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 2-year manufacturer's written warranty. S. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09775 - 1 OF 3 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Provide 2 copies of the manufacturer's Maintenance Manual for complete care of fiberglass reinforced plastic panels. Submit to Owner, through Architect, for review and approval. 1. Provide plastic panel manufacturer's and supplier's names, addresses, and telephone numbers. Include for each product the product name, serial or model number, and colors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 1 of the following products: 1. Kemlite Company, Inc.: Fire-X Glasbord. 2. Sequentia, Inc.: Structoglas frp. 3. Parkland Plastics, Inc.: Plas-Tex NRP. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): Fiberglass-reinforced panels, moisture resistant, impervious to not support mold or mildew, and will not rust or corrode. 1. Optional: Fiberglass-free-reinforced panels. B. Panels: 0.090 inches thick, weight of 0.7 pounds per square foot, custom cut from bulk coils to heights appropriate for the spaces scheduled to receive FRP. 1. VVidth of panels: 4'-0". 2. Flame Spread Rating: UL Class A. 3. Smoke Developed: 200 maximum. 4. Water Absorption - 24 hours at 77 degrees F 0.4 percent. 5. Pattern: Textured. 6. Color: White. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives: Contains no volatile organic compounds (VOC), as recommended by panel manufacturer to suit application. B. Molding: Manufacturer's standard, 1 piece molding, specifically designed to accommodate 0.090 inch thick panels. Provide division bars, cap moldings, inside and outside corner moldings, and other moldings required for a complete installation. 1. Color: Match pane! finish. C. Provide other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor subject to written approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that treated wood blocking is in place and properly installed. B. Verify that substrate is sound and ready to receive Work of this section. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 09775 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces. B. Ensure wall surfaces are smooth and flat. C. Remove ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, holes, etc. with filler that is compatible with panel adhesive. D. Float and trowel filler to smooth, flat, hard surface. 3.3 INSTAllATION A. Install fiberglass reinforced wall panels and components per manufacturer's instructions. B. layout symmetrically in rooms with wall joints vertical. Verify wall layout pattern with Architect prior to start of installation. C. Use largest practical panel sizes. Avoid splices and joints between corners. D. Fit joints tight and vertical. E. Install straight, level, and plumb. F. Scribe and fit panels tightly to frames, trim, etc. G. Finish butt joints, wall juncture, wall/ceiling and wall/curb joints with the specified sealant, tooling to a smooth finish. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean panels to uniform, unblemished, unstained, and unmarked condition. B. Replace panels that are damaged in during installation. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09775 - 3 OF 3 REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL '1:1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Benchmark Samples (Mock-ups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. 1. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 square feet. 2. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.4 PRO.JECT CONDITIONS ,11,. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a weU-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. S. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 degrees F. C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 degrees F. D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: 3 percent, but not less than 1 gallon or 1 case, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore Company (Benjamin Moore). 2. Diamond Vogel Paints. 3. Pratt & Lambert Paints. 4. Pittsburgh Paint Company. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09900 - 1 OF 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS, & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.2 MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer, based on testing and field experience, B. Material Quality: Paint material containers not displaying paint manufacturer's product identification will not be accepted. C. Proprietary Names: Use of specified manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers, unless noted by the phrase "No Substitutions" or a similar phrase. Provide manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. D. Undercoats and Thinners: 1. Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coat 2. Use only thinners recommended by paint manufacturer, and use only to recommended limits, 3. Insofar as practicable, use undercoat, finish coat, and thinner material as parts of a unified !':v!':tAm of n~int finic:h -J-~-'" ...... ,............... .....""'... E. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 1, Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. F. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners, and ottler materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. G. Conform to Federal, State, and Local Regulations, including VOCNOS rules at time of application. 2.3 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT A For application of approved paint, use only such equipment as is recommended for application of particular paint by manufacturer of particular paint, and as approved by Architect S. Prior to use of application equipment, verify that proposed equipment is actually compatible with material to be applied, and that integrity of finish wall will not be jeopardized by use of proposed equipment 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by Contractor and subject to approval of Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or \^/eight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted per manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on back side. e. Sea! tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coii stock by mechanical methods. E. Material Preparation: 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign __ _1_ ._~~I_ _._ _I ___ _~_L__ malena!S ana re~!uue. 2. Stir materia! before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Exposed Surfaces: Include areas visible when permanent or buiit-in fixtures, grilies, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 2. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 3. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. G. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. H. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting soon after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1 f""\mif I'"'\rirn.o.r I""\u.or rY"Iof-":31 C'llrf~J"">a.C" +h.-:ll+ h":'::t.\IO hoan c-hnr"\ n.rir'r"\.o.rI ~n~ +1'"'\1 lJ"">hl IY'\ I'"'\-!:':Iin+.arl ,. ,-,'III\. pi n 11'-'1 VVvl 111\,,;\'\..(1 ~UIIUv,",u \.I n...1.\. I U...AVV 1..1'-"'"'11 ""'IUP pI n IlvU UII'U l.VUVIIUP pun l\.vU. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09900 - 3 OF 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. I. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators per manufacturer's written instructions. J. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. K. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical Work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. l. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. M. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. N. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. O. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even iuster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, ceior irregularity, brush marks! orange peel, nail hoies, or other surface imperfections. P. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. 3.2 CLEANiNG AND PROTECTING A. At end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 8. Protect \^!ork of other trades, '.^/hether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pi. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Shop Primed Items for Site finishing: 1. Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Exposed surfaces of lintels, roof ladders, ships ladders, overhead door frames and all other ferrous metals. 2. Metal Stairs and Railings (05510): All exposed surfaces. 3. Steel Doors and Frames (Section 08110): Exposed surfaces of steel doors and frames. B. Exterior Coats: 1. Ferrous Metal - Gloss Latex Finish (Total dry thickness not less than 4.0 mils): a. Primer: 1 coat IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 363. b. Finish: 2 coats Impervex Latex High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel No. 309. 2. Zinc Coated Metal - Gloss Latex Finish (Total dry thickness not less than 4.4 mils): ~ D.;~~.. 1 coat AcryHcrv1etaf Primer t~o. tv1-04. a. IIJI1IC1. b. Finish: 2 coats Impervex Latex High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel No. 309. PAINTS AND COATINGS 09900 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Type C - Interior Coatings: 1. Stained Woodwork - Acrylic Polyurethane Finish (Three finish coats over stain pius fiHer on open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying stain.): a. Filler Coat: (Paste Wood Filler) Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Wood Grain Filler No. 238. b. Stain Coat: (Oil Type Wood Stain) Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating Stain No. 234. c. Finish Coats: Three (3) Goats 8enwood Stays Clear High Gloss No. 422. 2. Natural-Finish Woodwork - Rubbed Varnish Finish (2 finish coats over filler on open-grain wood. Wipe filler before applying acrylic polyurethane.): a. Filler Coat: (Paste Wood Filler) Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Wood Grain Filler No. 238. b. Finish Coats: (Oil Rubbing Varnish) 2 coats Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Antique Oil Finish No. 412. 3. Concrete Masonry Units - Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel (2 finish coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 12A mils): a. Block Filler: Waterborne Epoxy Block Filler No. M-31/M-32. b. Finish: 2 coats of Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. 4. Gypsum Drywall - Latex Eggshell Finish (2 coats over primer with a dry film thickness not less than 3.8mils): a. Primer: 1 coat of Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253. b. Finish: 2 coats of Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274. h Ferrous ~v1etaJ .. Semi..Gloss Latex Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer VJith total dry fiim v. thickness not less than 4.0 mils. d. n...;___.......... 1 coat IronClad Latex LovV' Lustre ~v1etal & \^Jood Enamel f-'~o. 363. rlllllt::l. b. Finish: 2 coats Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. 6. Zinc-Coated Metal - Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 4.4 mils. d. Primer: 1 coat Acrylic Metal Primer No. M-04. b. Finish: 2 coats Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276. D. Concrete Floors - Floor Sealer ~ C;~;~h. ~v178 ~v1oisture Cured Urethane Clear vvith Anti-Slip Procedure (Se8 Industrial I. [ 1I11~11. Maintenance Coating Tab 14 IV Anti-Slip Procedure). 3.4 COLOR SCHEDULE A. Architect will provide Color Schedule after a'vvard of Contract, and paint manufacturer has been established. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 09900 - 5 OF 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10155 TOilET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL .. .. .("'\IIAAIl"-AI"""'\" 1.1 0UIVIIVIf-\K T A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate overhead-braced toilet enclosures and wall-hung urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to ADA requirements for access for the disabled. 1.4 \f\IfiOOfi"'iTV \l \lr"'\1 '-I '\.I"'\.I 'II! I I A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's written warranty, warranting materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ^ High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Units: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide r... products by one of the following: 1. Bobrick Toilet Compartments. 2. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 HIGH-PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE UNITS A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch nominal thickness. 1. Color and Pattern: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color and pattern range. B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is applied to edges before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Exposed core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture. 1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-pound density. 2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch thick. 3. Pilasters: Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches thick steel-sheet reinforcement. C. Pilaster Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 302 or 304. D. Qr~,....vo.tC' fJ:'ittinr1c \. ~tir"lln T\fno." t:'-nr nr I Lh,.~,..L-.ntC" C"+~ir'\Ir'lt.~C" co +_rt. I ~1'-A.Vl'_\.'-1 \1 I"'-HI~""J' ,"-,\.1l1UP 11p....... ....UI VI V-UIO'-'I"'-'\...;J, ..;;J\.UHllvuu ":~H.vl;;:il. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 1 0 155 - 1 OF 2 TOILET COMPARTMENTS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees, 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and WlUl corYlbination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. D09r Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out~swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at rnmn<<::)rtmantc inrli"....~+orl +1"'\ h.t:) I'::)I"I"'oC'C"ihlrlt. f_ ____1_ \ui+h rlir-""hilai_1" 'V"V111t.I\,...u 1,.11 n...d ll,."" II lUIVt...U.vU \.\..1 uv o.VVvvvlUlv LV p'CIVtJ1C VVllll UI,:)OUIIIlJC.;:). PART 3 - EXECUTiON 3.1 INSTAllATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than 3 brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and lubricate hardware per manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. END OF SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155-20F2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10265 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 4 4 r":1 U.A.l\"Ar'nJ 1.1 o U IVIIVIf-\.-.. 1 A. Section Includes: 1. Corner guards. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-test-response characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact- resistant wall-protection unit. B. Shop Drawings: Include locations and extent of impact-resistant wall protection and details of installation. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated. 1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection. D. Maintenance Data: For impact-resistant wall-protection unit. 4 ,., '" I ^ I l""'r'-' ^ ro.r". .,..... ^... I/"'t.r- 1.0 \..lUf-\LI I 1 f-\00Ur<J-\I'lvC A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire- Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. C. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full-size units of maximum length, including vinyl plastic cover and aluminum retainer, equal to 2 percent of each type of unit instalied, but no rewer than 2 units. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10265 - 1 OF 3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Floor Products Co., Inc. 2. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc. ':l. R",It"{'\ Int" ~. L.....r\.A.I"_,IIIV. 4. Construction Specialties, Inc. 5. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc. 6. Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, Inc. 7. Pawling Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic- modified vinyl plastic; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 foot-pounds force per inch of width when tested per ASTM 0256, Test Method A. B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorroding metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. Use vandal-resistant fasteners where exposed to view. C. Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer for use with material on substrate indicated. 2.3 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic Corner Guards: ~ Opaque Plastic: Embossed, resilient PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl sheet, with gO-degree turn, .. unless otherwise indicated, and formed edges. a. Wing Size: 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches by 4 feet long. b. Acceptable Product: Model VA-200 by Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Mounting: Clear self-adhesive. d. Location: Provide opaque corner guards at exposed corners of painted walls in common areas. 2. Clear Plastic: Clear, transparent polycarbonate or copolymer plastic; with gO-degree turn, unless otherwise indicated; mounting holes 8 inches on center, and formed edges. a. Wing Size: 1-1/8 by 1-1/8 inctles by 4 feet long. b. Acceptable Product: Model LG-118 Construction Specialties, Inc. c. Mounting: Countersunk screws with mounting holes 8 inches on center. d. Location: Provide clear corner guards at exposed corners of walls with wallcoverings in common areas. 2.4 FINISHES A. Plastic Color: Selected from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. 1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION 10265 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall-protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall protection system components. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. B. Install impact-resistant wall protection system components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. 1. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in finished Work. C. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along run. D. Immediately on completion of installation, clean plastic cove is and accessories using standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent. Clean metal components per manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING ^ Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, r\. ammonia-based, household cleaning agent. B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer- END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10265 - 3 OF 3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10305 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES PART 1 - GENERAL A A C"'IUAI\A^r\\./ 1.1 0UIVIIVIMr\ , A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured, zero clearance gas fireplaces including sealed glass fronts and accessories. 2. Direct venting assemblies. 3. Glass door kit. 4. Gas log assembly. 5. Rated flue, offsets, wall flashing, and mounting plate with Termination Cap. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate fire box rough opening dimensions, rough opening sizes for chimney flue, fan size, and shut-off valve location. Indicate special flue clearances for gang chimneys. B. Product Data: Provide fire box cabinet dimensions, clearances required from adjacent dissimilar construction, applicable regulatory agency approvals, and electrical characteristics of fan. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and component installation sequence, clearances and tolerances from adjacent construction. 1.3 QUAliTY ASSURANCE A. Conform to applicable building code for clearances from adjacent materials, chimney height above adjacent requirements and unit UL approval. 1.4 WARRA.NTY A. Provide manufacturer's 2 year written warranty. 8. 'Vvarrant materiais and \^/orkmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of VVork. 1 Repair defects from faulty materials or vJOrkmanship developed during the guarantee period, I. or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Heatilator, Inc. 2. Heat-N-Glo Fireplace Products. 3. Majestic Products Company. 4. Other manufacturers conforming to American Gas Association. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Size: 33 inch model for dwelling units (except 0-10 units) 2. 2 Glass door kits: Complete with heat resistant tempered all glass doors for fireplace units. 3. Polished brass trim kit ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10305 - 1 OF 3 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 4. Vent system: Complete system (including elbows) to comply with code and as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Gas Log: Composite log unit with double gas burner, pilot assembly, related valving, and wall mounted remote switch, meeting applicable city and state codes. a. Front Width: 30 inches. b. Back Width: 24 inches. c. Depth: 15-1/2 inches. d. Height: 22 inches. e. BTU input: 60,000. f. Acceptable Products: Model CFL-30 by Heat-N-Glo Fireplace Products. 6. F an Kit 7. Ignition System 8. Heat Shield 9. Fireplace surrounds (at apartment units): a. Surround 1: MAJCO Building Specialties Model "The Alexander". 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Fire Box: Minimum BTU rating of 23,000; formed insulated steel cabinet, triangular corner shaped interior, configured to include chimney outlet and c1eanout, front air inlet and integral top air outlet, and glass doors. B. Flue Construction: Stainless steel sandwich construction, modular sized sections with elbows and spacing collars to permit site assembly, air and fire stop collars, elbows, elbow offsets, tees, supports, wall storm collar; waif flashing; nomina! inside diameter of 8 inches (verify). 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Flashing: Prepainted sheet metal, configured to fit tightly to wall and seal to wall finish system. B. Wood Holder: Black iron. C. Circulating Fans: UL approved motor and fan, 120 volt, with remote variable speed control switch, sheet steel enclosure, and face grille. r. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel type. L.J . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Comply with Section 01700. B. Verify site conditions prior to beginning installation. C. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive Work and opening dimensions are as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. D. Verify that proper power supply is available. 3.2 INST ALLA TION A. Install unit assembly per manufacturer's instructions. B. Install chimney plumb through prepared openings using fire stop spacers. C. Secure chimney in opening framing with appropriate fasteners. MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES 10305 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY D. Carefully cut holes for fan wall switch and grilles. E. Install thru-wall flashings to ensure moisture is shed from chimney flue. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Chimney From Plumb: 1/2 inch. 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean and adjust Work per Section 01740. B. Clean glass and metal sections, and clean adjacent surfaces of dust, dirt, and construction debris. C. Adjust operating parts to work smoothly. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protection of finished Work per Section 01700. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10305-30F3 MANUFACTURED FIREPLACES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL A A t"'\1 U. 41\ A. ^ ,....nJ 1.1 0UIVIIVI}-\f'\ T A. Section Includes: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets for portable fire extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style, and details of installation. B. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A t\lFPA r:nrnnliMnC:A~ FRhricRtA r:inn ;Rh~1 fin~ ~)(tinoiiishRrs to conlnlv with t.JFPA 10_ "PnrtRhlA FirA . .. . -. . . . - _......~..__. . --..---- --..- ~--_. _u_ ------.0--------- -- -----r-J ___n_ - -- - - - --J - -. --"- - - - .. - Extinguishers." 8. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 COORD!NATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. 2. KIDDE Fire Extinguisher Company. 3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 4. SENTRY Fire Extinguishers. 5. NYSTROM Product Company. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from 1 of the following manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 3. Modern Metal Products by Muckle. 4. NYSTROM Product Company. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10520 - 1 OF 3 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIAL TIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Portable Fire Extinguisher: 1. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. a. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. 2. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-pound nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. a. Model MP5 by Larsen's. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. R Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated unless indicated otherwise. C. Cabinet Material: Enameled-steel sheet. D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated; with i-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1 Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth. I. ') Acceptable Product: Ambassador 1017F10 by J-L Industries, Inco or approved substituteo L.. E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. F. Doors: 1. Materia!: Enameled sheet. 2. Style: Full glass. 3. Glazing: Double-strength glass. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. a. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim permitting door to open 180 degrees. G. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket for Cabinets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. H. Finishes: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim, except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish. b. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Steel: Baked enamel, with minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. a. Color and Texture: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 2.5 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel red finish. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 - 2 OF 3 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in vertical, red letter decals applied to mounting surface. 2.6 FABRICATION A Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in 1 piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INST ALL,A.TION A Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Prepare recesses for recessed and semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. D. In~t;:J1I fim-orotAdion !';oAr.ialtiA!'; in locations and at mountina heiahts indicated or. if not indicated. at ...---.. ...- r---------. -r--- -- ._- --- ------- -- -- -- --- ----. - v --..., --.- . -. .. , , heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. F. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. G. Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated. H. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. l. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10520 - 3 OF 3 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10810 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL . . CII~UR^DV 1.1 vUIVIIVIr\I" I A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet and bath accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following. 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein. n C"'L-__ f""\...-....:.....-....... 1.....-1:.....__"'_ -1:................__:................ ..J....._......_:.........:........... ....:: """"'..................:......1_ ..........,..1 +:......:.....h........... ____........1 ....._......,.........II.....j.:......... D. vllUfJ UI dVVIIIY::>. IIIUltJdlt:: UII I 1t::1 I::>IUI I::>, Ut::::>vl'fJlIUII UI Illellt::llell::> elllU IIIII::>IIC;;:', !::IC;IIC;I ell vUII;:'lI UvllUII, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures. C. Samples: If requested by Architect. 1. 1 sample of each item and model specified. 'J 1 sam pie of finish for stainiess steet chrome plated, and aiuminum accessories~ '-. D. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Statement of qualifications. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: 1. Operating and maintenance manuals. 2. Special warranties. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience in production of specified products. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act, ANSI 117.1. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Com ply with Section 01600. B. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. C. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Protect from elements and damage. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the guarantee period, or replace with new materials, at no expense to Owner. 2. Provide guarantee from Contractor, manufacturer, and installer for installed products for a ............:.......J .-...& .... r::. . ................. .&...____ ....J.........-. _+ C\. .1.-...........__...:......1 J"'....____I........:......... _...........:............4. .................J:....:............... :.........1:....._"-_.... 1-,.....1.....,... fJt::IIVU VI I v yt::ell::> II UIII Uellt:: VI QUU::>lelllllell \JUIIlfJll;;;lIVII el\:jellll::>l vVIIUIUUII;:, IIIUlva~l;;;U Ul;;;IVW. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10810 - 1 OF 5 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY When notified in writing from Owner, promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner, correct said deficiencies. a. Deterioration of silver coating on mirrors. b. Peeling, flaking or discoloration of chrome plating. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturers: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories 2. American Infant Care Products Inc. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation. 6. Franklin Brass; a Bath Unlimited Brand. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Multi-Roll Toilet Paper Holder (TPH-1): Surface mounted, reserve roll type; 22 gauge, 304 stainless steel door and cabinet; satin finish all exposed surfaces; tumbler lock. Hem exposed edges. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0030. b. Bobrick \lvasnroom Equipment, inc.: f\.Jo.8-2888. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 5402. d. Franklin Brass: 1968. B. Toilet Paper Holder, Multi-Roll (TPH-8): Recessed mounted, double roll type; heavy gauge, 304 stainless steel, polished finish; spring loaded spindle. 1. Location: Public Restrooms. '} Acceptable manufacturers and product: L. a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 74022-B. b. Bobrick 'vVashroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-697. c. Bradley Corporation: 5125. d. Franklin Brass: 977. C. Sanitary Napkin Disposal (SND-1): Surface mounted feminine napkin disposal, 22 gauge cabinet and doors, 304 stainless steel, satin finish all exposed surfaces; full length stainless steel piano hinge on each door; top door with handle to assist opening; bottom door, held in closed position with lock or latch, swinging downward for emptying; vinyl liner in container to receive soiled napkins, 4 inches deep. Hem exposed edges. 1. Location: Public Restrooms. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0852. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-270. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 4781-15. d. Franklin Brass: 1985. D. Paper Towel CabineUWaste Receptacle (PTC-3): Semi-recessed mounted, combination towel dispenser and waste receptacle; 22 gauge, satin finish, 304 stainless steel door, cabinet and waste container; tumbler lock on towel dispenser cabinet, for mounting in 4 inch wall. Hem exposed edges. 1 . Location: Public Restrooms. 2. Towel Capacity: 300 C-fold or 475 multi-fold; 3. Waste Container Capacity: 2 gallons. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10810 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 4. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: NO.0462AD. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-369. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 2291. d. Franklin Brass: 1983. 2.3 GENERAL ACCESSORIES A. Soap Dispenser (SDISP-3): Wall mounted, 304 stainless steel, satin finish liquid soap dispenser with concealed mounting, locked filler top, polycarbonate refill window. 40 ounce capacity. 1. Location: Public Restrooms. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0342. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: Contura Series No. B-4112. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 6542. d. Franklin Brass: 1920. B. Mirror With Frame - Without Shelf (MIR-2): 1/4 inch float or plate glass, electro-copper plated mirror guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. 304 stainless steel with satin finish angle frame, 22 gauge, approximately 5/8 by 5/8 inch with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 20 gauge galvanized steel back, concealed mounting devices. 1. Mirror sizes: a. MIR-2A: 36 inches wide by 42 inches high. b. MIR-2B: 16 inches wide by 30 inches high. c. ~iiiR-2C: 30 inches "vide by 34 inches high. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 0600 Series. b. 60brick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. 6-290 Series. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 780 Series. C. Tilt Mirror With Frame: 1/4 inch float or plate glass, electro-copper plated mirror guaranteed for 15 years against silver spoilage. 304 stainless steel with satin finish angle frame, 22 gauge, approximately 5/8 by 5/8 inch with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. 20 gauge galvanized steel back, concealed mounting devices. A Frarne: Projects 4 inches at top and tapers to 1 inerl projection at bottom. !. 2. Mirror sizes: indicated on Drawings. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. Bradley Corporation: No. 740 Series. b. Comparable products from other specified manufacturers. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Facial Tissue Dispenser (FTD-1): 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Size: 12 inches by 6 inches 2-1/4 inches deep. 3. Material and Finish: a. Dispenser Face: Stainless steel, NO.7 finish (polished). b. Cabinet: Galvanized-steel finish. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: NO.0259-B. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-35521. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 987-78. d. Franklin Brass: 935. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10810-30F5 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY B. Underlavatory Guard (ULG-1): Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 1. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic. 2. Minimum wall thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Color: White at ceramic tile and beige at cultured marble vanities. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and products: a. American Graby Inc.: HC500R Trap Wrap Standard. b. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.: Pro-Extreme. c. TCI Products: Skal+Gard. d. Truebro, Inc.: Lav-Guard. C. Portable Bathtub Seat (B.SEAT-1): Portable bath seat, approximately 10 inches wide, fabricated from the following materials: 1. Seat: Alloy 18-8, Type 304, 12 gauge stainless steel, unitized welded construction, with satin finish on exposed surfaces. Provide with edges and corners radiused and burr-free. 2. Pads: 3/16 inch thick neoprene synthetic rubber with ribbed surface, permanently adhesively applied to mounting surface. .... Acceptable manufacturers and product: ,). a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 8357. b. Comparable products from other specified manufacturers. D. Shower Seat (TBA-2): Folding molded plastic shower seat in "L" shape configuration approximately 32 inches long by 12-1/2 inches and 19-1/2 inches deep with 304 stainless steel tube frame, wall h........"i.r~t ,...,nri t""'\'O""tr,,", hinrtt""\ UIOvr\.vt., CU IU pleu IV I 11I1~:ft::o. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. Bradley Corporation: No. 956 for left hand configuration and No. 9561 for right hand configuration. b. Approved substitute. E. Shower Curtain Rod and Hooks (SCR-3): Exposed mounting, 304 stainless steel, 18 gauge, 1-1/4 inch diameter curtain rod; 304 stainless steel, 20 gauge one-piece die formed mounting flanges, satin finish exposed surfaces. 1. Provide complete with stainless steel curtain hooks (4 per foot, plus 2 extra per rod). 2. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 1214 Series with No. 1200-SHU hooks. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-6047 Series with No. 204-1 hooks. c. Bradley Corporation: No. 9531 Series with No. 9536 hooks. d. Franklin Brass: 167CS. F. Robe Hook: i-piece brass casting with satin nickel-plated finish. Capable of withstanding 300 pound downward pull when properly installed. Provide with 12 gauge, case hardened concealed wall plate and related fasteners. 1. Double Prong Unit: Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No.0745-Z. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B- 819. c. Bradley Corporation: Comparable product. d. Franklin Brass: 1302. 2.5 GRAB BARS AND TOWEL BARS A. Grab Bars (GB-1): Concealed mounting, 1-1/2 inch diameter, stainless steel, satin finish. Complete with proper type of anchor for construction conditions and normally anticipated loads. Provide grab bar manufacturer's standard concealed anchor plate for stud wall construction. 1. Length: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Location: Public Restrooms. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10810- 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3. Where grab bars are mounted on dissimilar adjacent surfaces that do not meet on an equal plane, modify end post lengths as required to mount grab bars plumb and true. 4. Provide special non-slip finish on grab bars where indicated. 5. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. American Specialties, Inc.: No. 3200 Series. b. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.: No. B-6206 Series with No. 256 series Anchor Plate. c. Bradiey Corporation: No. 812 Series with 899-015 Series anchor piates. d. Franklin Brass: 5736 and 5748 where indicated. B. Towel Shelf with Bar and Support Braces (TSB-1): Die-cast zinc alloy, polished plated chrome, 304 stainless steel 19 gauge stainless steel wall plate, 5/16 inch square crossbars; 3/4 inch diameter polished aluminum extension towel bar, and 1/8 inch thick by 3/8 inch wide polished aluminum braces. 1. Size: 24 inches wide by 8-1/2 inches deep. 2. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. Franklin Brass: No. 1459. 2.6 KEYING A. Key accessories alike. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTAllATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. D Install accessories in locations indicated with anchor devices of types specified or required for given D. substrates. Fasten securely, true, plumb, and level. Drill holes to correct size and at locations that are concealed by accessory. 1. Install recessed accessories into wall openings with wood screws through cabinet side into wood blocking or studs, or sheet metal screws into metal backing or studs. 2. Install surface mounted accessories to hollow back up using toggle bolts and to metal or wood backing using proper type screws. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 foot-pounds, when tested per method in ASTM F446. 3.3 CLEANING A. Just prior to Date of Substantial Completion, clean and polish exposed surfaces. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. After completion of installation adjust accessories for proper operation. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10810 - 5 OF 5 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 10900 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIAL TIES PART 1 - GENERAL -1:1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated hat and coat racks for storage of clothing including fasteners and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product description literature covering components of system. B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions as well as assembly instructions that may be required. ~ ') '^/ ^ DD ^ ~ITV I.v V V Mr\.rv-\I" I I A. Provide 1 year manufacturer's written warranty. B. Warrant materials and workmanship against defects after completion and final acceptance of Work. 1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during guarantee period, or rt:>nl::!rA \^,ith nA\^, m::!tAri::!1<:: ::!t nn AynAn<:A tn ()wnAr . ......,....._........... .. ..... . .......... .. ............,. ............., ........ ....... ......1',......... .......... ....... _ ... ........ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 1. Magnuson Group. 2. Raymond Engineering, inc. 3. Franklin Brass; a Bath Unlimited Brand. 4. Approved Substitutions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. End Supports: 1 inch thick oak with medium stain. B. Shelf Tubes: 5/8 inch round chrome steel tubes. C. Acceptable Product: Model MC-HW A by Magnuson Group or approved substitute. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Hardware: Size and length as required by shelving manufacture. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing conditions will allow for installation of pre-fabricated shelving. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 10900 - 1 OF 2 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY 3.2 INST ALLA TION/ERECTION/ APPLICATION A. Erect and install units per Manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install units plumb. C. Screw units back to back or to wall, depending on location. 3.3 CLEANiNG/ADjUSTiNG A. Clean units prior to final inspection. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage that may be caused by Work of others. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Depth, quantity, and location of units are indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES 10900 - 2 OF 2 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY SECTION 14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 - GENERAL -I -I C'II~U~^OV 1.1 vUIVIIVIM." I A. Section Includes: 1 . Hydraulic passenger elevators. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Hydraulic elevators are hereby defined to include systems in which cars are hoisted either directly or indirectly by action of hydraulic plunger and cylinder Uack): with other components of the work including fluid storage tank, pump, piping valves, car enclosures, hoistway entrances, control systems signal equipment, guide rails, electrical wiring, roping, buffers, and devices for operating, dispatching, safety, security, leveling, alarm, maintenance, and similar required performances and capabiiities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following per Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each principal component or product of each elevator, inciuding certified test reports on required testing. Indicate capacities, sizes, performance and operating characteristics, features of control system, finishes, and similar information. Indicate any variations from specified requirements. C. Shop Drawings including dimensioned drawings showing plans, elevations, sections and large~scale details indicating service at each landing, coordination with building structure and relationships with other construction, and details of car enclosures and hoistway entrances. Including elevator diagrams to indicate elevator service to each level and include excavation requirements for jack. D. Wiring diagram detailing wiring for power, signal and control systems. E. Maintenance Manuals: Bound manual for elevator with operating and maintenance instructions, parts listing, recommended parts inventory listing, purchase source listing for major and critical components, emergency instructions, and similar information. F. Certificates and Permits: Provide Owner with copies of all inspection/acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by governing authorities to allow normal, unrestricted use of the elevators. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an installer approved by the elevator manufacturer and who has completed elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in installations with a record of successful in service performance. B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations, comply with applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators (*hereafter referred to as the "Code"). 1.5 WARRANTY ^ C___i....1 I:l..._:__+ \^1_......_.....,&....4 Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, installer, and ". V!-,"'IJIOI .'Vj"'v' VVOIIOII'Y. Manufacturer agreeing to replace repair, or restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 14240 - 1 OF 5 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY work during warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Constructor under the Contract Documents. 1. "Defective" is hereby defined to include, but no by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, and abnormal noise or vibration. 2. Warranty period is 12 months starting on date of Substantial Completion. 1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance service by skilled, competent employees of the elevator installer for period of 12 months following Date of Substantial Completion. Include monthly preventive maintenance performed during normal working hours. Include repair or replacement of worn or defective parts or components and lubricating, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation in conformance with specified requirements. Include 24- hours-per-day, 7-days-per-week emergency callback service. Exclude only repair or replacement due to misuse, abuse, accidents, or neglect caused by persons other than personnel. B. Continuing Maintenance Service: Installer shall provide a continuing maintenance proposal to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, staring on date construction contract maintenance requirements are concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. 1.7 ELEVATOR REQUIREMENTS ^ n__..~.-J_ LL_ .L_II~...:__ _~~..:_____L_ f4.... !""'ruv!ue lI!e !U!!UW!!!\::! !e\..ju!!e!!!e!!l:5. 1. Quantity and Type: j passenger elevators 2. Capacity: 2500 LBS 3. Speed: 100 FPM 4. Travel: 14'-0" 5. Stops: ~ K 6. Openings: 2 in line 7. Power: 208 Volt 3 Phase 0 Hertz 8. Operation: Duplex selective collective PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in Work include 1. Mowrey Elevator 2. Otis Elevator Company 3. Kone Elevator Company 2.2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS A. General Requirement: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered elevator systems that will comply with or fulfill the requirements of these specifications or, at manufacturer's option, provide custom-manufactured elevator systems that will fulfill requirements. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components published by manufacture as included in standard pre-engineered elevator systems and as required for complete system. B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide manufacturers standard single-acting under- the-car hydraulic plunger-cylinder unit for each elevator, with electric pump-tank-control-system equipment in machine room as indicated. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 2 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY C. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by manufacture, and provide isolation couplings to prevent sound/vibration transmission from power unit. D. Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery, another components of another specification section. E. Car Frame and Platform: Manufacturer's standard welded steel units. 2.3 SiGNAL EQUiPMENT A. General: All signal equipment including car stations, hall stations, position indicators and lanterns shall operate by serial link communications. Provide signal equipment for elevator to comply with requirements indicated below. 1. Provide illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light up when activated and remain lighted until call or other function has been fulfilled; fabricate of acrylic or other permanent translucent plastic. Pushbuttons shall be the vandal resistant type. 2. Exposed surfaces of stainless steel with # 4 satin finish. 3. Car Control Stations: Provide car control station in car with flush-mounted metal faceplate containing call button for each landing served and other buttons, switches, and controls required for specified car operation and control. ~v1ount at height complying with AStv1E/At~SI A 117.1. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door. Provide operation device symbols as required by Code. Mark other buttons and switches with manufacturers standard identification for required use or function. 4. Car Position Indicator: For Passenger elevators car, provide either illuminated-signal type or digital- display type, located near top of each car or in car control station. Include direction-of next sianal if not orovided in f:~r l:nntrnl st~tinn ....,. ---I--~ -~------ --. --..---.----.-... a. In addition to visual indicator, provide audible voice announcer to indicate to passengers the car position and direction of travel. 5. Haii Push-Button indicator: Provide hall push-button station at each landing for elevator. 6. Telephone: Provide rough-in for telephone hand set in each car, contained in flush-mounted cabinet and complete with identification and instructions for use. 7. Alarm System: Provide emergency alarm bell properly located with building and audible outside hoistways, equipped to sound automatically in response to emergency stops and in response to "Alarm" button on each car control station. 8. Elevator Cab signage: Provide signage in cab prohibiting smoking in elevator cab at al! times. 2.4 2.4 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER A. Provide a "state of the art" microprocessor based controller. All connections to signal fixtures/pushbuttons shall be via serial communication. Diagnostics shail be by a visual display. Controller shall have built in capacity for remote monitoring via modern without any modifications. B. Door Operator: Closed loop microprocessor type that communicates with main control panel via serial link. C. Motor Starter: Solid state "soft start" type. 2.5 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered car enclosures of the selections indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, ceiling finish, wall finish, access doors, doors, power door operators, sill (threshold), trim, accessories, and floor finish unless indicated as not work of this Section. Provide horizontal sliding doors of manufacturer's standard protective edge trim system for door and wall panels, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections as indicated for each car enclosure surface; provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: a. Stainless Steel: A!S! Type 302/304 'vvith ""~O. 4 satin finish. b. Aluminum Sills: Cast or extruded aluminum, with grooved surfaces,1/4-inch thickness, mill finish. ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 14240 - 3 OF 5 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY c. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD3,Type GP-50 (0.050- inch nominal thickness); color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from standard products available in the industry. d. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. e. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. f. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent of egg- crate plastic, of acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic complying with flammability requirements. Vinyl Cg,mposition tile Floor Cov~g: ASTM F 1066,Composition,12 inch by 12 by '"118 inch thick; color and pattern as selected by architect from manufacturer's standard range. 2.6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Handrails: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel handrails on back wall. B. Door Edge Protective Device: Provide proximity type door protection devices. 2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacture's standard, pre-engineered, hollow metal type, sliding, door-and frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, safeties, sills, and accessories. Match car enclosure doors for size and door panel movement. Provide frame-section size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction as indicated. ..... Materials and Fabrication: n_......, .:...J-. _.....1..............:................ :...........1:........."'..........1 ...1-.......&. ..........---.......1.. ...:...h ........._....... ..t::............,&., ...........J,..; .....................,.I_...,.,!...... D. rlUVlut:: ~t::It::vLlUII" IIIUI\..,dlt::U 1I1dl vUIII~.JlY Willi IIIQIIUIQ\..,lUlv" ;;:)LOIIUOIU.;:); but not less than the following: 1. Stainless Steel Frames: Formed stainless steel sheet, AISI Type 302/304 with NO.4 satin finish. 2. Plastic laminate door panels. 3. Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, %-inch thickness, mill finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms, as constructed; verify all critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and all other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work required during installation. B. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in elevator pit to accommodate installation of plunger-cylinder unit. 1. Install casings with waterproof seals at pit floor and with waterproof, high-pressure seal at bottom of casings. 2. Provide manufacture's standard second (inner) casing of fiberglass of PVC with waterproof, high-pressure seal at bottom and set inside outer (initial) casing. C. Ine::t~1I nil Innpr-~\Ilinrlpr 1 mite:: nil Imh ~nrl ~~~llr~tpl\I ~pntprprl for plp\l~tor r.~r nosition ~nrl tr::tvpl' ...-..--.. ,..........;:::7-. -J....--. .........- ,...-'-"'- -..- ----.---'J --...-.-- .-. -.-.-.--. __, ,...---'-'-" -..- ---,-,' anchor securely on place. HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 4 OF 5 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION CAPE CANAVERAL COUNTRY INNS & SUITES NEW FACILITY D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators. E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by Contractor to ensure dimensional coordination of the work. F. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration- absorption mounts, designed to effectively prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby to eliminate sources of structure-borne noise from elevator. G. Install piping without routing underground, where possible. Where not possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping before backfilling. H. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as recommended by manufactures. I. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable, dimension at each landing. J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Coordinate with other trades to facilitate and ensure proper grouting of sills. 3.3 FiELD QUAliTY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of elevator installation, and before permitting use of elevator (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance test as required and recommended by Code and by governing regulations or agencies. B. Advise Constructor, Owner, Architect and inspection department of governing agencies in advance of dates and times test are to be performed on elevators. 3.4 PROTECTION A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work (or portion thereof), provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or such other methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevator. Review emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a complete elevator maintenance program. B. Make a final check of elevator operation with Owner's personnel present and just prior to date of Substantial Completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION 14240 - 5 OF 5 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DIVISION MECHANICAL INDEX SECTION DESCRIPTION 15001 MECHANICAL ALTERNATES 15010 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15050 MECHANICAL BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS 15060 PIPES & PIPE FITTINGS 15100 VALVES 15185 INSULATION 15400 PLUMBING 15800 HEATING, VENTILATION & AIR CONDITIONING SHEET # DESCRIPTION MEl.l MECHANICAL ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN Ml.l FIRST FLOOR PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN Ml.2 SECOND FLOOR PLillviBING FLOOR PLA1'.J MI.3 THIRD FLOOR PLLJlvIBING FLOOR PLAN MIA FOURTH FLOOR PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN M2.1 FIRST FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLAN M2.2 SECOND FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLAN M2.3 THIRD FLOOR HV AC FLOOR PLAN ......." A T""'",",ymr-r"TTT"'Tf'\."""""T"'l TT't:TAr"iT""Tr't.f'\.T'lrl T1l.Y A'-T lVIL'f ~VUKln~LVVKnVAL~LVVKrL~~ 1\ ,Ci 1 ROOF PLU1\1Bfr.JG MID HV AC PLM.J lVl.,J.l M4.1 ~1ECHA}~CALSCHEDL~ES M5.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS M6.1 PLUMBING ISOMETRICS COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON lofl 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. DIVISION 15000 SECTION 15001 MECHANICAL MECHANICAL ALTERNATES 01.0 MECHANICAL ALTERNATES 01.1 The Mechanical Contractor shall provide an alternate price to add or delete from the base bid of the mechanical contract documents for the following items: a. Alternate M-l: Provide an alternate price to use schedule 40 PVC pipe for above ground sanitary sewer and storm sewer piping in lieu of cast iron piping. All above ground PVC storm sewer piping shall be insulated 1" thick. b. Alternate M-2: Provide an alternate price to delete the water softener. Under this alternate furnish and install valved and capped stubs with valved by-pass for future water softener. END OF SECTION COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON lof1 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. DIVISION 15000 SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 01.0 GENERAL 01.1 The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions, and Temporary Facilities of the Project Contract Documents are hereby incorporated into and shall be a part of these specifications. 01.2 Before submitting proposal for the work for these specifications and drawings, each Bidder shall examine the site and familiarize himself with all existing conditions such as utility service pressure, locations, invert elevations, and materials. No extra compensation will be allowed because of a misunderstanding as to the amount of work involved or lack of knowledge of existing conditions. Also consult drawings and specifications of other trades for correlating. 02.0 RELATED WORK 02.1 Concrete foundation and pits: The Mechanical Contractor shall provide suitable concrete foundations, pads, pits, and necessary anchor bolts, tie plates, etc. for his systems unless otherwise noted or specified. 02.2 Electrical Work: See Division 16 for related electrical wiring and conduit not specified in this section. 03.0 DRAWINGS & SPECIFICATIONS (\') 1 The drawings accompanying the specifications are diagrammatic and are intended to indicate the V-Y. .I. approximate and relative locations of services and equipment; the drawings shall not be scaled. Verify building dimensions with dimensions on Architectural drawings. Because the drawings ",,"p ,-!;",o-r"'mm",tif' "'nt-! rm Cl "mall "f'Cllp ",11 ,";"pr" drr.n" r.ff"pt" ptf' nCl\ip nr.t nppn dl{)\X!n II,..C..I........ '-&-.l..~b.l.-""..L ..L.I...L~".I.........., '-1-.1.. __ '-".I....L ~ u.....I...... .1...1.. ...................1.'-', ............ .1............_ 1...1, L'-"Y""', _..A-..L..................., .................. .....0................ .....z............. "-'__-"--"- ....................... ......... Install all systems and individual equipment according to the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Where these differ from these contract documents, contact the Engineer immediately. All pipes, ducts and equipment shall be placed to avoid interference; also coordinate with other trades. Except for piping and ductwork in equipment rooms, ducts and piping shall be concealed unless specifically indicated otherwise or directed by Architect. 03.2 The Contractor shall maintain an up-to-date set of plans and specifications at the job site. Transfer all field changes to one (1) clean set at time of substantial completion and submit to Engineer prior to final acceptance. 03.3 In specifying particular materials and/or methods, the intent is to indicate the minimum standard of quality acceptable to the Owner. In all cases where these contract documents do not meet the minimum standards of the existing federal, state and local codes and local regulations and requirements, then those governing codes, regulations and requirements shall prevail. COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON lof6 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. DIVISION 15000 SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 04.0 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 04.1 Where one manufacturer, model or brand name is specified alone, no substitution will be allowed, except as an alternate. Where more than one manufacturer, model or brand name is specified for the same item, the Contractor may choose between them. When one or more manufacturers, models or brand names are mentioned and followed by the phrase "or approved equal", it shall be understood that the names mentioned are to set a standard, and another manufacturer, model or brand name may be used if fully equal or superior. 04.2 Acceptance of substitutions shall in no way relieve this Contractor from the responsibility for any deficiency which may exist in the substitute product or from performing the required work. If the accepted substitution shall require changes or modifications to the work of any other trades, such changes shall be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Verify and coordinate all dimensions and other pertinent characteristics of the substitute materials with the requirements of all other parts of the building. 04.3 Should equipment furnished be different from the Model Numbers in the specification, schedules, or drawings, the Contractor initiating such change shall be responsible for all extra costs. 04.4 No prior approval of equipment, or materials will be required. However, no contract or letter of intent win be awarded until a list of all equipment has been submitted and approved by the Engineer. The "apparent low bidder" shall submit the list within forty-eight (48) hours after notification from the Architect/Engineer; if such is not submitted by that time, it will be assumed that all items of equipment and materials to be used, if awarded a contract, shall be exactly as specified. 05.0 SHOP DRAWINGS 05.1 The equipment manufacturer shall submit a minimum of seven (7) copies of shop drawings to the Contractor. The Contractor shall review, stamp, retain three (3) copies and send four (4) to the Engineer for review. The Engineer shall retain on (1) reviewed copy for his files, forward one (1) copy to the Architect and return two (2) copies to the Contractor to be incorporated into the Maintenance & Operating Instructions Manual. The Contractor, with the use of the reviewed copies shall make any necessary changes to the remaining three (3) copies and retain one (1) copy for his files, forward one (1) copy to the General Contractor and provide one (1) copy on file at the job site. 06.0 MAINTENANCE & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 06.1 Two (2) bound copies of manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance procedures and shop drawings with internal wiring diagrams for all equipment shall be submitted to the Owner prior to final inspection and acceptance of the building. COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON 2of6 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANA VERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. DIVISION 15000 SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 06.2 After all tests and adjustments have been made, the Contractor shall furnish the necessary qualified attendants and shall put the plant in continuous operation during which time he shall give complete operating and maintenance instructions to the owner's representative. 07.0 GUARANTEES 07.1 This Contractor shall guarantee all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of all apparatus furnished and installed by him for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final acceptance of the whole work; he shall guarantee to repair or replace at his own expense any part of the apparatus which may show defect, in the opinion of the Architect or Engineer, due to imperfect material or workmanship. 08.0 COMPLAINTS DUE TO ADJUSTMENT OR REPAIR 08.1 Any complaints received by the Architect or Engineer due to adjustments, operations, difficulties or repairs, within the construction time or guarantee time "vill be turned over to the Contractor. 08.2 Upon the receipt of complaint by letter, wire or telephone, the Contractor shall investigate complaint immediately, and complete the necessary work within seventy-two (72) hours, or as directed by the Architect or Engineer. fifi fi UTILITY PERt'\HTS. FEES. LICENSES & SERVICES u~.u no 1 All P"'nTI1tS li""'ns"''' fpe" and ""'nr1"'" "harg"''' r"'rlu;r",r! ,n "rmn"'''t,on nr,t1, t1,,,, nr("'lrk ("'If t1,;" V../..L Ll...L V.L .1...1.'- , .I. '""'''''.1. vu, V u UV Y.LV"",, V .L vu .l.v'1. ..1..1."'-''"-1. L.LL V'-'.l..LL.l."""'.I...l..L YT.l."'.l..l. ".1..l._ 1'1''-'..1...1. ""'.... '-.l..l..l.U' division shall be secured and paid for by this Contractor. This includes water and sewer hookup charges and meter deposits. 09.2 Schedule and coordinate all work with government agencies and utility companies. Arrange for all inspections and furnish certification of final inspection and any other approvals as required by enforcement authorities. 10.0 CODES & STANDARDS 10.1 All work shall conform to the following codes and regulations amended to this date: a. Local & State Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Codes. b. State and Local Plumbing Codes. c. Local and State Board of Health Regulations. d. Local Electrical Installation Codes. e. Local applicable ordinances. f. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations. g. Gas Company Requirements. h. OSHA-Occupational Safety & Health Act. 1. State Energy Code. J. American's with Disabilities Act. COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON 30f6 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC. DIVISION 15000 SECTION 15010 MECHANICAL MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 10.2 All materials and eauioment suoo1ied shall conform to the followlno- RhmrhmlR ::lmpnilpil to thi" . . . . -----~---- -- ---- ----- "---0 ~-~---_....._....... -............-..........--- "'- ...................... date: a. American Standards Association. b. American Society of Mechanical Engineers. c. American Gas Association. d. Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Nat. Assn. Inc. e. Underwriters Laboratories. f. National Electrical Manufacturers Association. g. Manufacturer's Standardization of the Valve & Fitting Ind. 11.0 CORRELATION OF WORK 11.1 Correlate work with that of other Contractors. Organize work so that it will not interfere with or delay the work of other Contractors. 11.2 Field verify scale dimensions on plans since actual locations, distances and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. 11.3 Check architectural, structural, electrical and also the plumbing, heating and ventilating plans to avoid possible installation conflicts. Should changes from the original plans be made necessary to resolve such conflicts, notify the Engineer and secure approval and agreement on necessary adjustments before the fabrication and installation is started. Make all arrangements for the entry of equipment to the installed locations. 12.0 QUALITY OF 'VORKMANSHIP 12.1 All work shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner and shall follow the best modem practice for construction indicated. 13.0 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 13.1 All motors shall be furnished with mechanical equipment by Mechanical Contractor and shaH conform to the Standard Specifications ofNEMA and shall bear nameplate of manufacturer, with current and operating characteristics thereon. 13.2 Electrical Characteristics, such as voltage and phase, shall be as given in the contract documents. Where this information is not given, Contractor shall contact the Engineer prior to bidding. No extra compensation will be allowed because of failure to contact the Engineer to obtain electrical characteristics. COUNTRY INN & SUITES BY CARLSON 4of6 5 JUL 04 CAPE CANAVERAL, FLORIDA PROJECT 0413 @ 2004 LINDELL ENGINEERING, INC.